Trance-Formations

Neuro-Linguistic Programming™
and
the Structure of Hypnosis

by
John Grinder
and
Richard Bandler
 Contents
Pesh Lafz (Foreword) – Safha 1–4

I. Taaruf (Introduction) – Safha 5–33

●​ Exercise 1 – Safha 8​

●​ Exercise 2 – Safha 11​

●​ Exercise 3 – Safha 27​

●​ Khaaka (Summary) – Safha 33​

II. Seedhi Inductions (Simple Inductions) – Safha 34–69

●​ Zubani Pacing aur Leading: 5-4-3-2-1 Exercise – Safha 35​

●​ Ghair Zubani Pacing aur Leading – Safha 43​

●​ Overlapping Representational Systems – Safha 44​

●​ Pehle Wale Trance State ka Access – Safha 49​

●​ Naturally Hone Wale Trance States – Safha 50​

●​ Exercise 4 – Safha 54​

●​ Behas (Discussion) – Safha 56​

●​ Trance States ko Anchor karna – Safha 61​

●​ Analogue Marking – Safha 63​

●​ Exercise 5 – Safha 66​

 ●​ Behas: Negative Commands aur Polarities – Safha 67​

III. Advanced Inductions – Safha 70–98

●​ Leverage Inductions aur Pattern Interruption – Safha 70​

●​ Dimag ka Overload – Safha 80​

●​ Realities ka Stack karna – Safha 85​

●​ Exercise 6 – Safha 88​

●​ Incorporation aur Abreactions se Deal karna – Safha 90​

●​ Dua/Dua-e-Khair (Benediction) – Safha 97​

IV. Utilization (Faida Uthana) – Safha 99–136

●​ Amal ke Hidayaat (Process Instructions) – Safha 99​

●​ Creative/Generative Tabdeeli – Safha 116​

●​ Exercise 7 – Safha 118​

●​ Safai ke Amal (Clean-up Routines) – Safha 120​

V. Reframing in Trance – Safha 137–177

●​ Taaruf – Safha 137​

●​ Reframing (Soch ka Pehlu Badalna) – Safha 147​

●​ Reframing Ka Khaka – Safha 159​

●​ Behas – Safha 160​

VI. Khaas Utilization Techniques – Safha 178–200

●​ Naye Rawaiye ka Generator – Safha 178​

●​ Deep Trance Identification – Safha 185​

●​ Dard par Qaboo – Safha 189​

●​ Bhool (Amnesia) – Safha 192​

●​ Zati Tareekh Wapas Laana – Safha 196​

VII. Calibration – Safha 201–212

●​ Exercise 8 – Safha 202​

●​ Exercise 9 – Safha 204​

●​ Exercise 10 – Safha 205​

●​ Crystal Ball Gazing – Safha 206​

VIII. Khud Hypnosis (Self-Hypnosis) – Safha 213–223

●​ Behas – Safha 219​

IX. Sawalat (Questions) – Safha 224–237

●​ Dua-e-Khair (Benediction) – Safha 235​

Appendix I – Safha 238–239​

Appendix II – Safha 240–250​
Note – Safha 251–252​
Kitabi Hawalay (Bibliography) – Safha 253​
Index – Safha 254–255
 Foreword

Taqreeban har shakhs ka hypnosis se strong reaction hota hai

— kuch log ise positive samajhte hain, aur kuch log negative.​
Kuch kehte hain ke yeh aik fraud hai ya sirf logo ko murghi banane ke
liye hota hai. Kuch sochte hain ke yeh har maslay ka hal hai — baal se le
kar pair ke naqsh tak. Aur kuch isay itna khatarnaak samajhte hain ke is
se door rehna chahiye.

Trance experiences (hypnotic halat) har daur mein kisi na kisi form
mein rahi hain, lekin hamesha unke gird aik "jadui" aura hota tha, jo
explain nahi hota tha.​
Lekin is kitab ki khaas baat yeh hai ke yeh hypnosis ko magic nahi,
balkay samajhnay layak tareeqon mein convert karti hai — jo sirf
"hypnosis" ke liye nahi, balkay rozmarra ki communication mein bhi
kaam aate hain.

John Grinder aur Richard Bandler jab hypnosis par seminar karte hain,
to aik kehta hai:​
“Har communication hypnosis hai.”​
Dusra kehta hai:​
“Main disagree karta hoon — hypnosis kuch bhi nahi hoti,
hypnosis ka wajood hi nahi.”​
Aur dono theek keh rahe hote hain. Yeh aik paradox hai — dono baatien
aik hi cheez ke alag andaz hain.

Agar main aapko apne honeymoon ka snorkeling ka waqia sunaoon,

jahan rangeen machhliyaan, lehrain aur pani ka sukoon tha — aur agar
aapki soch yeh sab mehsoos karne lage, to meri baat ne aapka state of
consciousness change kiya — yaani, yeh bhi ek hypnosis hui.​
Yeh same pattern poets, salesmen, parents, politicians, aur
religious leaders bhi use karte hain.​
Agar hypnosis ka matlab kisi ka mental state change karna hai, to har
effective communication hypnosis hai.
Negative Command ka Hypnotic Pattern

Ek simple hypnotic tareeqa hota hai: "Negative Command."​

Jaise:​
“Blue mat socho.”​
Lekin samajhne ke liye blue sochna hi padta hai.

Agar hypnotist kahe:​

“Main nahi chahta ke aap abhi relax ho jayein.”​
To aksar log relax hona shuru kar dete hain — kyun? Kyun ke dimaag ko
baat samajhne ke liye relax ka tasawwur karna padta hai.

Parents bhi ghalti se yeh use karte hain:

●​ "Doodh mat giraana"​

●​ "Mat ladkhadaana"​

●​ "Pareshan mat hona"​

Yani unki baat actually wohi tasawwur dila rahi hoti hai jo woh
rokna chahte hain.​

Lekin agar yeh tareeqa samajh kar use kiya jaye to kaafi useful ban
sakta hai. Jaise:

●​ "Zyada curious mat hona ke is kitab se kya seekhne wale

ho."​

●​ "Main yeh nahi keh raha ke tum relax ho kar change hone
wale ho aglay chand hafton mein."​

Yani, hypnosis aur communication mein koi khaas farq nahi —

“Hypnosis alag se koi cheez nahi hai.”

Kitabon wali Traditional Hypnosis vs Real-Life Communication

Zyada tar log hypnosis ko samajhte hain jaise:​
“Aik specific waqt ka process, jisme aap ya kisi aur ko relax
kara kar maslay solve karte hain, phir uth kar normal life
mein wapas chalay jaate hain.”​
Agar aap is kitab ke baad bhi hypnosis ko yahi samajhte hain, to aap in
tools ka asli faida miss kar denge.​
Real zindagi — pyaar, kaam, maze — sab hypnosis chair ke bahar
hoti hai.

Hypnosis: Maslay Hal Karne se Zyada

Aap yeh skills sirf maslay hal karne ke liye nahi, personal growth ke
liye bhi use kar sakte hain:

●​ Behtar communicate karna​

●​ Pyar zyada enjoy karna​

●​ Asani se naye skills seekhna​

●​ Zindagi ka structure hi badal dena​

Milton Erickson aur NLP Modeling

Yeh kitaab kaafi kuch Milton H. Erickson ke kaam se inspired hai — jo

duniya ke sabse mashhoor hypnotist maane jaate hain.​
Jab author ne unse poocha ke aap alag-alag patients ke saath mukhtalif
tareeqay kyun use karte hain, to Erickson ne kaha:​
“Bas apne unconscious mind par bharosa rakho.”

Masla yeh hai ke sab ke paas Milton Erickson ka unconscious mind nahi
hota.​
Grinder aur Bandler ki genius yeh hai ke unhone Milton ke
kaam ko observe kar ke detail mein explain kiya — kis signal
pe react karte hain, kaise karte hain, aur kyun.​
Is wajah se ab dusre log bhi wohi kaam kar sakte hain — practice se woh
bhi automatic ho jata hai, jaise glass uthana.

Erickson ne bhi confess kiya ke:​

“Yeh kitab mere kaam ko mujh se zyada achi tarah samjha
sakti hai.”

Kitaab ka Structure

●​ Yeh kitab 10 seminars ke word-for-word (verbatim) transcripts se

bani hai.​

●​ Richard aur John ke beech ka farq mention nahi kiya gaya.​

●​ Repetition dusri NLP books se avoid kiya gaya hai.​

●​ Achi complementary books: Frogs into Princes, Patterns of

the Hypnotic Techniques of Milton H. Erickson, aur They
Lived Happily Ever After.​

Aakhri advice:​
Agar aap hypnosis seekhna chahte hain, to har choti cheez ko practice
karo — agar koi concept mushkil lage, usay aur choti tukdon mein tod lo.​
Agar sirf maze ya curiosity ke liye padh rahe ho — to maze karo. Bandler
aur Grinder ka teaching style kai comedians se zyada entertaining hai.

— Connirae Andreas
 Chapter I : Introduction

Aaj ka hamara topic hai: Hypnosis.​

Ab chahein to turant behas shuru kar dein ke yeh asal mein hoti bhi hai
ya nahi, aur agar hoti hai to asal mein hoti kya hai.​
Lekin kyunke aap already paise de kar yeh seminar attend kar rahe ho,
to main abhi wo behas nahi chedta.

Mera khayal hai ke in teen dinon mein — jo hum yahan saath guzaarenge
— aap yeh samajhne lag jaoge ke wo behas bhi aik productive discussion
ban sakti hai. Aap yeh bhi jaan loge ke aap hypnosis ke bare mein pehle
se kaafi kuch jaante ho — chahe kisi aur naam se, ya bina kisi naam ke.​
Aap pehle se guzri hui kuch experiences ko dobara dekh kar yeh samajh
jaoge ke woh asal mein altered state of consciousness ke zabardast
examples thay.

In teen dinon mein, main aapse yeh do cheezen expect karunga:

●​ Seekhna​

●​ Aur maza lena​

Main assume karta hoon ke aap sab yahan kam az kam do

maqsad le kar aaye ho:

1.​ Hypnotic patterning ka faida samajhna, aur yeh dekhnay ke

liye ke aap apne kaam (chahe psychotherapy ho, management,
education, nursing, sales, ya kuch aur) mein ise kaise use kar sakte
ho.​
 2.​ Kuch personal tabdeeliyan lana, apne andar kuch behtar
tareeqe lana.​

Main aapko yeh dawat deta hoon ke in dono goals ko puri tarah zehan
mein rakh kar participate karo.​
Hum is material ko discuss bhi karenge, demonstrations bhi karenge,
aur aapko kuch exercises bhi karwaenge — hamari guidance mein.

Hypnotic patterning ek skill hai — aur har skill ki tarah, isay

seekhne ke liye practice zaroori hai.​
Main samajhta hoon ke aap mein se zyada log car chala lete hain. Aur
agar nahi chalate, to koi aur perceptual-motor skill zaroor aati hogi:
bicycle chalana, skating, ya koi sport.

Yaad karo jab pehli baar aapne car chalani seekhi thi — kitni cheezen ek
sath yaad rakhni padti thi:

●​ Haath steering aur gear shift par​

●​ Paon brake, clutch, aur accelerator par​

●​ Bahar road bhi dekhni hoti thi​

Yeh sab initially mushkil lagta hai.​

Lekin jab aap in sub tasks ko chhote chhote pieces mein tod
kar baar baar practice karte ho, to dheere dheere yeh
subconscious level par effortless ban jata hai.

Hypnosis seekhne ka bhi yahi tareeqa hai:

●​ Chunk by chunk practice karo​

●​ Har part ko unconscious level tak le jao​

 ●​ Taake jab aap kisi ke samne baitho, to bina conscious planning ke
hypnotic results nikal sako​

Teen din ka time thoda hai — lekin hum hypnosis ko chunks

mein tod ke sikhaenge.​
Hamari responsibility yeh hogi ke aapko har chhoti skill sikhane ke sath
sath ek complete overall framework bhi de dein, jise aap seminar ke baad
bhi practice kar sako.

Main umeed karta hoon ke aapka unconscious mind seminar ke baad bhi
yeh skills practice karta rahega — aur naye tareeqe bhi khud banata
rahega.

Humara asli kaam kya hai? Modeling.​

Modeling ka matlab hai:

●​ Kisi kaam ko observe kar ke uska effective description banana​

●​ Aur yeh dekhna ke kis tarah ka behavior result deta hai​

Yeh kaam kuch-kuch cookbook likhne jaisa hai.

Agle teen dinon mein hum aapko hypnosis ka ek model sikhaenge.

●​ Yeh na koi absolute truth hai​

●​ Na koi final answer​

●​ Na hi yeh “real” hai​

Agar aap “real hypnosis” ka peechha karne lage to main argue nahi kar
paunga — kyunke mujhe bhi nahi pata ke asal mein andar kya hota hai.
Mujhe sirf yeh pata hai ke hypnosis kaam karti hai — bilkul usi
tarah jaise aap seekhte ho, ya kisi language ko samajhte ho.

Hypnosis koi alag duniya nahi hai — lekin jis format mein hum
aapko sikha rahe hain, yeh ek bohot powerful tool ban jata hai.​
Main chahta hoon ke aap isay ek amplifier samjho.​
Jo bhi kaam aap already kar rahe ho — sales, therapy, teaching, court
arguments — hypnosis us kaam ka effect aur zyada intense bana deta
hai.​
Lekin hypnosis akelay kuch nahi kar sakta.

Important clarification:​
Hypnosis koi magic wand nahi hai.

Main 7 saal se hypnosis use kar raha hoon — phir bhi kabhi kabhi thaka
hua uthta hoon.​
Coffee nahi peeta, lekin agar pi loon to body hilne lagti hai.​
Agar gir jaun to chot lagti hai.​
Agar hypnosis se dard khatam kar loon, to daant dikhwane dentist ke
paas phir bhi jaana padta hai.

Yeh limitations hypnosis mein nahi, balkay insaan mein hoti hain.​
Hypnosis aur communication arts abhi bhi apne initial stage mein
hain.

Sabse ajeeb baat yeh hai ke hypnosis waise cheez hai jo aap
already jaante ho — bas aapne notice nahi kiya.​
Is liye main aapko lambe lectures nahi doonga — balkay kuch karne ko
kehunga, aur phir us par baat karenge.
 Exercise I
Main chahta hoon ke aap log 3 logon ke group bana lo. In teen logon mein se aik shakhs,
Person A, koi aisi cheez sochay jo is description par poori utarti ho: aisi situation jismein
aap gehri tarah involve ho jate ho, aur aapki attention ka focus limited ho jata ho. Kisi
ke liye yeh jogging ho sakta hai, kisi aur ke liye book parhna. Yeh likhna, TV dekhna, movie
dekhna, ya lambi drive bhi ho sakta hai — koi bhi kaam jo is tarah ka ho.

Agar aap Person A ho, to group ke doosray do logon (B aur C) ko sirf us experience ka
naam batana hai: jaise "jogging", "sailing" — bas aik lafz. Zyada tafseel mat dena, warna
un ke liye kaam asaan ho jaye ga. Sirf aik word do, phir aram se beth jao, aankhein band
karo, aur pretend karo ke aap hypnosis mein ho — waise bhi yeh sab pretend hi hai.

Ab B aur C ka kaam yeh hai ke woh sensory terms mein describe karein ke agar A waqai
woh experience kar raha ho to us mein kon si cheezein zaroor honi chahiyein.

Jaadui lafz hain: "zaroor honi chahiyein" (have to).​

Misal ke taur par: agar koi "jogging" kar raha hai, aur aap kehte ho ke "bright sun tumhare
upar chamak raha hai" — to yeh zaroori nahi hai, kyunke log raat ko bhi jog karte hain ya
badal wale dinon mein bhi.​
Lekin unko zameen ka touch mehsoos hoga, ya skin ka temperature — yeh zaroor ho ga.

To aapko artfully vague (nafrat se vague) rehna hai.​

B aur C aik aik kar ke do do jumlay ya phrases bolengein.

Example:

●​ "Tum apne jism par hawa ka temperature mehsoos kar sakte ho, aur jahan tumhara
paon zameen ko touch karta hai."​

●​ "Tumhein apne dil ki dhadkan sunai deti hai. Tumhein apni skin ka temperature feel
hota hai."​

Yeh sab cheezein zaroor hoti hain jab banda wo kaam kar raha hota hai.

Main ab aur detail nahi doon ga. Har shakhs apni turn lega.​
Jo shakhs aankhein band kar ke baitha ho, woh notice karein ke kaun si cheezein usay
zyada deeply uss experience mein le ja rahi hain, aur kaun si cheezein usay distract kar rahi
hain.

Apna experience hi apka teacher ho ga.

Chalo shuru karo. Har shakhs ko lagbhag 5 minute milenge.

Main shuru main tumse zyada baat nahi karna chahta tha kyunke jab bhi main hypnosis ka
course shuru karta hoon, to mushkil hota hai khud ko rokna ke main foran koi badi
demonstration na kar doon. Main ne tumse kaha tha ke note karo ke kis tarah ki cheezein
tumhain uss state of consciousness (sha'oor ki haalat) mein wapas le jati hain jo tum ne woh
experience karte hue mehsoos ki thi — aur kaun si cheezein isay mushkil banati hain. Kaun
si baatein tumhein jhatka deti hain, aur kaun si baatein tumhein zyada relaxed karti hain?
Kaun si baatein disconnect lagti hain, aur kaun si baatein tumhein yeh bhula deti hain ke tum
asal mein kahan ho?

Aurat: Jo bhi cheez mere jism se related thi, us ne mujhe zyada gehra le gaya. Aur jo cheez
mere zehan se related thi — jaise main us bare mein kya sochti hoon ya mera reaction kya
hai — us ne mujhe thoda bahar nikaal diya.

Main exactly yeh janna chahta hoon ke dusre bande ne kya kaha. Kuch examples do.

Aurat: Theek hai, main piano baja rahi thi. Jab us bande ne kaha “Tumhein apni ungliyon ka
keys se touch mehsoos hota hai,” to main aur gehri chali gayi. Lekin agar us ne kuch aisa
kaha jaise “Tumhein lagta hai ke music tum ho,” to main wapas bahar aa gayi.

Mard: Mere liye yeh asaan tha jab uski voice ka tempo mere saans lene ke rate ke barabar
tha.

Kis tarah ki cheezein mushkil bana rahi thi?

Mard: Jab usne koi aisi baat ki jo meri soch se match nahi kar rahi thi. Main apne aap ko
indoor skating rink mein dekh raha tha, lekin kisi ne outdoor cheez ka zikr kar diya, to
confusion ho gaya.

Haan, tum indoor skating rink mein ho aur koi kehta hai: "Tum upar dekhtay ho aur asmaan
ki khoobsurti mehsoos karte ho."

Aurat: Mere partner ne mujh se kaha “Tum apni saans sun aur mehsoos kar sakti ho.” Yeh
baat mujhe jhatka de gayi, kyunke main dono cheezein aik saath nahi kar sakti thi. Mere
zehan mein aaya: “Nahi bhai, zara ruk ja. Main yeh dono kaise karun?”

Theek hai, kis cheez ne asaan banaya?

Aurat: Jab usne sirf ek cheez bolne ko kaha aik waqt mein, jaise: “Tum apni saans sun sakti
ho.”

Mard: Main underwater swimming kar raha tha jab kisi ne kaha: “Tumhein apne haath ka
paani se takraana mehsoos hota hai.” To maine socha: “Nahi bhai, main to paani ke andar
hoon. Mujhe splash kaise mehsoos hoga?”

Aurat: Hum music ke baare mein baat kar rahe thay, aur ek point pe usne kaha “Tum dunya
ke saath in tune ho,” to usne mujhe aur gehra bhej diya.

Kya cheez mushkil banayi?

Aurat: Usne to koi aisi cheez nahi boli jo mushkil ho.

Instructor: Theek hai, woh to ab ghar ja sakta hai.

Woman: Aik cheez aur thi. Agar aik shakhs apni voice slow kar deta aur doosra usi waqt fast
bolta, tou mein wapas hosh mein aa jati.

Jaise aik banda kehta (slowly) "aur tum mehsoos karo gey... bohot... zyada... relaxed"​
Aur doosra kehta (tezi se) "aur aur aur zyada relaxed."

Man: Mere partners sirf feeling words use kar rahe thay. Pehle tou yeh bohot easy tha,
kyunke mein sirf aik sensory system use kar raha tha, lekin thodi der baad mujhe laga
"mujhe kuch dekhna hai." Mujhe kuch nazar nahi aa raha tha.

Tou asal mein masla kisi cheez ke na hone ka tha. Instructions redundant lag rahi thein, bar
bar wohi cheezein.

Man: Aik phrase ne mujhe bilkul distract kar diya jab mein trance mein tha: "as all other
experiences fade." Jaise hi yeh suna—bang!—mein wapas aa gaya.

Tumhara dimagh un "other experiences" ko dhoondhne laga taake woh fade ho sakein. Kya
cheez asaan banayi?

Man: Sensory cheezein: guitar ko mehsoos karna, ungliyon ka hilna, music dekhna.

Woman: Jab koi obvious cheez chhod di gayi tou mujhe mushkil hui. Mein aik picture paint
kar rahi thi aur mere partners ne kabhi brush ke feel ka zikar hi nahi kiya.

Woh mushkil kaise bana? Tumhe kaise laga ke kuch missing hai?

Woman: Mujhe lag raha tha kuch adhoora hai; mujhe khud fill karna padega. Woh sirf paint
mix karne, view dekhne aur picture ke khoobsurat hone ki baat kar rahe thay.

Aur tum yeh sab nahi kar rahi thi?

Nahi, mujhe paint mix karne se brush pakarne aur painting karne tak ka process complete
karna padta tha, phir mein picture ko dekh sakti thi.

Tou yeh transition natural nahi tha? Jaise koi kehta "tum beach par kharay ho, suraj ki garmi
apne jism par mehsoos kar rahe ho, aur beach ki taraf dekhte ho ke tum kitna tair chuke ho."

Ab jo cheez mein chahta hoon ke tum agle teen dino mein samjho, woh yeh hai ke altered
state mein jaane ke questions kaafi had tak tum logon ne abhi jawab de diye hain. Logon ko
hypnosis mein jaane mein jo mushkil hoti hai, woh genetic nahi hoti. Aisa nahi ke kuch log
kar hi nahi sakte. Asal mein, har banda karta hai—rozana. Problem yeh hai ke kisi ko pata
nahi chalta.

Hypnosis aik bohot natural process hai, aur yeh sirf aik lafz hai jo un tools ko describe karta
hai jo kisi ko consciously altered state mein le jaate hain. Log har waqt altered states mein
jaate hain. Shayad lunch ke waqt tum kisi elevator mein chadh jao kuch unknown logon ke
sath, aur dekho ke woh kaise behave karte hain. Log elevator mein apne normal tareeqe se
behave nahi karte. Aise lagta hai jaise "on hold" ho jaate hain aur floors ko dekhte rehte
hain.

Agar elevator ka darwaza us waqt khul jaaye jab woh ready nahi hote, tou aksar woh jaag
jaate hain aur bahar nikal jaate hain. Kitnon ne galat floor par utar ke realize kiya ke yeh
mera floor nahi tha? Yeh aik universal experience hai. Aise universal experiences ko
dhoondhna hypnosis induce karne ka aur usay kisi bhi kaam mein istemal karne ka key hai.

Ek aur important baat yeh hai ke natural sequence banani chahiye. Agar koi bole:​
"Main road par drive kar raha tha, Texas ja raha tha, window se bahar dekh raha tha, doosri
gaariyan guzar rahi thi, din bohat sunny tha... aur maine kaha ‘baarish kitni tez ho rahi hai!’”
—​
toh yeh aakhri line sunne wale ko confuse kar degi, ya dhyan tod degi. Aksar isi point par
log ya to sawal karte hain ya disagreement shuru kar dete hain.

Natural transitions logon ko smoothly altered state (hypnotic state) mein le jaati hain —
bina unhein jhatka diye.

Lekin kuch log jhatka dekar bhi altered state induce karte hain. Is technique ko confusion
technique kehte hain. Is mein aap be-maani transitions banate ho, log thoda confuse hote
hain, aur phir aap gradually unhein natural transitions ki taraf le jaate ho. Is pe baad mein
detail se baat hogi.

Agar aap gaur karo to logon ko jo cheezein confuse kar rahi thi, woh ya to non-sensory thi
ya universal experience nahi thi.​
Jaise agar aap piano baja rahe ho to fingers aur keys ka contact zaroori hai, lekin agar koi
bole "music tum ho", to har kisi ko yeh relate nahi hota.​
Socho agar tum "Chopsticks" baja rahe ho — kya tum khud ko chopstick mehsoos karoge?
Exactly — har jagah yeh metaphor kaam nahi karta.
 Exercise 2
Ab main chah raha hoon ke tum wahi kaam dobara karo, lekin is dafa tum sirf un cheezon ka
zikr karo jo sensory experience (mehsoos karne wali hissiyat) mein zaroor hoti hain —
aur specific na ho.

Agar tum kehte ho:​

"Tum pani ka splash sun sakte ho", aur banda paani ke neeche hai, to baat nahi banegi.​
Lekin agar tum kehte ho:​
"Tum paani ki awazon ko sun sakte ho" — to yeh kaam karega, kyunki kuch na kuch
awaaz to ho gi hi.

Ab ek aur cheez add karo:​

Tumhara voice tempo (awaz ka lehja aur raftar) doosre bande ki saans ke speed, rate
aur pace ke sath match kare.

Jab tum kisi ki breathing ke sath apne behavior ko match karte ho — chaahe apni saans ho,
awaz ka tempo ho, ya koi aur cheez — to iska bohot strong psychological impact hota
hai.

Try karo, aur khud dekh lo ke is ka asar kya hota hai.​

Wahi pehle wali experience lo, same group mein raho.​
Har shakhs ko 2 minute milenge. Kisi discussion mein mat jao.​
Poori group ko max 8–10 minute lagenge.​
Phir dekhna kya feel hota hai — is dafa kuch different feel hota hai ya nahi.

Baad mein feedback:

Main poochhna chahta hoon: kya tumne apne andar koi difference mehsoos kiya — sirf itni
si instruction ke bawajood?​
Kuch log sir hila rahe hain. Kya koi aisa hai jisko koi farq nahi mehsoos hua? ... Sirf ek
banda.

Sirf chhoti si instruction se, chhoti si tabdeeli se, poori group mein sirf ek shakhs ko chhoti
si bhi tabdeeli feel nahi hui.​
Yeh farq mere liye deep aur significant hai. Kyunki jo instructions di gayi woh to sirf aik
chhoti jhalak thi, asal cheezon ka to sirf trail tha.

Hypnosis ke bare mein:​

Mere liye hypnosis ka matlab yeh hai ke tum apne aap ko ek biofeedback machine bana
lo.

Jab tumne doosre bande ki saans ke rate ke sath apne voice tempo ko match kiya, tumhara
behavior uske behavior ka live feedback ban gaya.
Chaahe tum altered states ka istemal self-change ke liye kar rahe ho, medical purpose ke
liye, relaxation ke liye ya meditation ke liye —​
jo cheezein tumhe kisi doosre insan ke sath altered state mein le ja sakti hain, woh
tumhare genes se nahi aati, woh sirf communication techniques hoti hain.

Agar main tumse kehun (tez bolte hue):​

"bohot-aaram-se-sochna-hai",​
to tum confuse ho jaoge — kyunki jo bola jaa raha hai aur jis tareeke se bola jaa raha hai —
woh ek doosre ke opposite hain.

Lekin agar main tumse kahun:​

"Ab ruko... aur socho... bohot... aahista se... ke tumhari apni experience mein... kya
tabdeeli aayi..."

To mera tempo, meri speech ki raftar, aur mera body movement (jaise main bolte waqt
dheere dheere hilla) —​
yeh sab mere alfaaz ko interfere nahi karte — balki unhein enhance karte hain, amplify
karte hain.

Mujhe kisi ne yahaan "up" (upar) ka lafz use karte suna jab usne apni awaaz neeche kar di
— yeh aik incongruity (ulta contradiction) hai. Aise hai jaise koi kehta ho ke "main bohat
excited hoon" aur tone bilkul flat ho. Kuch hypnotists yeh galti karte hain. Purani soch yeh thi
ke hypnosis karte waqt monotone mein bolna chahiye — lekin asal mein, agar aap kisi ko
kisi thrilling (exciting) tajurbe mein wapas le ja rahe ho, to aapka tone bhi thrilled hona
chahiye. Trance ka matlab yeh nahi ke insaan murda ban jaye.

Bohat log kehte hain, "Mujhe nahi lagta main trance mein gaya kyunke mujhe awaazein
sunayi de rahi thi, cheezein mehsoos ho rahi thi." Bhai agar kuch bhi sunayi, dikhayi ya
mehsoos nahi ho raha, to wo trance nahi, death hai. Hypnosis mein log aksar cheezein
zyada intensely sunte, dekhte aur mehsoos karte hain.

Mera maanna hai ke hypnosis mein logon ka khud par control zyada hota hai, kam nahi.
Hypnosis ka matlab yeh nahi ke kisi ka control le lo — balke unko aisa feedback dena jo
normally unko nahi milta, jisse wo apna control wapas le saken.

Main jaanta hoon ke yahaan har shakhs kisi bhi trance state mein ja sakta hai — chahe
"Science" ne prove kiya ho ke aisa nahi. Aur jis tareeke se researchers ne prove kiya, us
tareeke se wo sahi bhi hain. Agar aap ek hi type ka hypnosis induction sab par try karo, to
kuch log trance mein jayenge aur kuch nahi — yeh traditional hypnosis ka tareeqa hai.

Lekin hum yahan traditional hypnosis nahi seekhne wale — hum seekhenge Ericksonian
hypnosis, jo ke Milton H. Erickson ke naam par hai. Ericksonian hypnosis ka matlab hai ke
aap hypnotist ki skills ko itna master karo ke aap kisi ko trance mein le jao normal
conversation ke zariye, bina "hypnosis" lafz ka zikr kiye.

Main ne bohat pehle seekh liya ke yeh matter nahi karta ke aap kya keh rahe ho, matter
karta hai kaise keh rahe ho. Agar aap kisi ko consciously convince karne ki koshish karo, to
wo resist karega. Haan, kuch log resist nahi karte aur sidha trance mein chale jaate hain —
lekin resist karna ya cooperate karna dono sirf yeh dikhate hain ke banda respond kar raha
hai. Har zinda insaan respond karta hai. Sawal yeh hai: kaise aur kis cheez par?

Jab koi aake kehta hai, "Log saalon se mujhe hypnotize karne ki koshish kar rahe hain lekin
kabhi kaam nahi kiya," aur fir bolta hai, "chalo try karo," to main kehta hoon, "Main nahi kar
sakta." Wo kehta hai, "Try to karo," main kehta hoon, "Main nahi kar sakta. Main agar
zabardasti karoon ke tum apni aankhen khuli rakho, to ho sakta hai wo khuli rahen. Chalo try
karte hain. Aankhen khuli rakho, bilkul alert raho. Har kaam tumhein yahin rakh ke rakhega,
present mein."

Aur usi waqt wo banda resist karte karte trance mein chala jaata hai.

Is example mein sirf yeh kiya gaya ke saamne wale ke response ko observe kiya gaya aur
usko aik aisa context diya gaya jisme wo naturally react kar saka. Zyada tar log itne
resistive nahi hote — lekin kabhi kabhi mil jaate hain. Agar aap samajh jao ke wo kya kar
rahe hain, aur us hisaab se apna behavior adjust karo, to trance dena asaan ho jaata hai.

Stage hypnotist aksar aik stage par audience mein se 20 log bulata hai aur unhein kuch
commands deta hai. Phir un mein se sirf woh log chunta hai jo naturally react karte hain —
lekin yeh skill ka signal nahi hota, yeh sirf ek statistical trick hoti hai. Main tumhein yeh
sikhana chahta hoon ke tum kis tarah samajh sako ke saamne wala banda kis tarah react
kar raha hai, aur phir apna behavior adjust karo taake usay aik aisa context mil jaye jismein
woh naturally altered state mein chala jaye — jismein tum usay jo chaho sikha sako.

Meri observation yeh hai ke log zyada achi tarah react tab karte hain jab woh ek aisi state
mein hote hain jise hypnotists rapport kehte hain. Rapport ka matlab hai ek aisi connection
jo matching behaviors se banti hai. Agar tum kisi se argue karte ho ya us se tez bolte ho,
ya jab woh visual soch raha ho aur tum feelings ki baat kar rahe ho — to rapport nahi
banegi.

Lekin agar tum:

●​ Apni voice ka tempo unki breathing ke rate ke mutabiq rakho​

●​ Unke blink karne ke rate ke saath blink karo​

●​ Unke nod karne ke rate ke saath nod karo​

●​ Agar woh hil rahe hain, to usi rate se tum bhi rock karo​

●​ Aur aisi baatein kaho jo waqai ho rahi hain (jaise "tum apne haath ki garmi mehsoos
kar sakte ho," ya "tumhare aas-paas ki awaazain sunai de rahi hain")​

To yeh sab pacing keh lata hai — yaani tum unke present experience ko match kar rahe ho.

Aik aam experience jo har kisi ke saath hota hai wo yeh hai ke jab tum freeway par gari
chala rahe hote ho aur kisi aur ki gari tumhare sath sath chal rahi hoti hai. Agar tum tez karte
ho, woh bhi tez karte hain. Agar tum slow hote ho, woh bhi. Yeh aik biofeedback loop
create karta hai — aur yeh subconscious level par hota hai. Agar tum kisi ki breathing ke
tempo se bolna shuru karo, aur dheere dheere apni speed kam karo, to unki breathing bhi
dheere ho jaegi. Agar tum achanak ruk jao, to woh bhi ruk jaega.

Agle exercise mein tumhe yeh karna hai ke tum unke haal ke experience se start karo —
na ke kisi purane ya imagined experience se. Jaise agar main Charlie ke saath yeh kar raha
hoon, to main bolunga:

"Aur tum meri awaaz sun rahe ho... tum mehsoos kar sakte ho ke tumhara baen haath
tumhari raan par kitna garam lag raha hai..."

Yaani main usi waqt jo cheezein uske saath ho rahi hain, unhein describe karunga — taake
uska mind naturally follow kare.

Yeh aik kala hai ke kaun se statements use karni chahiye.​

"Jab tak main yeh jumla na kahun, tum apne left kaan ki temperature aur feeling se
be-khabar rahoge," aur achanak tumhein us ka ehsas hone lagta hai.​
Agar main Ann se kahun "Tum mehsoos kar sakti ho us garmahat ko jo tumhare haath
aur thodi ke darmiyan hai," to woh shayad is se pehle us baat ka ehsas na kar rahi ho,
lekin jaise hi maine kaha, woh foran tasdeeq kar sakti hai ke maine jo kaha woh uske
experience ke mutabiq hai.​
Main credibility (yaani bharosa) hasil karta hoon, aur us ke sath sath un cheezon ko bara
chhota karta hoon jo uske andar waqi toh hain, lekin woh unse be-khabar thi jab tak maine
unka zikr na kiya.

Agar main kinesthetic (touch/feeling related) statements deta rahun, aur phir kahun​
"Aur tum sun sakti ho logon ke paper shuffle karne ki awaaz is kamray mein,"​
toh woh phir apni hoshmandi ko wahan shift karegi jahan se woh check kare ke kya maine
jo kaha woh theek hai.​
Main usay woh feedback de raha hoon jo us ke experience ka hissa to hai, lekin aam tor par
woh us cheez ko notice nahi karti.​
Is tarah main rapport (psychological connection) bana raha hoon, aur saath hi saath uski
consciousness (hoshmandi) ko badal raha hoon us technique ke zariye.

Aaj sirf hum woh principles seekhenge jo altered state (badli hui hoshmandi) induce (shuru)
karne ke liye hain.​
Lekin jab tum kisi ko altered state mein le aate ho to uske baad kya karna hai, woh alag
topic hai, jise hum kal dekhenge.

Kaafi arse se hypnotists is baat ko le kar pareshan rahe hain ke kisi ka trance kitna "gehra"
hai.​
Woh log trance ki gehraai ko yeh samajhte the ke tum kya kar sakte ho aur kya nahi.​
Lekin meri samajh mein trance ki "depth" koi meaningful (maani khaiz) concept nahi hai.​
Kuch altered states mein kuch hypnotic effects (asraat) hotay hain, doosron mein nahi.​
Lekin hypnotic effects khud mein koi zyada valuable (qeemti) cheez nahi hain.​
Jaise hallucinations—positive ya negative—yeh apne aap mein koi khaas cheez nahi.​
Unka faida sirf tab hai jab tum unhein kisi aur maqsad ke liye istemal karo.
Main ne dekha hai ke tum logon ko hypnotic phenomena jaise ke hallucinations, pain control
waghera sikhha sakte ho bina trance ke bhi, jaagte huye state mein.​
Yahan is kamray mein koi aisa shakhs hai jo jaagti halat mein yeh sab kar sakta hai.​
Kya koi aisa hai jo abhi tak apne bachpan ka imaginary dost ya janwar dekh sakta ho?​
Koi hai? Haath utha lo, hum tumhein giraftar nahi karein ge.​
(Kisi ne haath uthaya.)​
Theek hai, iska matlab hai ke tum hallucinate kar sakte ho jaagti halat mein.​
Yeh hallucination hai, mujhe umeed hai ke tumhein iska ehsas hai.​
Agar nahi hai, to humne bahar ek psychiatrist rakha hai jo electric shock therapy ke liye
ready hai.

Bohat se log negative hallucination bhi kar sakte hain — matlab yeh ke woh kisi cheez ko
dekh kar bhi na dekhein. Aksar aap table par kuch dhoondh rahe hote ho aur har jagah
dekhte ho lekin wo cheez samne rakh kar bhi nazar nahi aati. Wo cheez wahan hoti hai lekin
nazar nahi aati — yeh deep trance ka hi ek version hai.

Bachay apne parents ki baat ko rozana ignore karte hain — wo bhi ek negative hallucination
hai. Ab batao, kitne log aisay hain jo abhi yeh soch kar ek gulab ka phool soongh sakte hain,
jab ke asal mein wahan koi gulab nahi hai? Aik gehri saans lo, aur gulab ka khushboo
mehsoos karo. Agar tum yeh kar sakte ho, to hypnotic chart ke mutabiq tum already deep
trance ke 75% andar ja chuke ho.

Yani do possibilities hain: ya to tum kabhi waking state mein the hi nahi, ya phir wo charts
bananay walay loag hi ch***ye hain.

Trance ka matlab depth nahi hai — agar aap yahan kisi aur shakhs ke zehni halat ko sirf aik
second ke liye mehsoos kar lo, to LSD bhi bachon ka khel lagay ga. Trance sirf yeh hai ke
aap apne conscious tajurbe ko kuch aur bana do — thoda sa modify kar do.

California mein aik qanun pass ho raha hai ke sirf licensed hypnotist altered states induce
kar sakte hain. Lekin is qanun ka matlab yeh hoga ke jab do log pyaar mein hotay hain —
jab wo physical closeness feel karte hain — to wo bhi altered state hoti hai. To kya ab shadi
se pehle har shakhs ko licensed hypnotist banna padega? Ajeeb qanun ban raha hai — jese
shadi aur lawn kaatna ek hi baat ho.

Ab kaam ki baat. Jab aap kisi insan ke tajurbe ko verbally match karte ho (jaise "tumhare
kaan ki garmi" ya "tumhara haath chin ko touch kar raha hai"), to aap rapport banate ho.
Lekin aapko yeh bhi aana chahiye ke us rapport ka kya karna hai. Uska raaz yeh hai ke aap
transition banana seekho — ek insaan ko current state se trance state mein smoothly le
jaana.

Iske liye "as" aur "when" jaise lafz ka use hota hai — jaise:​
"As you sit there, it's possible for you to realize that I'm about to tell you something."​
Yahan baithne ka aur kuch realize karne ka koi logical link nahi, lekin sun'ne mein
meaningful lagta hai, aur tone of voice bhi usko strong banata hai.

Sensory-based statements ka use karna help karta hai altered states induce karne mein. Jo
kuch bhi aap keh rahe ho, wo insaan mehsoos kar sake — agar pehle se aware nahi bhi ho
to baad mein ho sake. Jaise:​
"Stan, tum apni moustache ki texture mehsoos kar sakte ho, aur jab tumhara finger
slide hota hai, tum smile karte ho aur ruk jaate ho. Tum apne elbow ko doosray haath
se feel kar sakte ho, aur saans lete waqt apni chest ka uthna girna mehsoos kar sakte
ho. Aur tumhe abhi tak pata nahi chala, lekin abhi tum apne right foot ka temperature
mehsoos karne wale ho."

Joe: Mujhe abhi tak yeh samajh nahi aaya ke tum “transition” se kya matlab le rahe ho.​
Agar main tumse kehun: “Tum ne aik sawal poocha jab tum kursi par baithe thay,” to main
aik transition bana raha hoon. Main “jab” ka lafz use kar ke yeh dikha raha hoon ke do
cheezen aapas mein connected hain.​
Agar main kehun “Tum ne yeh sawal is liye poocha kyunki tum kuch aisi cheez janna
chahtay ho jo tumhare liye important hai,” to main “kyunki” ka lafz use kar ke un cheezon ko
jor raha hoon.

Zaroori nahi ke har cheez naturally related ho, lekin jab hum “kyunki” jese lafz use karte hain
to un mein aik taluq ban jata hai.​
Agar main kehun: “Jab tum is kursi par baithe ho to tum saans le rahe ho,” to main un dono
cheezon ko time ke zariye relate kar raha hoon. Zaroori nahi ke saans lena aur kursi par
baithna naturally related ho, lekin “jab” keh kar un mein waqt ka connection aa gaya.

Main baat kar raha hoon sentences ko relate karne ki, transition words ke zariye.​
Agar main kehun: “Tum kursi par baithe ho. Tum aankhein jhapak rahe ho. Tum intezar kar
rahe ho,” to yeh baat bilkul tukri tukri lagti hai.​
Lekin agar main kahun: “Tum kursi par baithe ho aur tum aankhein jhapak rahe ho aur tum
soch rahe ho ke yeh sab ka faida kya hai,” to baat smooth ban jati hai.

Lafz jaise “aur,” “jab,” “kyunki,” “jese hi,” yeh sab relationship banate hain sentence ke
parts ke darmiyan. Yeh lafz sentence ke ideas ko ek doosre se relate karte hain taake
sunnay walay ko har idea asani se samajh aaye, break na lage.

Jaise agar main kahun: “Tum samundar ke kinare kharay ho, dhoop ki garmi mehsoos kar
rahe ho, aur phir pani mein aik aur stroke lete waqt tum peechay dekhtay ho,” to main un
ideas ko relate kar raha hoon, chahe logically woh ikathay na bhi hon.

Logically woh related nahi, lekin un lafzon ke zariye woh jurnay lagtay hain.​
Jab log zuban sunte hain, to woh naturally unhi lafzon ki wajah se ek idea se doosray idea
tak smoothly move karte hain.

“Aur tum yahan is liye ho ke tum aik khas cheez seekhna chahtay ho jisko hum hypnosis
kehte hain. Aur aglay teen din mein, main tumhein bohat si aisi cheezen sikhane wala hoon
jo isay asaan banayengi.”​
“Kyun kaam karti hai, yeh main nahi janta. Lekin jese jese tum in cheezon ko try karna
shuru karoge, tum dekho ge ke yeh asal mein kaam karti hain.”

Jese main abhi tumse baat kar raha hoon, main yehi transition words use kar raha hoon,
isi wajah se baat zyada meaningful lagti hai.

Joe: Tum ne abhi jo “even as” use kiya, kya yeh bhi aik transition ka example hai?​
Haan.
Joe: Accha, ab mujhe samajh a gaya. Tum keh rahe ho ke aise lafz dhoondo jo tumhare
banaye huay mukhtalif sentences ke darmiyan aik bridge banayen.​
Haan.

Main keh sakta hoon:​

“Jese tum kursi par baithe ho, tum apne haath ki garmi mehsoos kar sakte ho jo tumhare
baazu par hai, aur tum apne ghutno par notebook bhi mehsoos kar sakte ho. Agar tum
dhyan do, to tum apne dil ki dhadkan bhi sun sakte ho. Aur tumhe yeh nahi pata ke aglay
teen din mein kya seekhne wale ho, lekin tum yeh samajh sakte ho ke naye ideas aur
tajurbe tumhare liye faida mand ho sakte hain.”

Ab dekho: yeh cheezein logically connected nahi hain. Haath ki garmi mehsoos karna aur
notebook lap par hona ka yeh matlab nahi ke tum kuch seekh jaoge.​
Lekin phr bhi yeh meaningful lagti hain — aur is ka maqsad dhoka nahi, balkay transition
dena hai.

Bohat log samajhte hain ke hypnosis aik competition hai — lekin asal mein yeh sochna bilkul
fazool hai. Sawal yeh hai ke:​
“Main apni communication ko kaise structure karun ke saamne wale ke liye asaan ho
jaye jo woh achieve karna chahta hai?”

Agar koi banda trance mein ja kar therapeutic changes lana chahta hai, ya medical reason
se hypnosis chahiye, ya pain control, ya yaad daasht ke liye, to main chahunga ke woh
kaam asaani se ho.​
Aur main chahunga ke jo bhi banda mujh se baat kare, uske liye bhi yeh asaan ho jaye.

Aur jab main baat karta hoon to main “jab,” “aur,” “kyunki,” “jese” jaise lafz use karta
hoon taake woh banda ek idea se doosray idea tak jump na kare.

Aadmi: Tum keh rahe ho ke tum suggestion ko banda ki mojudah haalat ya mehsoosat se
relate karte ho taake woh zyada credible lage?

Bilkul. Tum asal mein mehsoos kar sakte ho apna haath apni taang par, ya notebook ki
wazan. To main ussi cheez se learning ko link kar deta hoon.​
Na sirf yeh credible ban jata hai, balkay banda mentally jump nahi karta.​
Main pehle sochta tha ke transition words sirf is liye powerful hain ke woh baat ko credible
banate hain.​
Lekin asal mein, yeh jump avoid karte hain, jo process ko asaan bana dete hain.

Jab main logon ke sath pain control waghera jese kaamon par kaam karta tha,​
toh main hamesha un cheezon se start karta tha jo wo khud mehsoos kar sakte the.

Jaise:​
"Tumhein apne haath mein dard mehsoos ho raha hai, aur yeh dard kaafi zyada hai,​
lekin tumhein apne dil ki dhadkan bhi mehsoos ho rahi hai,​
tumhare pairon ki ungliyon ka hilna bhi mehsoos ho raha hai,​
aur tumhein apne kaanon mein dhadkan ki awaaz bhi sunayi de rahi hai.​
Tumhein apni naak par chashme ka wazan bhi mehsoos ho raha hai,​
aur ab mumkin hai ke tum apne doosre haath ko bhi mehsoos karna shuru karo,​
aur wo haath kaafi intense ho jaye apne ehsaas mein.​
Tum us haath ki har ungli ka alag se ehsaas kar sakte ho.​
Aur asal mein, tum ek haath ke tamam ehsaas doosre haath mein daal bhi sakte ho."

Pehle mujhe lagta tha ke in jese dialogues ka asar inke logical hone ki wajah se hota hai.​
Lekin asal mein, yeh sirf logic nahi, balke yeh ek instruction hoti hai — ek plausible
(mumkin lagne wali) direction hoti hai.​
Aur jab insaan ek constant, uninterrupted state mein hota hai, toh un instructions par
amal karna zyada asaan hota hai.

Hypnosis insaan ko yeh control dene lagti hai ke wo apne heart rate jese involuntary
functions ko bhi control kar sake.​
Lekin jab log aisi cheez karne ki koshish karte hain, toh unka dhyaan toot jata hai —​
wo khud se baatein karne lagte hain,​
phir kisi Aunt Susie ke baare mein sochne lagte hain,​
phir kehte hain: "Pata nahi yeh kaam karega bhi ya nahi."​
Yeh jumps — yeh ideas ka randomly change hona — asal mein consciousness state
change karte hain.

Lekin agar tum smooth transitions build karte ho — jaise ek baat se doosri baat logically flow
ho —​
toh tum consciousness states smoothly shift karte ho.​
Aur jitna smoothly tum ek state se doosri mein jaoge,​
utna asaani se tum un cheezon ko accomplish kar paoge jo involuntary systems se
related hain,​
jaise: heart rate ya blood pressure.

Yeh koi magic "convincing" technique nahi —​

yeh sirf ek tareeqa hai jo kaam ko asaani se hone laayak banata hai.

Meri nazar mein kisi bhi technique ki validity ke do criteria hote hain:

1.​ Kya yeh kaam karti hai?​

2.​ Aur kya yeh asaani se kaam karti hai?​

Mujhe nahi lagta ke therapy client ke liye ya therapist ke liye mushkil honi chahiye.​
Agar koi cheez hard ho rahi hai, toh iska matlab hai ke hum kuch jaante nahi.​
Hypnosis ko sabse natural cheez hona chahiye.​
Agar kisi ko khud ko force karna pad raha hai, toh iska matlab hai​
tumhari technology (technique) abhi immature hai.​
Iska matlab yeh nahi ke wo kharaab hai —​
bas yeh dikhata hai ke aur seekhne ko baaqi hai. Samajh aaya?

[Ek aadmi bolta hai:]​

Mujhe aakhri jumla samajh nahi aaya.
(Response:)​
Thank you, tumne yeh perfect tareeqe se kiya.​
Main keh raha hoon — jo main bol raha hoon, wo logically to shayad sense nahi banata,​
lekin yeh kaam karta hai.

Jaise agar main “as,” “when,” ya “while” jese transition words use karta hoon,​
aur phir achanak se “Does that make sense?” jesa alag jumla bol doon,​
toh tumhara dimaag peeche chali jata hai —​
jo maine pehle kaha uska analysis shuru ho jata hai,​
aur tumhara transition us last jumlay tak smoothly nahi hota — kyunki transition tha hi
nahi.

Ab jab main yeh sab explain kar raha hoon,​

tum khud feel kar sakte ho ke tum ek idea se doosre idea mein kaise smoothly move kar
rahe ho.​
Aur yeh hi toh main discuss kar raha hoon.​
Agar mujhe yeh dekhna hai ke tum yeh consciously samajh bhi rahe ho ya nahi​
(toh sirf mehsoos karna nahi, balke uss understanding tak bhi jaana),​
toh mujhe bhi ek smooth transition create karni hogi.

Ab jab tum yeh sab baith kar soch rahe ho — kya ab yeh zyada sense bana raha hai?

Mard: Lagta hai ke tum bridges (raaste/jurhne ke tareeqe) use karne ki baat kar rahe ho.
Jaise ke apni style patient jaisi banana, ya uske kuch aadatain lena...​
Nahi, maine mannerisms ka nahi kaha. Tum body posture mirror kar sakte ho, lekin agar
saamne wala banda khujli kar raha ho, to zaroori nahi ke tum bhi waisa hi karo. Agar tum
uske mannerisms ko zyada khul kar copy karoge, to woh uske zehan mein aa jaye ga. Aur
ek hypnotist ke tor par, tumhara goal yeh nahi hai ke tum uske hosh mein kuch dalo.
Tumhara kaam hai subtle (bareek) tareeqe istemal karna — jaise ke dono ka saans lene ka
rate ek jaisa ho. Yeh wo cheez hai jo banda hosh mein aakar nahi mehsoos karta, lekin uska
zehan usay register karta hai aur react karta hai.

Mard: Haan theek hai. Yeh sab cheezein aik tareeqe ka bridge hain jo tumhare ideas ko
dusre ke zehan tak pohchaati hain. Mujhe poori tarah samajh nahi aa rahi baat, lekin mera
kehna hai ke agar chhoti chhoti similarities hon, to tum zyada persuasive (qasir saabit) ban
jaate ho.

Hypnotist: Haan, lekin main ek aur cheez karta hoon jo hypnosis mein kaam ko asaan
banata hai: main isay persuasion (manwa lena) nahi samajhta. Bohat se log jo hypnosis
karte hain ya likhte hain, wo isay persuasion, "one-up hona", "meta-position mein hona", ya
"control mein hona" ke taur par dekhte hain. Kuch to khud ko "operators" kehte hain —
mujhe to hamesha yeh ajeeb laga hai.

Aise log "resistance" ka bhi zikar karte hain, kyunke agar tum hypnosis ko control samjho to
resistance bhi naturally milta hai. Jo tareeqa main bata raha hoon, usay ek tareeqe se to
persuasive kaha ja sakta hai, lekin doosre taur par yeh natural hai. Tum naturally un
cheezon ko zyada respond karte ho jo aapas mein fit baithti hain — un cheezon ke
muqablay mein jo match nahi karti.
Ek kaam karo: aankhein band karo. Aksar log kabhi na kabhi pedon ke jhund ke paas khade
hue honge. Tum jab wahan khade hote ho aur upar dekhte ho to patte aur shaakhein dikhai
deti hain, aur pedon ke aas-paas ki hawa mehsoos hoti hai. Hawa ki thandak bhi mehsoos
hoti hai... aur agar dhyan se suno to halki si hawa ki awaaz bhi sunai deti hai... aur phir
achanak tumhare baayein taraf se aik rhinoceros (genda) tumhari taraf daudta hua aata
hai.

Agar yeh tumhari reality ko hilaa nahi deta, to phir kuch bhi nahi karega. Altered state induce
karne mein aise disjointed (ghalat milaap) tareeqe kaam aa sakte hain. Lekin yeh smooth
induction nahi hota.

Family therapy mein yeh disjointed communication bohat powerful hoti hai. Misaal ke tor par
koi banda kehta hai:​
"Main chahta hoon meri biwi mujhe akela chor de."​
Main kehta hoon: "Theek hai, usay closet mein band kar do."​
Woh kehta hai: "Nahi, mera yeh matlab nahi tha."​
Main kehta hoon: "To kya matlab hai?"​
Woh kehta hai: "Main chahta hoon woh mujhse cheezen na maange."​
Main kehta hoon: "Kya tum chahte ho ke woh tumhe chitthiyan likhe?"

Yeh natural transitions nahi hain. Lekin inka reaction alag hota hai. Jab time kam ho aur
tumhe kisi ke conscious mind ki limitation ke around kaam karna ho to yeh bohat kaam aata
hai.

Transition ke bina communication karne se tum altered states mein logon ko tez tareeqe se
push kar sakte ho. Lekin yeh technique radical hai — aur main dono tareeqe ek saath nahi
sikhana chahta. Pehle ek sikhaoonga, phir doosra. Taake samajhne mein asaani ho.

Mujhe aik funny baat samajh aayi hai logon ke seekhne ke tareeqe ke baare mein. Agar
main kehta hoon:​
"Kansas City achi jagah hai."​
To log turant kehte hain: "To Dallas mein kya kharabi hai?"

Yeh sirf psychology ya communication tak limited nahi — yeh har jagah hota hai. Main jab
kehta hoon "Yeh tareeqa kaam karega", to log turant samajhte hain ke dusra tareeqa kaam
nahi karega. Jabke main sirf yeh keh raha hota hoon ke yeh kaam karta hai. Transition use
karna madad karta hai. Lekin iska opposite bhi kaam kar sakta hai — bas uska use alag
tareeqe se karna padta hai.

Hypnosis ke context mein, agar tum fast jaana chahte ho to iska matlab yeh nahi ke jaldi
jaldi bolo ya kaam karo. Fast jaane ka matlab hota hai slow aur smoothly kaam karna. Tum
subject ke conscious mind ko temporarily side pe kar dete ho. Ya isay yun bhi keh sakte ho
ke tum usay ek altered state of consciousness mein shift kar rahe ho.

Iska matlab yeh nahi hota ke banda apna hosh kho deta hai, ya usay kuch sunai nahi deta
ya soch nahi sakta — balkay jo conscious mode uske mind ko control karta hai, us moment
mein woh background mein chala jata hai. Woh abhi bhi hota hai, gayab nahi hota, lekin jab
tum kisi ko altered state mein le jaate ho to tum naye learnings ko logical, systematic aur
strong tareeqe se embed kar sakte ho.
Pehla step hota hai kisi bande ko altered state mein le jaana gentle transitions ke zariye.

Aik banda poochta hai:​

“Maine transitions ki utility dekhi hai, especially jab do concepts unrelated hon. Lekin agar
woh related hon, jaise relaxation ke case mein — jahan hum words use kar rahe hon jaise
‘tranquility’, ‘peaceful’, ‘quiet’, ‘feeling good’ — to kya transitions zaroori hoti hain wahan
bhi?”

Jawab:​
"‘Zaroori’ aik ajeeb lafz hai. Har baar ‘zaroori’ ka matlab hota hai: kya tumhara desired
outcome kya hai?​
To agar outcome important hai to haan, lekin otherwise nahi. Sawal yeh hai: Tum achieve
kya karna chahte ho?"

Woh banda phir poochta hai:​

"Kis cheez se measure karein ke transition use karna kab zyada faida mand hoga?"

Jawab:​
Tumhari aankhein. Jab tum hypnosis practice karoge to tum dekhoge ke logon ka chehra
aur aankhon ka andaz badal jata hai jab woh altered state mein hote hain. Jab tumhe yeh
nazar aane lage to tum samajhne lago ge ke kis point pe unki experience mein
discontinuity aayi.

Achi visual observation hypnosis ke liye zaroori hai, kyunki altered state mein log normally
utna feedback nahi dete. Na zyada bolte hain, na zyada react karte hain. Is wajah se tumhe
visual cues par rely karna padta hai.

Agar tumhari observation weak ho, to tum wahi karoge jo bohot hypnotists karte hain —
finger signals pe rely karte hain (yes/no ke liye). Ye ek tareeqa hai, backup ke taur pe sahi
hai, lekin ideal nahi.

Agar tumhari visual sensitivity strong hai, to tum artificially koi feedback mechanism
banaye bagair bhi samajh jaoge banda internally kya mehsoos kar raha hai. Logon ka
internal experience external body language se reflect hota hai — aankhon, posture,
expressions se.

Agar banda "quiet" ya "relaxed" ya "comfortable" feel nahi kar raha hoga, to tum uski body
se wo tension dekh sakte ho.

Aise mein seedha bolne ke bajaye tum indirectly guide karo:​

"Koi kehta hai 'relax ho jao' aur tum koshish karte ho, lekin relax nahi ho paate, tum kehte
ho 'kaash ho jata.' Main keh sakta hoon 'comfortable feel karo' lekin comfort force nahi ki ja
sakti. Lekin ek baar tum socho ke aik boond barish ki patte par aake ruk gayi hai..."

Dekha? Ye image unrelated lagti hai, lekin banda us imagery ke zariye zyada asaani se
relax kar leta hai — kyunki woh naturally us feeling mein shift ho jata hai.

Ek cheez jo mujhe Milton Erickson ke baare mein sabse zyada impress karti thi, woh yeh thi
ke woh hypnosis ko kabhi direct tool ke taur par use nahi karta tha. Agar usay kisi ko
colorblind banana hota, to woh kabhi yeh nahi kehta “Colorblind ban jao.” Balkay woh kehta:​
 “Tum ne kabhi koi kitaab parhi hai? Kya matlab hota hai ke kitaab 'read (red)' ki gayi? Iska
koi matlab nahi. Kisi ne mujhe ek baar kaha tha ke 'blue Monday' hoti hai. To maine socha
‘blue Monday?’ iska kya matlab? Yeh sab cheezen ek doosre se judi to hoti hain, lekin inka
koi matlab nahi. Mujhe nahi lagta ke inka koi matlab hai, aur tumhe bhi zarurat nahi ke
tumhara koi matlab ho.”

Erickson aur baaqi hypnotists ke darmiyan farq yeh tha ke uske paas koi “resistant clients”
nahi hotay thay. Ya to woh patients bohot ache choose karta tha, ya phir woh kuch aisa karta
tha jo doosre log nahi karte thay. Milton logon ko observe karta tha ke woh kaise react karte
hain, aur phir unko wohi deta tha jo unke liye theek hota.

Transitions ka istemal har English bolne wale insaan ke saath kaam karta hai, kyun ke
English ki buniyadi structure mein transitions shamil hain. Aur jab tum hypnosis kar rahe ho,
to agar tum transitions use karo, to woh process ko smooth bana dete hain.

Maine Milton ko ek dafa officially trance induction karte dekha — jo bohot hi rare hota tha.
Zyada tar log uske paas aate aur bas intellectual baat cheet karte karte trance mein chale
jaate. Lekin us din usne ek banda bithaya aur bola:​
"Jab tum yahan baithe ho, to us wall par ek nishaan dekhte raho, aur jaise jaise tum
us spot ko dekh rahe ho, tum realize karoge ke tum wahi kaam kar rahe ho jo tumne
school mein pehli dafa kiya tha jab tumne numbers aur alphabet likhna seekha tha.
Tum seekh rahe ho... aisi cheezen seekh rahe ho jinke baare mein tumhe abhi tak
kuch nahi pata. Aur chaahe tumhe is baat ka ehsaas na ho, tumhari saans lene ka
tareeqa badal gaya hai..." (uski awaaz dheemi aur slow ho jaati hai), "...aur tum zyada
relaxed aur comfortable mehsoos kar rahe ho."

Yeh transitions us trance ko continuity de rahe thay. Ab yeh school aur letters seekhne ka
relaxation se kya lena dena? Technically kuch khaas nahi.

Lekin asal baat yeh hai ke communication ka matlab woh nahi hota jo tum soch rahe ho
— balkay uska matlab hota hai jo response saamne wala deta hai.​
Agar tum kisi ko compliment do aur woh bura maan jaaye, to tumhara message insult ban
gaya. Ab yeh kehna ke "usne mujhe samjha nahi" sirf tumhari communication ki kami ka
bahaana hai. Tum ya to explanation dete raho, ya phir kuch seekho. Mera tareeqa yeh hai
ke main seekhta hoon. Agar main kisi ko kuch keh kar usay bura mehsoos karwata hoon, to
agli baar apna tareeqa badal deta hoon. Aur agar kabhi future mein mujhe usko insult karna
ho, to mujhe exactly pata hota hai ke kaise karna hai!

Transitions hypnosis ka poora game nahi hain, lekin yeh ek kaam ka tool hain.​
Hypnosis mein koi fixed formula nahi hota. Ek hi cheez jis par bharosa kiya ja sakta hai woh
yeh hai:​
Agar tum logon se baat karoge, to woh respond zaroor karenge.​
Aur agar tum unko kaafi variety do, to akhir kar woh response mil hi jaata hai jo kaam karta
hai.

Jo ab tak bataya gaya hai, woh sirf shuruaat hai. Ab main chahta hoon ke tum apne tempo
par bhi dhyan do. Tempo bohat zyada powerful hota hai.
Ek traditional hypnotist Ernest Hilgard ne 40 saal ki research ke baad statistically prove kiya
ke kisi insaan ki altered state of consciousness mein jaane ki ability ka hypnotist ke voice
tempo se koi lena dena nahi hota. Us ke paas data bhi hai.​
Lekin agar tum apne experience par dhyan do jab main tumse baat kar raha hoon… aur jab
main apna tempo badalta hoon… dheere… aur aur bhi dheere…​
…toh tum par iska asar mehsoos hota hai. Aur jab tak asar mehsoos hota hai, mujhe farq
nahi padta "science" kya kehti hai.

Main pehle hi keh chuka hoon ke main modeler hoon. Modeler sirf descriptions banata hai.
Yeh descriptions tumhara dhyan kuch specific cheezon ki taraf le jaane ke liye hote hain.
Abhi main tumhara dhyan voice tone aur tempo par le jaane ke liye keh raha hoon.

Jo pehla hypnotist maine kabhi dekha tha, woh kisi ko trance mein daalne ki koshish kar
raha tha jab main room mein aaya. Us ne mujhe hypnosis sikhani thi. Aur woh ek irritating,
high-pitched nasal awaaz mein keh raha tha:​
"Main chahta hoon tum relax feel karo."​
Mujhe turant samajh aaya ke koi bhi banda relax nahi feel kar sakta agar koi whining awaaz
mein baat kar raha ho.

Lekin us hypnotist ka "iman" tha ke sirf monotone hi hypnosis ke liye chahiye hota hai,
kyunki books mein likha hota hai ke monotone use karo.​
Uska belief tha ke tone matter nahi karti, bas ek hi tone maintain karo.

Monotone ka matlab bas yeh hai ke tum incongruent na lago. Agar tum ek hi tone mein
baat karte raho toh tum incongruent nahi lago ge, aur agar ho bhi gaye, logon ko pata nahi
chalega.​
Lekin agar tum apni voice mein variation lao, toh woh bhi tumhari hypnosis ko powerful
bana sakta hai.

Ek banda: "Main ne notice kiya jab tum suggestion de rahe the toh kabhi-kabhi tum aise lafz
use karte ho jo control dikhate hain – jaise 'tum feel karo ge' ya 'tum feel kar rahe ho' – jabke
kabhi 'shayad aisa ho sakta hai' jese lafz use kiye. Kya tum consciously control aur
non-control words mein farq karte ho?"

Answer:​
Haan. Mera simple rule hai:​
Main nahi chahta koi bhi insaan hypnosis session mein kabhi fail ho.

Agar main aisi suggestion de raha hoon jo easily verify ho sakti ho, toh main aise lafz use
karta hoon jaise "could" ya "might" — jise hum modal operators of possibility kehte hain.​
Jaise:​
"Tumhara haath uthne lag sakta hai..."​
Taake agar woh kaam na bhi ho, toh insaan ko yeh mehsoos na ho ke woh fail ho gaya hai.

Lekin agar main aisi cheez keh raha hoon jo verify nahi ki ja sakti, toh main confidently
causal words use karta hoon:​
"Yeh tumhein aur gehri trance mein le jaata hai."​
"Woh tumhein aur relaxed feel karwata hai."​
Kyun? Kyunki insaan verify nahi kar sakta, toh woh fail bhi nahi ho sakta.

Agar main 5–6 modal operators use kar ke person se response le chuka hoon, toh us ke
baad main "you will" type words use kar sakta hoon.​
Lekin agar agli suggestion critical ho, toh main possibility wale words hi use karta hoon.

Bottom line: Ensure karo ke banda kisi bhi point pe fail na kare.

Bohat se hypnotists logon ko unki limits tak dhakel dete hain by giving them susceptibility
tests (yaani dekha jata hai ke banda kitna hypnotic suggestion le sakta hai). Hypnotist logon
ko altered state (trance) mein le ja kar kuch graded tasks karwate hain — kuch bande kaam
kar lete hain, kuch fail ho jate hain.

Lekin problem yeh hoti hai ke hypnotist aur client dono hi samajhne lagte hain ke kuch
cheezein aisi hain jo banda kar hi nahi sakta.

Jab main university mein hypnosis courses sikhata tha, log aate the aur kehte:​
"Main pehle bhi kai dafa trance mein gaya hoon, lekin ek level se zyada nahi ja
sakta."​
Mujhe nahi pata yeh “levels” ka concept kahan se aaya. Shayad log samajhte hain ke
trance ka quality unchi ya nichi hoti hai — self-esteem upar jati hai, hypnosis mein banda
neeche jata hai.

Kuch logon ko ek positive hallucination (jaise aankhon se kuch dekh lena jo asal mein
wahan nahi hota) dekhne ke liye deep trance chahiye hota hai.​
Lekin kuch log positive hallucinations har waqt karte hain — usay “sochna” kehte hain.

Agar main hypnotist hoon aur kisi ko force karta hoon ke wo aik cheez dekhe — jaise:​
"Tum aankhen kholo ge aur aik 6-foot ka French poodle dekho ge."​
Aur jab wo aankhen kholta hai to kuch bhi nahi hota — to usay lagta hai ke wo hallucinate
nahi kar sakta. Agar wo is failure ko apni personality ka part samajh le, to wo yaqeen kar le
ga ke wo yeh kabhi nahi kar sakta.

Zyada tar clients aise aate hain jo kehte hain:​

"Main hamesha se chah raha hoon ke mujhe positive hallucination ho, lekin kabhi
nahi hui."​
Mujhe pata hota hai ke har banda is ke qabil hota hai — aur kai dafa already kar chuka hota
hai — bas usay yaqeen dilana hota hai. Lekin jab banda samajh leta hai ke yeh us ke bus ke
bahar hai, to main uske beliefs ke around se kaam lena padta hai.

Ya phir simple keh deta hoon:​

"Haan bhai, yeh genetic limitation hai. Lekin tum civil engineer to nahi ho na, to koi
farq nahi parta."

(Chutkula yeh hai ke civil engineers hallucinate kar ke bridges aur dams dekh lete hain
wahan jahan kuch bhi nahi hota — bas chhoti blue men na dekhen to sab theek hai.)
Main nahi chahta ke log fail karen aur phir jhooti assumptions bana lein. Is liye main
hypnosis ke classic tasks bohat dheere aur aram se karwata hoon — jese arm levitation ya
negative hallucination. Waise bhi zyada tar log aise experiences roz karte hain bina jaane.

Mera goal yeh hota hai ke main unhein aise experiences dilaun jo unhein yeh yakeen dila
dein ke wo apne andar required changes la sakte hain — chaahe wo dentist ke pain control
karna ho, neend ke habits change karni ho ya psychological healing karni ho.

Log aksar pochte hain:​

"Hypnosis ka use kis cheez ke liye hota hai?"​
Sahi sawal yeh hai:​
"Tum hypnosis ka use kis cheez ke liye karna chahte ho?"

Hypnosis koi magic cure nahi hai — yeh ek toolkit hai. Jaise mechanic ke paas wrench hoti
hai, lekin us wrench ko sahi tarah use karna parta hai.

Yeh sabse zyada misunderstood aspect hai hypnosis ka — log isay “cheezein” samajhte
hain. Hypnosis cheez nahi hai — yeh ek set of techniques hai jise aap kisi ka state of
consciousness change karne ke liye use kar sakte ho.

Abhi hamara focus yeh seekhne par hai ke kaise kisi banda ko smoothly ek mental state se
doosri mein le jaaya jaye.

Exercise 3

Main chahta hoon ke aap dobara 10 minute lo aur wohi exercise dobara karo jo pehle ki thi,
wahi 3 logon ki group mein. Magar is baar un tamam refinements ko shamil karo jo hum ab
tak discuss kar chuke hain. Thoda waqt guzar gaya hai jab yeh points discuss hue the, is
liye main dobara unhein detail mein yaad dilata hoon.

Is baar, pehle experience describe karne ke bajaye, samne wale ko kehna hai ke woh aaram
se baith jaaye aur aankhein band kare. Aur phir us waqt us ke present experience ke kuch
elements describe karo. Aap ko teen pacing statements dene hain — yani aisi statements
jo kisi bhi shakhs ke liye verify karna asaan ho:

●​ "Aap ek kursi par baithay hain..."​

●​ "Aap mehsoos kar saktay hain jahan jahan aap ka jism kursi ko touch kar raha hai..."​

●​ "Aap mehsoos kar rahe hain ke aap ke haath kis tarah cross hain..."​

●​ "Aap ka paaon zameen ko chhoo raha hai..."​

●​ "Aap ke chehray ka temperature kaisa hai..."​

 ●​ "Aap ke ungliyon ki harkat mehsoos ho rahi hai..."​

●​ "Aap room ke awaazon ko sun saktay hain..."​

●​ "Hawa ki thandak mehsoos ho rahi hai..."​

●​ "Aap meri awaaz sun rahe hain..."​

Yeh sab statements aisi hain jo verify ki ja sakti hain. Aap teen aisi statements kahen jo
verify ho sakti hain, phir ek transition word lagayein, aur ek leading statement add karein
— yani aisi baat jo samne wale ko us direction mein le jayein jahan aap chahtay ho woh
jaye:

●​ "... aur aap ziada relaxed mehsoos kar rahe hain."​

●​ "... jaise jaise aap ziada comfortable ho rahe hain."​

●​ "... aur aap ko nahi pata main agay kya kehne wala hoon."​

Misal:

"Aap saans le rahe hain... room mein awaazain hain... log hil rahe hain... aur
aap such rahe hain — waqai such rahe hain — ke aap kya kar rahe ho."

Transitions bilkul natural lagni chahiyein. Ek shakhs subject banay ga, aur baqi do log turn
wise pacing aur leading statements bolenge. Jab har shakhs do sets complete kar le, to us
experience ka zikr shamil karna shuru karo jo pehle do baar use kiya gaya tha:

●​ "... jab aap waqt nikal kar yaad karte hain ke jab aap jogging kar rahe thay."​

Dekho is baar kaisa farq mehsoos hota hai.

Phir, non-verbal pacing bhi try karo: samne wale ki breathing ka rate match karo, ya apni
awaaz ke tempo ko uski saans ke saath sync karo. Jo kuch aap keh rahe ho, woh aap ke
tone aur delivery ke saath congruent hona chahiye.

Jab aap ka subject us experience mein deeply involve ho jaye — ya pehle se bhi zyada — to
phir aap intentionally yeh principles todna shuru karo ek ek kar ke:

●​ Achanak apni awaaz ka tempo change karo.​

●​ Dekho kya asar padta hai.​

●​ Phir dobara waapis pehle jaisa karo.​

 ●​ Phir apna tone change karo.​

●​ Phir transitions ko hata do. Misal:​

"Aap yahan baithe ho. Aap comfortable ho. Aap relaxed ho. Aap nahi jaante kya
hone wala hai."

Dekho kya hota hai jab aap transitions skip karte ho.

Ab irrelevant cheezen add karna shuru karo:

●​ "Aap ko apni ungliyan keys par mehsoos ho rahi hain... aur aap jaante hain ke is
building mein kahin kitchen bhi hai."​

●​ "Aap ke paon zameen ko chhoo rahe hain... aur aap mehsoos kar rahe hain
Washington ke politicians ka jazba aur dilchaspi."​

Sab se pehle tumhara focus yeh hona chahiye ke jo cheezein pehle discuss ki gayi hain un
sab ko sahi tareeqe se use karo. Jab tum ne ek achi, solid trance state create kar li, tab sirf
aik choti si cheez ko badlo aur dekho ke kya reaction milta hai. Phir wapas pehle wale sab
elements use karo, aur dobara kisi aur aik choti si cheez ko change karo. Ab dekho ke
saamne wale ke chehre pe kya asar padta hai—uski breathing, uski skin ka rang, uske
neechay walay honton ka size, ya uski palkon ki movement. Trance state mein log zyada
baat nahi karte, is liye tumhein feedback kisi aur tareeqe se lena hoga.

Agar baad mein check karne ki koshish ki to der ho chuki hogi. Har lamha jo kuch ho raha
hai, usi waqt usay dekhna hoga. Aur is ka best tool tumhari apni nigah (vision) hai.

Ab 3-4 minute ka waqt lo aur yeh practice karo. Chalo shuru ho jao.

Kya tumne mehsoos kiya ke jab tumne exercise ko is tareeqe se kiya to yeh process aur
zyada powerful ho gaya? Jo cheez mein tumhein is subah dikhana chahta tha woh yeh hai
ke hypnosis ek "amplification process" hai—jisme hum kisi choti si cheez ko gradually
barhate hain. Pehle karwa diya, phir kuch aur instruction diya, phir dobara karwaya—yeh
sab isi process ka hissa hai.

Agar tum hypnosis ko sirf "persuasion" (manana) ka tareeqa samjhoge, to is se itna kaam
nahi le sakte. Aur agar isay "control" (qaboo paana) samjhoge to bhi faida nahi hoga. Jo
humne kiya woh yeh tha ke kisi shakhs ke ek specific experience ko liya, jisme uska ek khas
reaction tha, aur phir uss reaction ko tumne apni techniques se amplify kiya.

Aurat: "Lekin arm levitation aur is tarah ki cheezein ka kya? Kya woh bhi amplification hi
hai?"

Dekho, ache hypnotists us cheez ko target karte hain jo wese bhi naturally hone wali hoti
hai. Jaise arm levitation—yeh aik famous hypnotic response hai jisko hypnotists use karte
hain. Aur jo sabse pehli instruction hoti hai woh hoti hai:​
"Aik gehri saans lo, aur mehsoos karo ke tumhare haath halkay ho rahe hain..."

Jab tum gehri saans lete ho, to tumhara seena upar uthta hai, aur naturally haath bhi thora
uthte hain. To agar tum lightness ka suggestion us moment pe do jab saamne wala saans le
raha ho, to usay bhi waqai halka pan mehsoos hoga.

Yani trick yeh hai ke woh suggestion do jo waqai us waqt naturally ho rahi ho. Bohat
se hypnotists yeh jaane bagair kar lete hain.

Ek purana method tumne movies mein dekha hoga—jahaan hypnotist aik ghari ko hilata hai
aur kehta hai:

"Ghadi aage peechay hil rahi hai... tum usay dekh rahe ho... waqt guzarta ja raha hai...
tumhari aankhein thak rahi hain..."​
—Of course aankhein thakengi! Kisi bhi cheez ko continuously ghoorte raho to aankhein
naturally thak jaati hain.

1900s ke aas paas log hypnosis aise bhi karte the ke wo subject ko kehte the:​
"Mere upar walay do ungliyon ko dekho... unko intensely ghoorte raho... aur jese jese
tumhari aankhein thakti ja rahi hain, tum trance mein ja rahe ho..."​
—Dekho, agar koi upar dekhta rahe to aankhein naturally thakti hain. Phir wo kehte hain:​
"Focus change ho raha hai... palkain bhaari ho rahi hain... band karne ka dil chahta
hai..."​
—Of course hoga! Ye to normal blinking cycle hai.

Agar main phir tumse kehun: "Aur jab tumhari aankhein band hongi, to woh band hi
rahengi", to chances kaafi zyada hain ke waqai aisa hi hoga. Main pehle se teen aise
experiences ka zikr kar chuka hoon jo verify kiye ja sakte hain, aur unko maine aik aise
cheez se connect kiya jo verify nahi ki ja sakti. Yeh sab kuch ek natural transition ke sath aur
tumhare tajurbe ke flow ke mutabiq hua.

Main aik step-by-step process bana raha hoon jo aik nateeje tak le jaata hai. Main keh raha
hoon: “Tum yeh mehsoos kar rahe ho, phir yeh mehsoos hota hai, phir yeh,” aur yeh teeno
cheezein verify ho sakti hain: tumhari aankhein thak rahi hongi; tumhare eyelids band hone
ko honge; tumhara focus change ho raha hoga. Tum consciously yeh nahi jaante ke yeh sab
natural experiences hain, magar jab main inhein describe karta hoon, to aik naturally doosre
tak le jaata hai.

Phir jab main koi aisi cheez add karta hoon jo natural nahi hai tumhare experience ka hissa,
to tum pehle hi step-by-step follow kar rahe hote ho, is liye tum us agle step tak bhi chalay
jaate ho. Yeh nahi ke tum convince ho gaye ho — tumne to socha hi nahi ke yeh sach hai ya
jhoot. Tum sirf follow kar rahe ho. Aisi transitions ka use karna tumhe asaani se follow karne
ka moka deta hai.

Agar tum hypnosis ko aise socho ke jaise yeh kisi ko control karne ya manwane ka tareeqa
hai, to nuksaan tumhara hoga. Tum apni effectiveness ko limit kar doge. Apni zindagi mein
bhi tum haar jaoge, kyun ke phir tum har waqt yeh sochne lagoge ke tum par kis ka control
hai.
Meri observation yeh hai ke log altered hypnotic states mein apne aap ki zyada izzat karte
hain as compare to waking state. Main kisi ko waking state mein koi negative aur
nuksaandah suggestion doon to wo zyada chances hain ke wo usay maan le. Lekin agar
woh trance mein ho, to wo aisi baat follow nahi karega.

Socho ke logon ne tumhe kin cheezon ke liye kaha jo tumhe buri lagin, lekin tumne phir bhi
kiya — zyada chances hain ke tum us waqt waking state mein thay. Trance mein kisi ko koi
aisi cheez manwana jo uske liye meaningful aur positive nahi ho, kaafi mushkil hota hai. Log
altered states mein zyada samajhdar hote hain. Kisi ko dhoka dena ya faida uthana waking
state mein sabse asaan hota hai.

Mujhe lagta hai ke hypnosis asal mein aik tarah ka biofeedback hai. Lekin biofeedback
machine tumse nahi kehti ke tumhara pulse slow karo — woh sirf yeh batati hai ke abhi
tumhara pulse kya hai. Tumhein khud outcome ki taraf aim karna padta hai — jaise pulse
slow karna ya blood pressure kam karna.

Ek hypnotist dono kaam kar sakta hai — woh tumhein wohi feedback de sakta hai jo
real-time ho, jaise machine karti hai, aur phir dheere dheere aur cheezein add kar sakta hai
jo tumhein ek aur halat tak le jaayein. Tum aisa mahaul create kar sakte ho jahan logon ko
sirf react karna ho — wohi kaam jo log hamesha karte hain, aur sabse behtar karte hain.

Altered state (yaani hypnotherapy jese trance states) mein personal changes lana waking
(normal) state se zyada asaan hota hai. Agar tumhare paas wo choices nahi hain jo tum
chahte ho, to iska matlab yeh hai ke jis state of consciousness mein tum ho, wo hi limited
hai. Tumhara normal waking state tumhari abilities aur limitations ka hi aik nakshe hai.

Ab agar tum ek limited state mein ho, aur usi limited state mein reh kar apni limitations ko
change karna chahtay ho, to yeh aik "catch-22" situation ban jata hai — matlab tumhari
limitations hi tumhein rok rahi hongi un limitations ko todne se. Lekin agar tum ek altered
state mein chalay jao (jaise trance, hypnosis), to tumhare paas naye tareeqay aur sochne ke
naye dimensions mil jate hain. Wahan bhi kuch limitations hoti hain, lekin woh mukhtalif hoti
hain.

Agar tum altered states ke beech back and forth karo, to tum khud ko itna badal saktay ho
ke tumhara normal waking state bhi pehle jaisa nahi rahega.

Phir unhon ne poocha: "Kitne log clinician hain?" Phir bola: "Kitne logon ne apne aap ko itna
badla ke kabhi wapis purane self mein nahi gaye?" ... "Aur kitne log aise hain jo kabhi badlay
hi nahi?"

Woh kehte hain agar koi clinician (yaani change ka agent) khud change nahi kar saka, to
yeh sabse bara hypocrisy (munafiqat) hoga. Hypnosis sirf aik tool hai jo change ko tez aur
asaan bana deta hai. Ham yahan sirf yeh seekh rahay hain ke kaise ek natural transition
create ki jaye ek state se doosri state mein.

Phir aik banda poochta hai:​

"Main sochta hoon kaise pata chalay ke banda trance mein ja raha hai? Aap ne kaha
changes observe karo, to kuch to nazar aya, magar kaise pata chale ke yeh trance hai?"
To jawab mein unhon ne poocha:​
"Kya kya changes nazar aaye jab aap ne induction kiya?"

Ek aurat boli:​
"Uska chehra relax ho gaya tha, aur flat sa lag raha tha."

Ye typical sign hai — trance state mein facial muscles relax ho jati hain, aur face mein aik
symmetry (yaani dono sides barabar) aa jati hai, jo waking state mein nahi hoti. Jab banda
trance mein ja raha hota hai to pehle asymmetry barhti hai (chehra thora off lagta hai), lekin
jab banda gehri trance mein chala jata hai to symmetry wapis aati hai — aur yeh normal
symmetry se bhi zyada hoti hai. Jab banda trance se wapis aa raha hota hai, to phir se
asymmetry aati hai, phir wapis normal face ban jata hai.

Dusra banda kehta hai:​

"Ungli ya body ke chhote jerks ya twitches dekhnay ko mile."

Ye unconscious, involuntary movements hote hain — aur yeh strong indicator hai ke banda
trance mein ja raha hai.

Ek aur aurat boli:​

"Uski breathing change ho gayi thi."

Breathing bhi aik important signal hai. Har banda normal state mein apna typical breathing
pattern rakhta hai. Lekin altered state mein wo pattern badal jata hai.

●​ Agar koi visually-oriented ho (zyada cheezein aankhon se feel karta ho), to wo

usually shallow breathing karta hai — chest se.​
Lekin trance mein wo deep breathing karta hai — stomach se.​

●​ Aur agar koi already kinesthetic ho (jo cheezein mehsoos karke samajhta hai), to wo
apni usual deep stomach breathing chhod kar kisi aur rhythm mein shift kar jata hai.​

To breathing patterns sensory modes se linked hotay hain — aur yeh change hona trance ka
acha indicator hota hai.

Woman: Agar kisi insan ka chehra asymmetrical ho (yani dono sides ek jaise na hon), to
kiya iska matlab hai ke uske andar conscious aur unconscious ke darmiyan zyada difference
ya polarity hoti hai?

Answer: Main aisa nateeja nahi nikalta. Agar chehre ka asymmetry bohot zyada ho, to iska
matlab hota hai kuch ajeeb ho raha hai. Main yeh samajhta hoon ke koi imbalance hai – ya
to chemical ya behavior mein, ya dono mein. Main isay conscious aur unconscious ke
darmiyan farq ka label nahi deta.

Man: Maine note kiya ke jaise jaise log trance mein deep jate hain, unke haath garam aur
laal ho jate hain.

Answer: Haan, jab log gehri trance mein jate hain to muscles relax hote hain aur haathon
paon tak khoon ka flow barhta hai.
Man: Eyes ka pura upar roll ho jana aur altered state ka kya taluq hai?

Answer: Jitna mujhe maloom hai, iska koi direct taluq nahi hai. Agar aankhein poori tarah
upar chali jayein to yeh gehri trance ka sign ho sakta hai. Lekin kai log aankhein khuli rakh
kar bhi gehri trance mein jate hain, is liye yeh har waqt altered state ka sign nahi hota.

Man: Jab aankhon mein movement hoti hai to iska kya matlab hai?

Answer: Do types ki movement hoti hain: ek eyelid flutter (palkon ka halka kaampna), aur
doosra eyeball ka movement jo palak ke peeche hota hai lekin palak nahi hilti. Dusri type ko
kehte hain "rapid eye movement" – yeh usually visualization ka indicator hota hai.

Explanation: Trance mein general signs hotay hain, lekin har shakhs ke apne unique
signals bhi hotay hain jo batate hain ke unka state change ho raha hai. Jab aap kisi ka
muscle tone, skin color, aur breathing pattern induction se pehle observe karte ho, to aapko
pata hota hai unka normal state kya hai. Induction ke dauran agar yeh cheezen badlein to
iska matlab hai unka state change ho raha hai.

Trance ke ilawa aapko yeh bhi dekhna hota hai ke banda rapport mein hai ya nahi. Agar
uske responses aapke suggestions ke sath congruent hain to rapport hai. Agar nahi hain to
rapport toot rahi hai, aur banda waking state mein laut raha hai.

Summary:
A. Trance ko hum yun soch sakte hain ke yeh kisi experience ya response ka amplification
(barhna) hai. Agar aap kisi experience ko detail mein describe karo, to wo shakhs apni
response ko zyada mehsoos karega.

B. Matching se rapport banta hai, aur yeh altered state mein le jane ka foundation hai. Aap
kisi bhi behavior ko match kar sakte ho – jaise breathing rate. Agar aap apni speech ka
tempo uski breathing ke sath match karo, aur dheere dheere speech slow karo, to uski
breathing bhi slow ho jaye gi. Dusra tareeqa yeh hai ke aap us ke current experience ko
verbalize karo: “Tum muskura rahe ho jab mujhe dekh rahe ho, aur meri awaaz sun rahe
ho…”

C. Smooth transitions important hain taake shakhs asani se altered state mein chala jaye.
Words jaise “as,” “while,” aur “and” transitions ko soft banate hain.

D. Trance ke general signs: pehle facial asymmetry, phir unusual symmetry. Muscles ka
relax hona, chhoti involuntary movements, flushing (chehre par rang ka badalna), aur
breathing pattern ka change.
 Chapter II : Simple Inductions

Aaj dopahar hum systematic tareeqe se kuch khaas hypnotic induction techniques ko
describe karein ge, un ka demonstration karein ge, aur tum se practice bhi karwaayein ge —
taake tumhare paas trance induce karne ke liye mukhtalif options hon. Subha jo kaam tum
ne kiya, wo kuch logon ke liye kaafi hoga, lekin sirf usi par depend rehne se tum baqi logon
ke saath fail ho jao ge.

Traditional hypnotists ne research ki hai jo "prove" karti hai ke sirf kuch percentage log hi
hypnotizable hain. Unhon ne yeh kaise prove kiya? Sab logon par bilkul ek hi induction use
karke. Toh obvious hai ke sirf kuch par kaam karegi. Agar tumhare paas sirf ek induction
method hai, toh wo kuch logon par kaam karegi aur baqi par nahi.

Zyada tar traditional hypnotists itna basic bhi nahi karte jitna tumne subha kiya — jaise ke
apni voice ka tempo patient ke breathing pattern ke saath match karna. Jitne zyada
induction ke tareeqe tum seekh lo ge, utne zyada logon par tum kaamyaab ho sakte ho.

Subha humne discuss kiya tha ke altered state of consciousness ke saath kaun kaun se
physical changes aate hain — jaise muscle ka tight hona ya relax hona, saans lene ka
pattern, skin ka rang, lower lip ka size, etc. Aaj dopahar bhi tum inhi physical changes ko
observe karo ge jab hum induction seekhne ja rahe hain.

Hypnotic induction ka basic rule yeh hai: jab bhi kisi ke body main altered state ke signs
dikhne lagen, toh tum un signs ko amplify karne ki koshish karo — kisi bhi tareeqe se. Iske
alawa kuch specific tareeqe hain induction ke. Hum tumhe kuch general patterns sikhayenge
jo aam tor par kisi ka state alter karne mein madadgar hotay hain.

Lekin yaad raho — jitne bhi generalizations hum dein, wo jhoot hain. Har shakhs ke liye har
waqt nahi chalenge. Wo is liye useful hain kyun ke wo tumhe majboor karte hain ke tum
sensory level par feedback observe karo. Jab bhi kisi pattern se tumhe sensory feedback mil
raha ho ke banda trance mein ja raha hai — toh continue karo. Agar nahi ja raha, toh kuch
aur karo.

Main jo pehle do methods demonstrate karne ja raha hoon, wo subha ke kuch tareeqon se
milti-julti hain, lekin yeh itni important aur useful hain ke main inhein thoda alag tareeqe se
explain karna chahta hoon.

Verbal Pacing and Leading: Exercise

Subah jab tum ne verbal pacing aur leading ki thi, to tum ne teen sensory-based, yani jo
cheezein aasani se mehsoos ya dekhi ja sakti hain, aisi statements di thin. Phir aik transition
word use karke aik aisi baat ki jo verify nahi ki ja sakti thi. Yeh method us waqt aur bhi zyada
elegant ho jata hai jab tum shuru ke statements ko zyada tar bahar ki duniya se related
rakhte ho, aur dheere dheere andar ki feelings ya soch wali baatein badha dete ho. Milton
Erickson ke mutabiq trance ka matlab hota hai "andar ki taraf tawajju ka jana." To agar tum
dheere dheere internally-focused statements badhate jao, to tum insaan ko andar ki taraf
shift kar sakte ho — bina jhatka diye.

Jab tum yeh method practice karo, to kuch is tarah shuru karo:​
Pehle 5 statements do:

●​ 4 sensory-based hoon (jo banda asani se mehsoos kar sakta hai)​

●​ 1 internally-oriented ho (jo sirf uski soch ya feeling hai, jise baahir se verify nahi kiya
ja sakta)​

In sabko kisi simple transition word se connect karo jaise "aur" (and) ya "jese" (as).​
Misal ke taur par:​
"Tum meri awaaz sun rahe ho aur tum room ke colors notice kar sakte ho jese
tumhara haath kursi par mehsoos ho raha hai aur tum thodi si sukoon bhari feeling
mehsoos kar rahe ho."

Phir ratio change karo:

●​ 3 verifiable + 2 non-verifiable​

●​ phir 2 verifiable + 3 non-verifiable​

●​ phir 1 verifiable + 4 non-verifiable​

Is point par trance state achi tarah develop ho chuki hogi.

Ab socho:​
Koi aisi baat batayo jo non-sensory based ho, matlab jo sirf banda feel kar raha ho, lekin
jise baahir se dekha nahi ja sakta.

Misalein:

●​ "Aur tum comfortable mehsoos karne lagoge."​

●​ "Aur tum khushi mehsoos karoge."​

●​ "Tum mutma'in mehsoos karoge."​

●​ "Tumhein lagega ke tum progress kar rahe ho."​

●​ "Tum mehsoos karoge ke kuch cheezein andar se badal rahi hain."​

●​ "Tum koi achi yaad yaad karo ge."​

Ek aadmi ne pucha: "Kya aap jaan bujh kar future tense use kar rahe hain?"​
Lekin jawab yeh tha:​
"Abhi ke liye present progressive tense use karo.​
Jaise:

●​ 'Tum khushi bhari feeling ko mehsoos kar rahe ho...'​

●​ 'Abhi tum hypnosis ke bare mein seekhne ki halat meh aa rahe ho...'​

Phir trainer Barb ko bulata hai aur kehta hai:​

"Tumhari marzi hai ke tum aankhein band rakho ya khuli, mujhe sirf kuch
descriptions bolne do."

Aur wo kehta hai:​

"Tum abhi yahan baithe ho aur meri awaaz sun rahe ho. Tumhare haath ek dosray
mein phanse huye hain aur unki garmi mehsoos kar rahe ho."

Jese hi ye kaha, Barb ne aankhein band ki, aur unki muscles relax ho gayi — jise blank
stare kehte hain.​
Northern California mein isko informal term mein "spacing out" kehte hain — jab banda
physically to maujood hota hai, lekin mentally kahin aur hota hai.

Main ne Barb ko do baatein batain, dono aisi thein jo woh foran verify kar sakti thi. Jab usne
verify kiya ke dono baatein sach hain—khaaskar doosri baat—tab uske sunne aur mehsoos
karne mein aik achanak se mail aaya. Is ne use allow kiya ke woh apne aas paas ki duniya
ko dekhne ka tareeqa badalna shuru kare. Woh dheere dheere aik badli hui halat mein ja
rahi thi. Ab main thoda aur aage barhta hoon taake tum isay observe kar sako.

Jese ke maine kaha, Barb, tum yeh apni aankhen khuli ya band rakh kar kar sakti ho, jo
tumhare liye zyada aaraam de ho. Aur jab tum yahan baithi ho, to tum mehsoos kar sakti ho
ke kursi tumhare lower back ko support de rahi hai, aur tumhare pairon ke neeche jo rung
hai, woh tumhare heels ke agay tumhein support de rahe hain. Aur jab tum baithi ho, tum
mehsoos kar sakti ho ke tumhare haath tumhari raanon par rakhe hue garam ho rahe hain,
aur aik barhti hui comfort ka ehsaas ho raha hai. Aur agle dafa jab tumhari aankhen band
hon, to unhein wahan hi rehne dena aur andar hi andar us comfort ko maze se mehsoos
karna.

(Kisi ne chheenk mari.) Chheenk ki awaz tum se guzarti hai aur tumhein aur bhi zyada
aaraam mehsoos hota hai. Aur jab tum wahan baithi ho, saans le rahi ho... andar... aur
bahar... to tum aik barhta hua sukoon mehsoos kar rahi ho... Un khaas awazon par dhyan
do... aur aik barhti hui tahaffuz ki feeling ka lutf uthao... jo ke hamare is maqsad ke liye hai.

Iss waqt, Barb, main chahta hoon ke tumhara unconscious mind aik faisla kare... ke tumhein
aik taazgi ka ehsaas de... aur naya energy ka ahsas... jab ke tum meri awaaz sun rahi ho...
aur china ki khanak bhi... magar tumhare aas paas ke mahaul se thoda alag hote hue... aik
andar ka sukoon... aur is demonstration ke liye... tum pehle hi bohat achi tarah kaamiyab ho
chuki ho...
Aur main tumhare unconscious mind se yeh darkhwast karunga... ke woh... aik... ya dono...
tumhare haathon aur bazuon ko uthaye... agar yeh theek ho... chhoti... sachchi...
unconscious harkaton ke zariye... Aur tum yeh soch sakti ho... jab tum wahan baithi ho...
saans le rahi ho... ke kya yeh response hoga... jo tumhara unconscious mind select karega...

Ya phir... hamare maqsad ke liye... yeh bhi kaafi hoga... ke tumhara unconscious... tumhein
aik sukoon de... aur agar zyada theek ho... to tumhe aik fresh feeling ke saath dheere
dheere wapas le aaye... is kamray mein... khushi ke saath ke tum ne kitni jaldi seekha... yeh
altered state mein jana...

Dono surat mein... main yeh moka lena chahta hoon... ke tumhara unconscious kuch
material tayar kare...

Jese aik carpenter jab building banata hai... to uske paas basic tools hote hain... lakriyan...
keel... aur apne tools... Lakriyan aur keel khud mein koi matlab nahi rakhte... jab tak unhein
aik khaas form mein assemble na kiya jaye... aur ek dusre ke sath joda na jaye...

Isi tarah se, paper par jo choti choti nishaniyan hain... jinhein hum alphabet kehte hain... woh
bhi choti choti lakriyon jaise shapes se banti hain... Aur yeh zyada asaan hota hai dekhna...
ke carpenter kya bana sakta hai—ghar... ya garage... jab sab kuch tayar ho... lekin yeh
dekhna mushkil hota hai jab keel aur lakriyan alag alag hoti hain...

Kuch natural tareeqay hotay hain cheezon ko mehsoos karne ke… jo seekhay ja sakte hain.
Jaise hawa mein se… aik puri skyline… misaal ke tor par… San Francisco ka waterfront…
aik hi nazar mein samajh aa sakta hai… aur uska matlab mehsoos kiya ja sakta hai. Aur
asal mein… aik airplane se aisi cheezein dekhna asaan hota hai… aur poori soorat-e-haal
ko samajhna bhi… banisbat is ke ke aap buildings ke darmiyan ghoom rahe hon. Yehi baat
zindagi ke kai aur hisson mein bhi sach hai.

To ab aapka unconscious decide kare… ke aap fresh feel karte hue lautay… ya zyada
gehraayion mein chale jayein, to is ka signal yeh hoga ke aik ya dono haath uthen… yeh
faisla poori tarah aapke unconscious pe chhor diya gaya hai… Meri guzarish sirf yeh hai ke
jo bhi faisla ho… woh un tamaam cheezon ko ikattha karna shuru kare… jin ka mein zikr kar
chuka hoon… taake aapki soch ek naye aur behtar tareeqay se organize ho sake…

(Us aurat ne aankhein kholi aur angdaai li)

Jaise ke hamesha hota hai, mein sirf shuru ke chand jumlay wahi bolta hoon jo pehle se tay
karta hoon, uske baad jo kuch dil karta hai bol deta hoon. Mein aise statements se start
karta hoon jo foran Barb ke tajurbe se milti hain. Har waqt humare paas sensory tajurbe ki
la-mihdood duniya hoti hai. Fun yeh hai ke kaunsi sensory cheez ka zikr kiya jaye. Yeh khas
taur pe tab faida mand hoti hai jab aap woh cheez chunein jo shayad us ke zehan mein na
ho jab tak aap us ka zikr na karen.

Mujhe kaafi yakin tha ke woh meri awaaz ke lehje se waqif hogi—aur thi bhi. Lekin usay
kursi ke rung ka touch aur uska pairon ke heel ko support dena mehsoos nahi ho raha tha.
Jab mein ne yeh kaha to us mein tabdeeli nazar aayi. Usay apni maujooda hoshmandi ko
badalna pada taake us baat ki tasdeeq kar sake jo mein keh raha tha.
Is aik harkat se do kaam hue:

1.​ Meri credibility barh gayi, kyunki jo mein keh raha tha woh uske tajurbe se match
karta tha.​

2.​ Doosra yeh ke woh sensation jiska usay pehle hoosh nahi tha, uska zikr karne se
mein ne usay apni present consciousness badalne ka ikhlaqi hukm diya—iss case
mein, apne jism ki sensation par tawajjo dene ka.​

Mein ne aise aadha dozen jumlay kahe. Phir achanak mein ne apni guftagu ka andaaz
badla. Tum logon ne kiya mehsoos kiya?

Aurat: Phir tumne metaphor use karna shuru kiya.​

Mein ne us se pehle bhi kuch kiya tha.

Mard: Tumne guiding shuru ki.

Haan. Pehle mein sirf pacing kar raha tha—uske tajurbe ko bayan kar raha tha. Phir mein ne
kis type ke jumlay shuru kiye?

Mard: Tumne usay aankhein band karne ka kaha.

Mein ne aankhein band karne ka mashwara diya, lekin woh to pehle se kar rahi thi. Hum
isay incorporation kehte hain. Woh kuch kar rahi thi, to mein ne usi ko apni guftagu mein
shamil kar liya.

Aankhein band hone ke baad mein ne aise jumlay kehne shuru kiye jo internal states ke
bare mein thay—jaise ke "jaise jaise tum yahan bethi ho, aik badhta hua sukoon aur hifazat
ka ehsaas." Mere liye, us ke nonverbal signals—jaise dheemi saans lena, muscles ka relax
hona, waghera—yeh sab “comfort” ke indicators hain. Lekin ho sakta hai ke Barb ke liye
"comfort" ka matlab kuch aur ho. Har shakhs ke liye yeh lafz kuch aur matlab rakhta hai. Jab
mein "comfort" jese lafz use karta hoon, to mein sensory-grounded baat nahi kar raha hota.
Mein usay us halat mein le ja raha hota hoon—jo us lafz ka matlab us ke liye ho.

Umeed hai ke tum log samajh gaye ho ke baaqi guftagu kis cheez ke bare mein thi. Barb ne
pehle mujh se aik specific academic skill mein madad maangi thi. To mein ne kuch
metaphors sunaye jo us change ki tayari ke liye thay. Tum shayad in mein se kisi baat ko
samajh lo, aur shayad nahi. Lekin Barb apni tarah se in baaton ka matlab samajh leti
hai—aur wahi asli baat hai.

Barb: Mujhe us waqt kuch samajh nahi aaya. Sirf lafzon ka silsila tha. Aik waqt ke baad
mein ne conscious level par samajhne ki koshish chhor di.

Bilkul theek. Aur yeh exactly wohi response tha jo main chah raha tha:​
"Yeh itne zyada lafz thay ke maine koshish hi chhor di ke in ka matlab samajhoun. Kya
fazool bakwas hai? Carpenters aur San Francisco skyline ki baat kar rahe ho. Aur jab plane
se dekho to alag lagta hai, buildings ke darmiyan chalne se."
Yani, jo aakhri hissa tha woh us request ke mutabiq tha jo us ne pehle mujh se ki thi. Jab
main metaphors suna raha tha, us ka conscious mind samajh nahi raha tha. Lekin mujhe
aise signals milein jo dikhate thay ke us ka unconscious mind reference samajh raha tha
aur us tarf kaam shuru kar chuka tha jo maine us se andar hi andar karwane ki darkhwast ki
thi.

Sawal: Aap ne hand levitation pursue karna kyun chhor diya?​

Nahi, maine usay aik choice di. Main hamesha choice deta hoon.

Sawal: Kya us ne levitation par resistance dikhaya aur phir aap ne usay alternative
diya?​
Nahi, koi resistance nahi tha. Us ka haath uthne laga tha. Us ki ungliyon aur anguthay mein
harkat aa gayi thi. Phir maine doosri choice offer ki, aur us ka unconscious mind ne woh
select kar li. Agar main woh choice offer na karta, to us ka haath uthta rehta.

Maine hand aur arm levitation ki suggestion di aur uske baad twitches aayein — jo hamesha
movement se pehle aate hain. Us waqt mujhe yaad aaya ke mujhe induction demonstrate
karni thi, trance phenomena nahi. To maine usay suggestion di ke woh khud ko trance se
bahar nikale lekin refreshment aur renewal ke saath — jaise us ne kuch bara achieve kiya
ho.

Acha hypnotist usi tarah hota hai jaise acha hukumat — jitna kam karein aur utna hi
behtareen nateeja laayein.​
Mera metaphorical andaaz-e-soch yeh tha ke Barb ne mujhe aik loop mein enter karne diya
jahan main us ke kuch experiences ko wapas reflect kar saka — jis se us ne apni
consciousness ko radically alter kiya. Lekin poora waqt, woh hi lead kar rahi thi — main sirf
us ke changes ko notice kar ke response de raha tha, aur suggestion deta ja raha tha ke
agla step kya ho sakta hai.

Us ne meri har suggestion accept ki. Agar kisi point par us ne indication di hoti ke koi
suggestion us ke liye theek nahi, to main foran usay alternative offer karta.

Sawal: Aap kaise samajhte hain ke koi suggestion us ke liye inappropriate hai?

Uska matlab yeh hai ke jab hypnotist ne metaphorical language use ki (jaise "San Francisco
skyline ko plane se dekhna vs buildings ke darmiyan chalna"), to conscious mind confuse
tha, lekin unconscious mind ne us signal ko samajh liya tha. Hypnotist keh raha hai ke
usne hand levitation ka option diya, aur jab haath uth raha tha, tab usne doosra option de
diya—aur uska unconscious ne woh option le liya. Agar doosra option nahi diya hota, to
haath uthta rehta.

Translation summary (Roman Urdu):

Agar trance ke physical signs (jaise muscle relaxation, breathing changes, etc.) reverse ho
jayein, to iska matlab hota hai ke suggestion inappropriate tha. Jaise ek bande ne poocha
ke "us aurat ka hasi karna jab tumne uske haath ko garam hone ka kaha, uska kya matlab
tha?" Hypnotist ne kaha ke hasi uska unconscious signal tha ke yeh kaam kar raha hai, aur
usne intentionally us point par induction ko roka taa ke sab log woh signal dekh saken.
Ek aur aurat ne kaha ke "main tumhe observe karne aayi thi, lekin trance mein chali gayi," to
hypnotist ne kaha ke tum akele nahi thi, 30 log aur bhi trance mein gaye.

Hypnotist ka point:​
Main jab words jaise "comfort", "security", "calmness" use karta hoon, to main andaza nahi
lagata ke woh banda kya mehsoos kar raha hai. Main bas aise lafz use karta hoon jo
general hote hain aur har shakhs unko apne andaaz mein interpret karta hai.

Do tarah ke lafz hote hain:

1.​ Sensory-grounded (jaise "aankhon ka focus badla", "saans ki speed slow hui") –
yeh mujhe synchrony mein laate hain.​

2.​ Non-sensory-grounded (jaise "peace", "serenity", "calm") – yeh general instructions

hain jo har shakhs apne hisaab se apply karta hai.​

Hypnotist ka kaam: Process chalana. Content patient ka hota hai.

Nonverbal Pacing and Leading

Har hypnosis ko ek useful tareeqe se feedback samjha ja sakta hai. Is waqt Bob mere
samne baitha hai. Hum dono verbal aur nonverbal tor par ek dosre ko bohat si information
de rahe hain. In tamam signals mein se kuch cheezein conscious hoti hain (jo dono ko pata
hoti hain) aur kuch unconscious (jo samajh mein nahi aatin lekin asar karti hain).

Main Bob ke un messages ko choose kar sakta hoon jo uske awareness ke bahar hain —
jaise uski body language — aur unko mirror kar ke usko feedback de sakta hoon. Jab main
aisa karta hoon, toh do cheezein ho sakti hain:

1.​ Ya toh Bob in unconscious signals ko consciously feel karne lagta hai,​

2.​ Ya phir un unconscious responses ka effect amplify ho jata hai, aur wo aur gehri
trance mein chala jata hai.​

Example ke taur pe:​

Agar Bob ki aankhon ki pupil dilation ho rahi hai, toh main bhi apni aankhon ko waise hi
dilate kar sakta hoon. Phir dheere dheere main apni nazar defocus karta hoon, lekin itni
speed se ke Bob follow kar sake. Defocused nazar ka matlab hota hai ke insan andar ki
processing mein busy hai, yani trance ka signal.

Agar Bob ki aankhen blink kar rahi hain, toh main bhi uski tarah blink karta hoon. Phir
dheere dheere apni blinking ko slow kar deta hoon, jab tak wo apni aankhen band nahi kar
leta. Isi tarah, main uske muscle tone ko mirror karta hoon, aur phir apne muscles relax
karta hoon, jisse usko bhi relaxation feel hone lagti hai.

Jab aap nonverbal pacing aur leading karte ho, toh bolne ki zarurat nahi hoti. Sirf
mirroring se rapport banate ho, aur phir khud ko trance mein daalte ho — dheere dheere —
jisse wo banda bhi follow karta hai.

Ye pacing aur leading aik meta-pattern hai — matlab har induction mein yeh pattern hota hi
hota hai. Aap isko single tool ke taur par ya kisi aur induction mein add-on ke taur par use
kar sakte ho.

Practice Tip:​
Kisi waqt bina bolay sirf nonverbal mirroring ki practice karo. Samne wale ko mirror karo,
phir dheere dheere apne aap ko trance mein daalo. Lekin dhyan rahe — wapas aane ka koi
system zarur banana (warna dono dreamland mein hi ghoomte rahoge).

Overlapping Representational Systems

Jin logon ko "representational systems" ka nahi pata, unke liye main thoda sa explain karta
hoon. Humein kuch waqt pehle yeh notice hua ke log us type ki information ko zyada
process karte hain jismein woh naturally expert hote hain, ya jismein unka zyada dhyaan
hota hai.

Agar aap experience ko sensory channels ke hisaab se divide karo, to aapke paas hota hai
ek visual chunk (jo aap dekhte ho), ek auditory chunk (jo aap sunte ho), aur ek
kinesthetic chunk (jo aap feel karte ho physically/emotionally). Do aur channels hain —
olfactory (smell) aur gustatory (taste) — lekin yeh do tabhi major hote hain jab aap
cooking ya eating kar rahe ho. Normal life mein zyada tar log ya to visuals pe focus karte
hain, ya sounds pe, ya phir feelings pe.

In teen primary channels ko hum representational systems kehte hain, kyun ke yehi
systems humari experience ko "represent" karte hain. Aur jab log apni feelings ya soch
describe karte hain, to unke words batate hain ke woh kaunsa system zyada use kar rahe
hain.

Ab interesting baat yeh hai: agar aap kisi se poocho ke uski normal state of
consciousness kaisi hoti hai aur phir poocho ke ek altered state (jaise ke hypnosis) mein
kaisa lagta hai, to woh often different system use karega.​
Jaise: koi keh sakta hai, "I have a clear, focused sense of who I am" — yeh visual words
hain.​
Phir woh keh sakta hai, "I'm in touch with the universe" — yeh kinesthetic words hain.

Iska matlab: agar aap jaan lo ke koi banda normally kis system mein hota hai (visual,
auditory, kinesthetic), to aapko yeh samajhne mein madad milegi ke altered state uske liye
kya hoga — yani koi aur system.
Example: agar koi aise aaye jo bole ke woh apne feelings ke sath connected hai, aur apni
life pe strong grip rakhta hai — to ho sakta hai woh normally kinesthetic system use karta
ho. Ab agar main usay hypnosis mein daalna chahoon, to main usay visual ya auditory pe le
jaunga — jo uske liye altered hoga.

Phir author ek example deta hai:

Jan, zara yahan aao. Apne ghar ke baare mein koi pasandida cheez batao.​
Jan: "Mujhe apne ghar ka view bohot pasand hai. Mera ghar ocean ke samne
hai — bas kamaal ka hai."

Ab Jan ne visual information di — yani yeh banda safely visual experience pace kar sakta
hai. Meta-pattern yaad rakho: Pacing and Leading — pehle banda jahan hai, wahan usay
match karo (pacing), phir usay lead karo kisi aur state mein (jo uska natural system nahi
hai).

So Jan ke liye altered state shayad ho auditory ya kinesthetic, kyun ke woh normally visual
pe operate karti hai.

Phir woh poochta hai:

Beach pasand hai tumhein?​

Jan: "Oh yes!"

(Yani aur bhi visual imagery pace ki ja rahi hai — agla step hoga slowly lead karna kisi aur
system ki taraf.)

Main chahta hoon ke aap... chahe aapki aankhen khuli hon ya band... mere saath follow
karein jab main aapko ek tasveer deta hoon... samundar ke kinare hone ka tajurba... Agar
aap waqai samundar ja sakte... aaj jese din mein... to sabse pehle jo cheez aap mehsoos
karenge... wo yeh hai ke jab aap upar dekhen... to aap ko asmaan ki roshni ka ek khas
andaaz nazar aayega... Shayad aap kuch badal asmaan mein tairtay hue dekhein... aur jab
aap idhar-udhar dekhen... to aap ko hawa ki safai ka lutf aaye... phir jab aap neeche
dekhen... aur samundar ke kinare ki mitti dekhain... to jab aap wahan kharay hote hain... aur
mitti ko dekh rahe hote hain jahan aap kharay hain... to aap apne paon ko dekhte hain... aur
mehsoos karte hain... ke mitti ke upar kharay hone ka ehsaas kaisa hai...

Aur jab aap samundar ki taraf dekhen... to aap dekh sakte hain... lehron ko... ek ke baad
ek... jo aap ki taraf aa rahi hoti hain... har lehr ka apna aik andaaz hota hai... aik khas
curve... aik khas rang jab wo toot kar phathti hai... aur jab aap un lehron ko aata dekhte
hain... to aap mehsoos karte hain... ke hawa un lehron ke upar se pani ke chhentay uda rahi
hai... jab wo shore se takrati hain... aur jab aap us spray ko dekhte hain, to aap mehsoos
karte hain... hawa mein nami... jab wo aap ke chehre ko chu rahi hoti hai...

Aur agar aap... ab kuch qadam... pani mein le lein... aur mehsoos karein... pani ki thandak jo
aap ke paon aur ankles ke gird ghoom rahi hoti hai... to aap waqai us ka lutf utha sakte
hain...

Ab agar aap upar ya neeche kinare par dekhein, to aap ek pehchana-pehchana sa shakhs
dekhte hain... jo wahan hone ki aapne tawaqqo nahi ki thi... aur aap usay haath hila ke
salaam karte hain... aur wo shakhs aapko pukar kar kisi doosre waqt aur jagah ki yaad dilata
hai... koi acha aur hairan kun lamha... jo us tajurbe se nikla tha... aur aap us tajurbe ka lutf
uthate hain... aur us se kuch seekhte hain... jo bhi aapke liye mufeed ho sakta ho...

Aur jab aap tayyar ho jayein... aur apne andaaz se un lamhon ka lutf le chuke ho... jitna waqt
chahen le kar... tab wapas aayen...

Ab sawaal:​
Main kis tarah ka communication use kar raha tha?

Aurat: Aap ziada tar visual use kar rahe the... aur visuals aur kinesthetic (mehsoos karne
wali cheezen) ke darmiyan idhar-udhar ja rahe the. Kya aap ne decide kiya ke aap sirf
kinesthetic pe ruk jaayein?

Jawab: Agar main induction continue karta to main ruk jaata. Jab main idhar-udhar jata
hoon to test karta hoon ke kya wo follow kar sakti hai. Socho isay jaise ke dono ka saath
saath saans lena. Main pehle us ke saath saans leta hoon, phir apni breathing change karta
hoon. Agar wo follow karti hai to mujhe pata chal jata hai ke rapport ban gaya hai; matlab
main lead mein hoon aur jo tajurba chahoon bana sakta hoon.

Sawaal: Mujhe kaise pata chala ke wo follow kar rahi hai?

Mard: Uska sar aap ke instructions ke mutabiq hil raha tha.

Jawab: Bilkul. Jab maine kaha ke upar dekho, to uska sar upar gaya. Jab neeche kaha to
neeche. Jab maine kaha lehron ki taraf dekho, to usne lehron ki taraf dekha. Uska jism wo
sab kuch kar raha tha jo main keh raha tha. Yehi enough hota hai rapport ke liye. Ab sawaal
ye hai: agar main system change karoon to rapport rahega? Jawaab: try karo aur dekh lo.
So maine us se kaha ke beach ki taraf dekho, phir maine kaha "aur mehsoos karo apne
paon mitti mein..."

Jan: Main ne kiya tha.

Aurat: To jab aap usay kisi naye system mein le jaate hain (visual se kinesthetic waghera),
to kya aap wahan ruk jaate hain?

Haan. Phir main zyadatar us ke jism ke ehsaasat ke baare mein baat karta. Jaise hi woh
paani mein qadam rakhti hai, usay paani ke ghoomnay ka ehsaas hota hai... aur hawa mein
nami ka ehsaas hota hai... jaise hawa us ke chehray se takra rahi hoti hai.

Main pehlay aik visual tasveer banata hoon ke woh kahan hai, phir us visual tasveer ko kisi
doosri system (jaise kinesthetic ya auditory) se jorne ki koshish karta hoon. Jaise agar woh
neeche dekhti hai aur reth par apne pair dekh rahi hoti hai, toh woh reth ki mazbooti ko
mehsoos karti hai. Agar woh samandar ki lehron ko dekh rahi hoti hai jo toot rahi hain aur
pani ka chhinta hawa mein ura jaa raha hota hai, toh woh apne chehray par us hawa ka
jhonka mehsoos karti hai.
Har tajurbe mein hamesha ek visual, ek auditory, aur ek kinesthetic dimension hota hai.
Toh aap us system se shuru karte ho jo banda pehle se use kar raha hota hai — isay kehte
hain pacing, yaani client ke model se connect hona. Us ke baad aap aik simple verbal
formula use kar sakte ho:​
"Tum dekhte ho ke badal aasman mein hil rahe hain... aur jaise jaise tum unhe dekhte
ho, tum apne chehray par hawa ka jhonka mehsoos karte ho."​
Badal ka hilna hawa ki taraf ishara deta hai.

Yahan visual image (badal hil rahe hain) aur kinesthetic (hawa ka jhonka mehsoos karna)
ke darmiyan overlap ka point hai. Verbal formula hai:​
"Jaise X... tum Y mehsoos karte ho", jahan X pacing hai aur Y lead hai.

Aurat: Aap ne sirf aik baar auditory use kiya, jab aap ne kaha ke uska dost usay bula raha
hota hai. Kya koi khas wajah thi ke aap ne auditory pe focus nahi kiya?

Mard: Zarurat nahi thi. Hamari culture mein auditory system aam tor pe weak hota hai,
siwaye musicians ke. Bahut si jagahon pe mein auditory cheezein daal sakta tha — jaise
hawa ki awaaz, lehron ka shore, etc.

Main induction aur utilization ke darmiyan farq wazeh karna chahta hoon.​
Agar main induction karta hoon: visual → visual → visual, phir kinesthetic pe switch karta
hoon aur woh follow karti hai, toh uska state of consciousness drastically change ho jata
hai. Jab woh change ho jaye, aur main woh saare physiological signs dekh loon (jo hum
ne pehle discuss kiye thay), toh phir main aik complete tajurba bana sakta hoon. Phir main
teeno systems use karta hoon:

●​ Woh us shakhs ke paas jaati hai​

●​ Haath barhati hai​

●​ Us shakhs ko chhooti hai​

●​ Us ka chehra dekhti hai aur dekhti hai ke uska expression kya hai​

●​ Phir sunti hai ke woh shakhs us se kya keh raha hai​

Is tarah ka fantasy experience teeno systems ke saath use kiya ja sakta hai kisi bhi
personal transformation ke liye.

Aurat: Beech mein aik auditory interruption aayi thi — kisi ka tape recorder zor se click
hua. Aap ne use utilize kyun nahi kiya? Usne aapko interrupt toh kiya tha.

Mard: Mujhe interrupt kiya, lekin usay nahi. Usne woh sound suna hi nahi. Mujhe pata chala
uske breathing, skin color, ya muscle tone mein koi tabdeeli nahi aayi. Jab response hi
nahi tha, toh us sound ka zikr karna bewaqoofi hoti.

Aurat: Agar usne woh sound sun li hoti, toh aap usay induction mein kaise shamil karte?
Mard: "Aur beech par bhi kabhi kabhi ajeeb si awaazein hoti hain..."

Mard: Uske leg swing ko incorporate karna kaisa hota?

Mard: Kar sakta tha. Use swing pe bithata beach par. Bohut achha kaam karta. Uski leg
swing aur kuch aur behaviors ko utilize karna acha option hota. Lekin har dafa induction
mein har cheez use karni zaroori nahi — sirf utni hi jitni se desired response mil jaye.

Jan: Mujhe yaad hai meri taang ghoom rahi thi, aur us waqt mujhe pata tha kyun, lekin ab
yaad nahi.

Wo yeh maloomat wapas kaise hasil kar sakti thi, same representational system overlap ke
principles use karke?​
…Jan, apni leg dubara swing karo. Aankhein band karo aur leg swing karo dubara, aur
dekho ke kya visual cheezein nazar aati hain... Thoda sa tez karo.

Jan: Sirf logon ke chehray.

Meri interpretation, jab main ab peeche sochta hoon, yeh thi ke us ne age-regress kiya tha
jab wo yeh kar rahi thi — wo phir se ek chhoti larki ban gayi thi jo beach par thi. Ek adult aur
ek bachi ke leg swing karne ka tareeqa different hota hai. Ab wo jis tarah se leg swing kar
rahi thi, wo relatively adult tha. Lekin jab wo altered state mein thi to uska style zyada
childlike tha. Jaise wo ek chhoti larki beach par wapas chali gayi thi. Kya tumhein yaad hai
ke tum us waqt kitni age ki thi?

Jan: Wahi umar jo ab hai.

Us ne kaha ke wo abhi jitni umar ki hai, utni hi us waqt bhi thi — lekin uske facial
expressions aur voice tone mein wo nonverbal changes aaye jo age regression ke indicators
hain. Aur isi tarah uska leg swing karna bhi tha — bilkul ek chhoti larki ki tarah.

Theek hai, is tarah ki induction ke baare mein koi sawaal?

Aik aadmi: Mujhe yaad nahi ke tum ne start kaise kiya. Kya tum ne us se kuch poocha tha?

Haan. Main ne ek aisi cheez ki jo mere khayal mein bohot kaam ki hoti hai. Main ne poocha,
"Kya tumhein beach jaana pasand hai?" aur uska reaction observe kiya. Agar main bas
assume kar leta ke use beach pasand hai, to mujhe yeh kaise pata chalta ke uski puri family
teen saal ki umar mein uske samne doob gayi thi? Aise case mein beach uske liye relaxing
jagah nahi hoti.

Principle yeh hai ke pehle yeh jaanchna hota hai ke ek insan normal state mein kaunsa
representational system ziada use karta hai. Kuch log teeno systems (visual, auditory,
kinesthetic) use karte hain, to unke saath kahin se bhi shuru kiya ja sakta hai. Lekin jab
stress ka context ho — jaise ke therapy — to aksar log ek system mein specialize kar lete
hain. Wahi unka problem ban jata hai jis wajah se wo aapke paas aate hain.

Aise logon ke saath agar aap unka used system identify karke baqi do representational
systems introduce kar dein to wo khud apne liye naye behavior dhoond lete hain. Yeh kaam
overlap se hota hai.
Overlap har waqt hota hai humare kaam mein. Sirf ek representational system se doosre
mein nahi, balkay bahar se andar ka overlap bhi hota hai.

Main aik aadmi ko jaanta hoon jo kehta tha:​

"Main hundred different tarikon se inductions karta hoon."​
Mujhe interest hua, to main ne kaha ke jitne methods yaad hain wo dikhao. Usne 49
dikhaye. Lekin formal nazar se dekha jaye to sab ek hi pattern ke the:

●​ Outside visual​

●​ Inside visual​

●​ Outside kinesthetic​

●​ Inside kinesthetic​

●​ Outside auditory​

●​ Inside auditory​

Content different tha, lekin structure hamesha yahi tha. Aur wo phir bhi ek effective hypnotist
hai traditional hypnosis ke outcomes achieve karne mein.

Group work ke context mein, aap kisi bhi system se start kar sakte ho jab tak aapka partner
pehle se hi koi specific system mein deeply specialized na ho.​
Lekin main chahta hoon ke aap practice ke liye poora process follow karo:

●​ Kisi previous experience ke baare mein partner se kuch poochho​

●​ Uske jawab mein use hone wale predicates (visual, auditory, kinesthetic hints) note
karo​

●​ Jo system wo use kar raha ho, usi se start karo​

●​ 4–5 usi system ke descriptive sentences do​

●​ Phir ek overlapping point dhoondo jahan se doosre system mein smoothly le jaa
sako.

Accessing a Previous Trance State

Yeh sab se asan trance induction technique hai:

Agar aap client se poochein:​

"Kya aap kabhi trance ya hypnosis state mein gayi hain?"​
Aur agar wo kehti hai "haan", to phir us trance ka detail mein poora scene waapas bulwa
lo —​
jaise:

●​ Room ka setup kaisa tha?​

●​ Hypnotist ki awaaz kaisi thi?​

●​ Usne step-by-step kya kiya tha trance mein le jaane ke liye?​

Jab wo yeh sab describe karegi, to usay automatically wo trance wapas feel hone
lagega — kyunki jab hum kisi purani memory ko itne detail mein yaad karte hain, to hum us
state mein phir se chale jaate hain.​
Isay kehte hain automatic regression.

Agar client jaldi-jaldi bata rahi ho aur trance feel nahi aa raha, to:

●​ Non-verbally haath ya aankhon se indicate karo: “slow down.”​

●​ Ya kuch aur detailed questions poocho:​

"Aap us waqt kis tarah baithi thin?"​
"Woh room is jaisa tha ya alag tha?"​
"Walls kis colour ki thi?"​
"Eyes band ho rahi thi to hypnotist right side jhuka tha ya left?"​

Jab client us purane trance ka body posture, visuals, and sounds yaad karti hai, to usay
subconsciously wohi altered state wapas mil jati hai.

Aur jab wo trance state mein aa jaaye — to bas usi ko use kar lo.​
Kuch naya karne ki zarurat hi nahi.

Jaise agar main poochhun:​

"Aap mein se kitne logon ne Milton Erickson se milne ka tajurba kiya hai?"​
To jinhon ne kiya hai, unka chehra dekh kar hi samajh aa jaata hai — kyunki wo turant
trance memory access kar rahe hote hain.

Bottom line:​
Trance mein le jaane ke liye koi jadugari nahi chahiye —​
Client se uska purana trance wapas yaad karwa do, wohi kaafi hai.

Naturally Occurring Trance States

Ek aur bohot asaan tareeqa hai kisi ko trance state mein le jaane ka. Har shakhs kabhi na
kabhi somnambulistic trance (neend mein chalne jesa halat) mein jaa chuka hota hai – sirf
fark ye hai ke unhon ne usay pehchana hai ya nahi.

Aaj subah hum ne har ek se kaha ke apni zindagi ka koi aisa waqia yaad karo jahan unka
dhyan sirf ek cheez par ho – yani limited focus of attention. Baaki do log us bande se us
experience ke baare mein baat karte hain taake us feeling ko aur gehra kiya jaa sake.

Tum kisi bande ke baare mein kuch jaane baghair bhi usi halat ka response le sakte ho – sirf
itna karo ke un trance states ka zikr karo jo humari culture mein naturally hoti hain. Tareeqa
simple hai: us shakhs ke saamne baitho aur bolo:

"Chalo shuru karne se pehle hum kuch aam tajurbaat ke baare mein baat karte
hain. Yeh meri communication ke liye zaroori hai taake mujhe pata chale ke
tumhari personal history mein kis qisam ke tajurbaat hain, aur mein un
resources ka use karke tumhein hypnosis ke naye topic mein guide kar sakun."

Phir tum paanch aise trance tajurbaat biyan karo jo aam logon ko hote hain. Jab wo tumhare
lafzon ko samajhne ki koshish karti hai, aur apne tajurbaat mein milti-julti misaal dhundhne
lagti hai – to wo khud-ba-khud ek altered (badli hui) state mein chali jaati hai.

Example:

"Jab mein tumse baat karta hoon ke lambe safar ke doran tumhein kaisa lagta hai? To mein
direct suggestion nahi de raha ke tum trance mein jao, sirf ek aisi situation ka zikr kar raha
hoon jahan trance naturally hoti hai."

Misal ke toor par:

"Kal mein ne Santa Cruz, California se San Jose airport tak gaari chalayi. Mein
ne yeh raasta kai dafa tay kiya hai... aur jese aksar hota hai... mujhe yaad hi
nahi ke mein kaise wahan pohoncha... sirf itna yaad hai ke mein ne Highway 17
pe turn liya. Aur mein safely wahan pohonch gaya. Shayad us safar ki monotony
(ek jesi boring road) ne mujhe ek automatic, unconscious mode mein daal diya,
jahan meri body apne aap mujhe manzil tak le gayi."

Aur yeh us tajurbe jesa hi tha jo aksar hota hai jab hum kisi boring lecture mein hote hain –
jahan bolne wala banda bilkul bhi exciting nahi hota. Aise waqt mein dimagh idhar-udhar
bhatakta hai – mazeed interesting jagah aur waqt ki taraf... jahan current boring mahaul se
zyada stimulation hoti hai.

Ya aik aur experience hay jo meri zindagi mein hua hay… jaise main jungle mein chal raha
hoon… aik pur-sukoon din par… Mere ilaqay ke kuch khoobsurat tareen areas woh hain
jahan redwood ke jungle hain… Maine logon ko kehte suna hay ke in redwood junglon ka jo
visual asar hota hay, woh kisi cathedral (bari girja) mein honay jaise hota hay… aik aisi
jagah jahan aik azaim, sukoon bhari aur mutma'in feeling hoti hay…
Aur jab main un redwood ke junglon se guzarta hoon… aik cheez jo redwood ke bare mein
hay woh yeh ke yeh itne homogeneous (hum-jaanib) hote hain ke in mein zyada wildlife
support nahi hoti, khaaskar parinday… to kai dafa aik shahansha sukoon bhari khamoshi
hoti hay is tarah ke walk mein… aur halan ke experience mein zyada variety nahi hoti… jab
main aise walks karta hoon… to mujhe andar se aik gehra sukoon aur relaxation mehsoos
hota hay… jisay main waqai qadr karta hoon…

In teen experiences mein aik cheez mushtarik kiya thi?​

Aurat: Relaxation, tanhaai.​
Mard: Sukoon.​
Aurat: Repetition (dohrana).

Haan, yeh sab repetitive thay… monotonous thay… aur agar aap log dekhtay ja rahay hotay
jab main bol raha tha… to aap notice kartay ke kai logon mein woh physiological signs
(jismani asraat) aa rahay thay jo trance ke dauran hote hain.

To aik bilkul natural aur chupke tareeqay se kisi ko unki conscious state se aik altered (badli
hui) state mein le jaane ka tareeqa yeh hay ke aise choti choti kahaniyan ya experiences
share kiye jaayein jo sirf wohi response laate hain jo aap chahte ho. Us waqt sab kuch
aapke observation pe depend karta hay—ke kya aap yeh dekh pa rahay ho ke us shakhs ne
woh response diya ke nahi.

Jitni zarurat ho utni stories sunao jab tak woh response na mil jaye. Aap lift (elevator) ka bhi
zikar kar saktay ho—har shakhs almost trance mein chala jata hay jab woh lift mein hota
hay. Woh sirf upar number dekhte hain, unki pupils dilate hoti hain, aur woh bilkul
immobilized (beharakat) ho jaate hain. Aur culture mein lift ke andar sirf teen jagahon pe
dekhna theek samjha jata hay—numbers, deewar ya floor.

Ek aur misaal lo: Jab tum gari chala rahay hotay ho aur signal red hota hai, to tum gari rokte
ho. Jaise hi gari rukti hai, tumhara movement bhi ruk jata hai.

Aur kaun se naturally trance states hoti hain?

Aurat: Movie dekhte waqt.​

Mard: Church mein baithte waqt.​
Haan, lekin aaj kal church wala tajurba universal nahi raha. Har kisi ne nahi kiya hota. Lekin
jinhon ne kiya hai, un ke liye yeh misaal fit baithti hai.

Aurat: Television dekhte waqt.​

Bilkul. Agar tum chahte ho ke apne bachon ko koi baat samjhao—jaise un se kehna ke
apna room saaf karo—TV dekhte waqt karna. Us waqt wo kahin aur hote hain, us show
mein khoe hue. Tum chup chaap unke paas baith jao aur halka sa, interrupt kiye baghair,
kehna shuru karo:​
“… aur tumhe aik zabardast ehsaas ho raha hai ke tum…”
Mard: Mental hospital ke chronic patients TV pura din dekhte hain. Kabhi socha nahi un tak
us raaste se pohcha jaye.​
Haan, tum us raaste se try kar sakte ho.

Jab hum hypnosis seekh rahe the, Richard Bandler aur mein aik game khelte the. Hum aik
group lete the “naive subjects” ka—matlab jo kabhi officially trance mein nahi gaye. Phir
challenge yeh hota tha ke unko normal state se le ja kar somnambulistic trance (gehri
hypnosis wali state) mein kitne kam steps mein le ja sakte hain.

Sabse pehle mein aksar yeh poochta tha ke kya mujhe yeh dekhnay ki ijaazat milegi ke wo
log meditative state mein ja rahe hain, baghair mein unhe disturb karun. Jab wo meditative
state mein chale jaate, to mein kehta:​
“Agar aap ijaazat dein, to mein aik suggestion doon ga ke aap is meditative state se aik
somnambulistic trance state mein shift karein—baghair meditation ke asar ko todhe—taake
hum wo changes shuru kar sakein jo aap chahte hain.”

Mein trance aur meditation ko alag karta hoon. Agar yeh dono mix ho jayein, to jab bhi
banda meditate karega, wo dubara trance mein chala jaye ga. Aur mein yeh nahi
chahta—jab tak koi khaas wajah na ho.

Jab tum officially hypnosis karna chaho (ritualistic type), to sabse pehle pehle kuch covert
trance inductions kar lo. Misal ke taur pe: koi aurat aati hai aur kehti hai “hypnosis karo mera
masla hal karne ke liye.” Tum kehte ho, “Bilkul, lekin shuru karne se pehle kuch zaroori
cheezen poochhni hain.”

Phir tum usi dauraan usko trance mein le jaate ho. Tum kehte ho:​
“Sabse pehle mujhe tumhari yaadon ka level check karna hai.”​
Phir case history lena shuru karte ho:​
“Tum kahan paida hui thi? Woh ghar kaisa tha? Kis tarah ki awaazein aati thin? Tumhe
kaisa feel hota tha?”

Aur wo trance mein chali jaati hai—kyun ke detailed past yaad karne ke liye banda mentally
wapas jata hai. Isay age regression kehte hain. Us waqt uska sirf ek connection present se
hota hai: tumhari awaaz.

Trance ki ek definition yeh hai ke: “banda apne waqt aur jagah ke halat se mentally alag
ho jaye.” Is example mein yahi ho raha hota hai.

Traditional hypnotists ke nazdeek regression deep trance ka hissa hota hai. Lekin yeh to
aam hota hai. Gestalt therapists to yeh phenomena daily result mein nikaalte hain, bina
hypnosis keh kar. Poore duniya mein log khaali kursi dekh kar maa ya baap ko dekhte hain,
unse baat karte hain, unki awaaz suntay hain—yeh sab auditory aur visual hallucination
hoti hain.

Lekin kyun ke isay hypnosis nahi kehte, is liye log react nahi karte. Label badlo, resistance
khatam.

Waise to sirf aik teaching technique ke tor par, main yahan aik baat wazeh karna chahta
hoon. Agar kabhi aap hypnosis par lecture dein, to naturally group trance mein jaata rahe ga
aur phir wapas aayega. Kyun? Kyunke jab aap hypnosis aur trance describe kar rahe hote
ho, to sunne wale log sirf tabhi usay samajh sakte hain jab woh apne personal tajurbe
access karen jo un descriptions se match karte hon.

Yeh sab is baat par depend karta hai ke aap apni personal power mein kitna confidence
rakhte hain. Aap aasani se 100 logon ko gehri trance mein bhej sakte hain — ya nahi, agar
aapka outcome kuch aur hai. Dunia mein is se asaan subject shayad hi ho jis par lecture
diya ja sake, kyunke jese jese aap is par baat karte hain, trance waqayi ho rahi hoti hai.

Aap logon ke physical responses observe kar ke bhi ye jaan sakte hain ke group mein se
kisko demonstration ke liye select karna chahiye. Aap un 20% logon mein se kisi ko chunein
jo pichhle 50 minutes mein kam az kam paanch dafa gehri “somnambulistic” trance mein ja
chuke hain. Workshop ke end tak aapko yeh sensory experience ho jana chahiye ke kaun
gehri trance mein jaa raha hai aur material ko is altered state mein absorb kar raha hai; kaun
conscious aur unconscious dono states mein response de raha hai; aur kaun sirf conscious
hai.

Agar aap kisi khaas response ka demonstration dikhana chahtay hain, to pehle logon ko
batayein ke aap kya karne wale hain, phir un responses ka zikr karein jo aap expect karte
hain, aur phir observe karein ke kaun sab se tezi se woh responses develop karta hai. Bas
wahi aapka ideal demonstration subject hoga.

Ab, kuch log yahan is waqt kuch zyada hi jaldi drift off kar rahe hain — shayad itna ke woh is
material ko effectively seekh nahi paayein ge. To aap khud se aik chhota sa pause lein...
andar se kisi hissa se silently request karein ke woh aapke liye aik aisi state of
consciousness maintain kare jo learning ke liye sab se zyada faida mand ho.

Agar aapko reframing ka format already pata hai, to aap usay use kar sakte hain. Chaliye,
aik chhoti si khamoshi ka waqt lein jab tak aap apne andar yeh arrangement bana lein…

Exercise 4
Main ne aapko abhi paanch khaas induction techniques di hain: (1) verbal pacing aur
leading, (2) nonverbal pacing aur leading, (3) representational system overlap, (4) pehle ke
trance tak pahunchna, aur (5) aam tor par hone wale trance ke haalaton ka bayan. Ab aap
log teen logon ke groups banao, aur har ek apni pasand ki technique chune jo usne pehle
systematically nahi ki. Person A induction chune ga aur usay B par kare ga. B bas enjoy
kare ga.

Person C apni puri conscious tawajjoh istemal kare ga taake dekhe ke trance mein jaate
waqt B mein kya tabdeeliyaan aati hain. Dekhna hai ke kaun se statements aur behaviors
zyada asar karte hain, aur kaun se aise hain jo B ko trance se bahar le aate hain. C ek
"meta-person" ban kar sab ka khayal rakhe ga. Agar aap C hain aur hypnotist bohat tez bol
raha hai, to usay haath se signal de kar "slow down" karne ko kaho. Agar awaaz bohat tez
ya irritating lage to signal do ke awaaz dheemi karo.
Jab aap A ho, trance induce karne ke baad, B ko general instructions do seekhne ke liye aur
phir trance se wapas aane ke liye. Jab aapko Barb jaisi ache trance responses mil jayein, to
bas baitho, gehri saans lo, muskuraho aur apne aap ko mentally shabaashi do. Apne
observer ko dekho aur ek halka sa cue do ke trance achieve ho gaya hai. Phir apni saanson
ko B ke saanson ke saath match karo aur jab bolo, apni awaaz ki speed uske saanson ke
tempo ke mutabiq rakho.

“Aur enjoy karo… woh khaas experiences jo tumhara unconscious mind is waqt tumhe de
sakta hai… ek ajeeb o gareeb aur adventure ka ehsaas… jab tum naye states of
consciousness mein dakhil hotay ho… is experience se tumhe apne capabilities aur
flexibility ka yaqeen milta hai… ek insaan hone ke nate…”

Phir poori tareeqe se, gehrai se, dheemi awaz mein, tumhara unconscious dheere dheere
tumhe wapas is halat mein laa sakta hai, tumhe taazgi aur nayi tazgi ka ehsaas dilata hai.
Main tawajjo doonga. Agar kabhi tum meri madad chaho wapas aane mein, haath hilao.”

Phir bas baitho aur dekho. Yeh behtareen moka hai apni perceptions ko train karne ka ke
tum samajh sako ke kisi shakhs mein trance jaane aur wapas aane ke dauran kya
tabdeeliyaan hoti hain. Agar haath hilao to uski saanson ko match karte hue bolo, “Main
dheere dheere 10 se 1 tak reverse counting kar raha hoon. Jab main ‘1’ par pahunchoon,
tumhari aankhen khul jayengi aur tum apne aap ko taaza aur poori tarah maujood mehsoos
karoge.”

Phir uske saanson ke tempo par reverse counting karo jab tak 1 tak na pahuncho.

Feedback ke liye kuch minute lo. B A ko bata sakta hai ke induction mein kya khas
madadgar tha ya kya cheez disturb kar rahi thi. C apni observations share karega, khaas tor
par A ke suggestions aur B ke responses ke darmiyan rishton ko.

Yeh A ke liye bohat faida mand feedback hoga. Feedback ke baad positions switch karo aur
B aur C ko bhi induction try karne ka moka do.

To A pehle trance induce kare, phir general learning instructions de, aur aakhir mein trance
se wapas aane ke instructions de.

Shuru karo.

Yaar, bas yehi samajh lo ke jab koi trance induction ke dauran ajeeb harkatein karne lagay
— jaise Lynn ki left hand ka thartharna — to tumhara kaam ye hai ke uss response ko ignore
mat karo, balki turant accept karo. Kuch is tarah se:​
“Ji haan, aap abhi bhi ye khas experiences aur un se judi body sensations mehsoos kar rahi
hain.”

Yeh baat us bande ko yeh signal deti hai ke tum uski har harkat dekh rahe ho aur uska
ehtaram kar rahe ho, bhale hi tumhe khud samajh na aaye ke woh kya signify kar rahi hai.

Isko “organ language” kehte hain — jab koi ajeeb ya unclear physical reaction hoti hai jiska
matlab samajh nahi aata, magar wo clearly kisi gehri cheez ki nishani hoti hai.
Phir tum isko thoda therapeutic bana sakte ho, jaise:​
“Jab bhi aap ye harkatein karti hain, aap trance mein aur gehri utar rahi hoti hain.”

Is pe do reactions aate hain: ya to shakiness aur badh jaati hai aur trance aur gehra ho jaata
hai, ya shakiness band ho jaati hai.

Aur agar tum chaho, to is shaking ko ek entry point bana ke kuch purani ya zakhmi yaadein
samajhne ka kaam bhi karwa sakte ho, jaise:​
“Ye harkatein, jo aap kar rahi hain, aapko gehri trance mein le jaa rahi hain jahan aap apne
guzre hue tajurbe ko araam se dekh sakti hain, samajh sakti hain, aur un se seekh sakti
hain.”

Ab agar banda trance se wapas nahi aata, to iska matlab hai ke tumhara rapport toot gaya.
Phir se rapport banane ke liye uski saanson ko pace karo, phir usse bologe ke woh apne
ache jazbaat jama kare, jo usne experience kiye hain, takay jab woh wapas aaye to woh un
jazbaat ko saath la sake.

Phir dheere dheere 10 se 1 tak count karo, saanson ke har doosre cycle pe ek number bolo,
aur batao ke jab woh 1 tak pahunche to uski aankhein khul jayengi aur woh ek nayi tazgi
mehsoos karegi.

Bas itna hi kaam hai — it’s about acknowledging what the body is doing, validating it, aur
gently guide karna trance ke andar aur bahar.

Thoda waqt lo feedback ke liye jab tum complete kar lo. B, A ko induction ke kisi bhi aise
pehlu ke baare mein bata sakta hai jo khaas taur pe madadgar tha, ya koi cheez jo B ko
distract kiya ya altered state banane mein rukawat bani. C bhi apni observation de sakti hai
jo usne bahar se dekha, khaas taur pe A ke suggestions aur B ke reactions ke darmiyan
rishton ke baare mein. Yeh feedback A ke liye bohot faidemand hoga. Feedback ke baad,
positions switch karo aur dono B aur C ko induction try karne ka mauqa do.

Toh A pehle trance induce karega, phir general learning instructions dega, aur akhir mein
trance se bahar aane ke instructions dega. Shuru karo.

Mard: Mere paas ek sawaal hai. Jab mein Lynn ko trance mein le ja raha tha, uske left haath
mein bohot shaky movement dikhayi di. Baad mein usne bataya ke yeh uske cheek ke nerve
center se related hai jahan pe pehle cyst ke liye operation hua tha, aur wahan ab bhi nerve
damage hai. Lekin us waqt mujhe bilkul andaza nahi tha ke is se kya karna chahiye.

Jab koi unexpected cheez hoti hai jo tum induction ke dauran suggest nahi karte, toh sabse
kam reaction yeh hai ke usko turant verbally include karo: "Haan, aur tum continue karte ho
woh specific experiences aur jism ke sensations ke saath." Is se response validate hota hai
aur shakhs ko yakeen hota hai ke tum un signals ko samajh rahe ho jo wo de raha hai,
chahe tumhe unka matlab na samajh aaye.

"Organ language" ek aur zabardast technique hai jo mein kisi bhi significant phenomenon ke
saath use karta hoon. Jab kuch unusual ho raha ho lekin mujhe samajh nahi aaye ke woh
kya hai.
"Ab, pehli dafa jab koi shakhs altered state mein jata hai, toh woh thoda hil jata hai... Lekin
aksar unke liye yeh madadgar hota hai... ke woh us problem ke us hisse ko samajh saken jo
iss syndrome se juda hota hai... jise woh asaani se samajh saken."

Maine body ke kisi hissa aur us activity ki taraf chaar ya paanch ishare diye hain. Agar
trance ke dauran conscious mind thoda active ho, toh woh ishare samajh nahi paata, lekin
unconscious mind samajh jaata hai aur isko validation samajhta hai.

Jo do tareeqay maine abhi diye, woh response ko incorporate karne aur validate karne ke
tareeqe hain. Mera matlab hai, "Theek hai, mein samajhta hoon tum kya kar rahe ho, aur
yeh bilkul theek hai ke tum aise hi karte raho." Yeh response aam tor pe kafi hota hai.

Ek thoda zyada powerful method yeh hai ke bolo, "... aur har aisi movement ke saath tum
trance mein aur gehra jao ge."

Phir aam tor pe do cheezein hoti hain: ya toh woh trance mein bohot gehra chala jata hai, ya
phir shaking ruk jati hai.

Tum shaking ko access point ke taur pe bhi istemal kar sakte ho therapeutic kaam ke liye.
"Woh khaas experiences jo tumhare haath ke dramatic movements se judi hain, ab tumhare
liye available hongi... sirf tab jab tum trance ke kaafi gehre state mein jaoge... takay tum un
experiences ko apne past se pehchan sako... jo shayad tab negative impact rakhti thi...
magar ab tum araam ke saath samajh sako... ke yeh kuch aisa hai jo tum survive kar chuke
ho... aur un experiences ka dobara review karte hue tum seekh sako... ke apne aap ko
present aur future mein kaise protect karna hai... apne experiences se seekhna... jo tumhare
resources ka bunyadi hisa hai."

Bas yeh sab “fluff” hai, matlab ke koi asli content nahi hai. Magar iska matlab yeh hai ke tum
un experiences ke saath kuch karo taake unse kuch seekh sako — ek tarah ka meaningful
communication hai.

Aurat: Agar banda trance se wapas na aaye toh kya karna chahiye?

Agar tum usse wapas aane ko kaho aur wo na aaye, iska matlab hai ke tumhara rapport toot
gaya hai. Toh phir tumhe rapport wapas banana hoga. Shuru mein uski saans ke saath pace
karna shuru karo. Phir usse kaho ke apne is experience ke tamam “positive aur enjoyable
pehlu” ikatha kar le taake wo apne saath le aaye jab wo kuch der mein wapas aaye. Phir
dhire dhire 10 se 1 tak countdown karo, har doosri saans par ek number kaho. Is se rapport
ensure hota hai.

Phir instructions do ke jab tum “one” tak pohoncho, uski aankhen flutter kar ke khulengi,
control uske conscious mind ko mil jayega, aur wo apne experience par hairaan aur khush
hogi.
Aurat: Mere kuch clients aise hote hain jo physiological sleep mein chalay jate hain. Maine
socha ke unconscious abhi bhi sun raha hoga, magar mujhe yaqeen nahi hai. Mujhe uska
koi response nahi milta.

Theek hai. Sabse pehle, mein tumhari baat nahi maanta ke unka koi response nahi hai. Tum
apne learning ke liye kuch simple nonverbal tareeqay use karo taake pata chale ke wo
responsive hain ya nahi.

Sabse asaan tareeqa yeh hai ke itna qareeb jao ke wo tumhari saans sun saken, aur phir
unke saath kuch minutes tak saans milao. Mujhe umeed hai ke tum itni internal flexibility
rakhte ho ke khud na so jao.

Apne aap ko instruction do ke tum unki saans ko copy karoge, aur chahe yeh saans
physiological sleep ke saath judi ho, tum apni alertness maintain rakhoge.

Ek do minute baad apni saans ka pattern thoda badlo, aur dekhna chahiye ke wo usko
follow karte hain.

Tum bina soye rapport tabhi bana sakte ho jab apna haath unke shoulders par rakh kar unki
saans ke rhythm ke mutabiq pressure badlo. Jab wo saans chhorte hain pressure badhao,
aur jab saans lete hain pressure kam karo.

Isko “cross-over pacing” kehte hain kyunki tum ek sensory channel ke saath pace kar rahe
ho jo unki breathing se alag hai.

Do-teen minute yeh karo, phir apni pressure pattern thodi badlo aur dekho kya unki saans
tumhare pressure ke mutabiq chalti hai ya nahi.

Aurat: Agar wo follow na karen?

Agar wo follow nahi karte, toh iska matlab hai wo physiological sleep mein hain, aur tumhe
rapport banane mein zyada waqt lagana padega. Yeh possible hai, magar zyada patience
chahiye.

Humne ek technique banayi thi jise humne "sleep therapy" kaha jab hum mental hospital
mein kaam kar rahe the jahan staff apne patients ke saath 24 ghante connected rehte the.
Hum wahan kai dafa gaye the, aur yeh hamari teesri visit thi. Staff bohot khush tha hamare
patterns se jo unko zyada tar patients ke saath acha response de rahe the, magar anorexics
ke saath masla tha.

Anorexics wo log hote hain jo apne aap ko bohot mota samajhte hain, jab ke asal mein wo
itne patle hote hain ke unki sehat khatra mein hoti hai.

Ek cheez jo humne staff ko anorexics ke liye suggest ki, aur jisne un unresponsive patients
ke last barrier ko tod diya, wo "sleep therapy" thi. Agar tum kisi ke saath rehte ho jise yeh
acceptable hai, toh tum bhi try kar sakte ho.
Jab wo so rahi ho, uske paas jao aur jo do tareeqay maine pehle bataye the (breathing se ya
pressure ke zariye rapport banana) unmein se koi use karo. Uske saath 3-4 minute saans
milao taake rapport bane. Kyun ke wo bohot gehri altered state mein hai, rapport banane
mein waqt lagega. Agar saans milana mushkil ho, toh usko chhukar pressure variation se
bhi rapport bana sakte ho. Auditory rapport bhi bana sakte ho, jaise uske saans ke saath
halka gaana ya humming karna. Jo bhi repetitive pattern tum apne output mein control kar
sakte ho, use uske breathing cycle ke saath match karo.

Phir bohat dheere aur ehtiyaat se apne action mein thoda bohot tabdeeli karo, taake pata
chale ke kya tum usko lead kar sakte ho. Apni saans ka pattern zyada change mat karo,
kyun ke kisi ki neend aur uske qayam hone ka sabab hota hai uski saans ka consistent
pattern. Agar tum usko jagana nahi chahte, toh uski saans mein bade tabdeeli karna theek
nahi.

Phir tum finger signals set karoge—jo kal hum sikhaenge. Jaise, "Jab tum gehri neend mein
ho aur puri tarah aaraam mein ho, toh main tumse kuch sawalat karunga aur tum haan ke
liye ek ungli uthao gi, aur nahi ke liye doosri ungli."

Woh shakhs bohat gehri altered state mein hota hai jahan uske normal conscious resources
available nahi hote, isliye wo tumhari raah mein nahi hota.

Ab tum directly yes/no signals se information le sakte ho, ya usko naye behaviors suggest
kar sakte ho. Yeh sara kaam tum us state mein uski neend interrupt kiye bina kar sakte ho.

Aurat: Agar meri saans badalne par uski saans nahi badli, kya iska matlab hai wo waqai
physiological sleep mein hai?

Nahi. Tum un logon ke saath bhi rapport bana sakte ho jo physiological sleep mein hain.
Farq yeh hai ke tumhe unka peecha zyada waqt tak karna padega pehle, uske baad hi lead
karne ki koshish karo. Agar tum lead karne ki koshish karo aur response na mile, toh samjho
ke tumne unke saath kaafi waqt tak pace nahi kiya; wapas jao aur zyada der tak pace karo.

Jo log so rahe hote hain, wo respond karte hain, magar dheere aur kam zahir tareeqe se.
Yeh wahi baat hai jo anesthetic sleep ke dauran bhi hoti hai — bohot doctors samajhte hain
ke operation ke waqt patients bilkul out hote hain, magar yeh sach nahi. Log anesthesia ke
dauran post-hypnotic suggestions bohot tezi se accept kar lete hain, zyada tar dusre
tareeqon se zyada. Sirf isliye ke unki aankhen band hain aur conscious mind off hai, iska
matlab yeh nahi ke unki ears kaam nahi kar rahi.

Ek dafa mein ek aurat ke saath kaam kar raha tha jo bohot wild aur rowdy zindagi guzar rahi
thi. Uske kuch kaam uske liye destructive the, isliye mein usse badalne ki koshish kar raha
tha. Kaafi waqt kaam karne ke baad bhi uska behaviour samajh nahi aaya. Aakhir mein usse
kaha — bohot zor se — "Dekho, tumhein apni wild zindagi bilkul rokni hogi. Yeh tumhare liye
kuch faida mand nahi hai, bas time zaya kar rahi ho. Aur tumhe yeh kyu karna padta hai?"
Jab mein ne yeh kaha, toh uske naak ke nostrils bohot clearly flare hue, aur usne kaha, "Oh,
mujhe sach mein chakkar aa rahe hain!"

Maine poocha, "Kya smell kar rahi ho?"

Usne phir se sniff kiya aur kaha, "Hospital jaisa smell aa raha hai."

Maine poocha, "Hospital mein kya?"

Usne jawab diya, "Tumhe woh ether ki smell pata hai?"

Pata chala ke kuch arsa pehle uska operation hua tha, jisme wo anesthetized thi. Doctor ne
socha ke wo wahan nahi hai, isliye freely baat ki. Doctor ne uske andar ke organs dekhe aur
kaha, "Bahut kharab lag raha hai. Mujhe nahi lagta wo zyada der tak jiyegi."

Lekin wo zinda rahi. Kabhi kabhi ghalat hona acha hota hai!

Magar kisi tarah usne yeh samjha ke doctor ka matlab yeh tha ke operation ke baad wo
zinda nahi rahegi, na ke operation ke dauran survive karegi. Yeh statement ambiguous tha;
doctor ne yeh specify nahi kiya ke "Agar tum operation survive kar jaogi, toh sab theek ho
jayega." Is baat ka matlab uske dimaag mein clear nahi hua; wo sirf react kar gayi.

Wo operation ke baad is soch ke saath bahar aayi ke wo zyada din tak zinda nahi rahegi,
isliye uske liye yeh concern nahi tha ke wo apni zindagi mein khud ko nuksan pahuncha rahi
hai.

Martha: Jab humne exercise ki, aur mein trance mein ja rahi thi, toh mera ek hissa soch raha
tha, "Kya mein waqai trance mein hoon?"

Bilkul theek. Ab hum baat kar rahe hain us interesting area ki jise "convincers" kehte hain. Jo
cheez Martha ko hypnosis ka experience believe karayegi, wo Bill ya kisi aur ke liye alag
hogi.

Martha ka partner: Mujhe is baat mein curiosity hai. Uski aankhen phaili aur band ho gayi,
magar baad mein usne kaha ke uska andar hi andar ek dialogue chal raha tha. Toh yeh
somnambulistic trance nahi hai na?

Logon ka somnambulistic trance ke baare mein alag samajh hota hai. Aisi koi universal
definition mujhe nahi pata jo sab par apply ho.

Aksar log is waqt trance mein hone ka convinced tab hote hain jab unka experience unke
normal state se bohot different ho. Kisi ke liye jo unka normal state hai, dusre ke liye wo
trance ho sakta hai.

Jis shakhs ki consciousness kinesthetic sensory modality mein specialized ho, uske liye
convincer shayad vivid, colorful aur stabilized visual images hongi. Aur jis shakhs ko tees
saal se body sensation ka experience nahi mila, wo detailed aur strong kinesthetic
sensations ko trance ka proof mante hain.
Mard: Maine suna ke agar koi somnambulistic trance mein gaya ho, toh usko us trance ka
koi conscious memory nahi hoti?

Bilkul. Jab aap kisi ki consciousness ko itni radically alter karte hain, jab wo wapas aata hai
toh audience mein koi poochta hai, "Kya tum trance mein thi?" Wo kehti hai, "Nahi! Mujhe
poora pata tha kya ho raha tha."

Phir agar aap koi specific kaam ka zikr karte ho jo usne trance mein kiya, wo kehti hai,
"Maine wo nahi kiya! Tum mazak kar rahe ho!"

Matlab, usko trance experience ke ek bada hissa puri tarah yaad nahi hota.

Aise shakhs ko satisfy karne ke liye ke wo trance mein thi, mein aksar post-hypnotic
suggestion set karta hoon jo kinesthetic cue se trigger hota hai. Misal ke taur pe, ek shoe
utarna. Is se usko pata chalta hai ke kuch hua hai jiska uske paas koi logical explanation
nahi.

Tum pehle se yeh bhi jaan sakte ho ke kisi ke liye trance ka "complex equivalence" kya hai:
wo specific sensory experience jo usko convince kare ke wo trance mein thi. Phir tum us
experience ko us shakhs ke liye develop kar sakte ho.

Asal mein, personal change ke liye yeh zaroori nahi ke shakhs ko yaqeen ho ke wo trance
mein thi ya nahi. Agar tum altered state achieve kar ke us shakhs ki madad kar sako ke wo
change la sake, bas yeh kaafi hai.

Jab tum hypnosis ko achi tarah seekh loge, tumhein kabhi "official" trance inductions karne
ki zarurat nahi padegi jo tumhare clients pehle recognize kar saken. Tum naturally altered
states induce kar paoge, aur bina shakhs ko pata chale ke hypnosis hua hai, tum un states
ka istemal kar ke changes la sakoge.

Anchoring Trance Stales

Un logon ke liye jo “anchoring” ka matlab nahi jaante, thoda idea dena chahte hain ke yeh
kya hota hai aur tum kaise use kar sakte ho. Anchoring ka tafseeli zikr hamari kitab Frogs
into Princes (Chapter II) mein hai, toh ab uska dobara bayan nahi karenge. Lekin hypnosis
ke hawale se anchoring pe baat karni zaroori hai.

Har experience mein kai components hote hain: visual (dekhne ka), auditory (sun-ne ka),
kinesthetic (jismani ehsaas), olfactory (bonghne ka), aur gustatory (chaatne ka). Anchoring
ka matlab hai ke kisi ek element se poora experience wapas yaad aa jata hai. Tum sab ne
kabhi aisa mehsoos kiya hoga ke sadak par chal rahe ho aur koi khushboo mehsoos ki, aur
achanak tum kisi aur jagah aur waqt mein chale gaye. Woh khushboo ek "reminder" ban
gayi kisi aur experience ki — yeh anchoring hai.

Couples ke paas aksar ek gaana hota hai jise wo "our song" kehte hain. Yeh bhi ek anchor
hai. Jab bhi wo gaana sunte hain, unko woh feelings yaad aati hain jo pehli dafa us gaane
ko “our song” kehne ke waqt mehsoos ki thi.
Tumhare jo inductions abhi kiye, unmein anchoring ka istemal hua. Jab tumne apne partner
ko uske pehle trance experience tak le jane mein madad ki, toh tum uske naturally set
anchors ka use kar rahe the. Agar tumne kaha ke apni body posture waisi hi lo jo trance
mein hoti thi, hypnotist ki awaaz suno, ya koi aur cheez jo trance se judi ho, toh tum naturally
existing anchors ka istemal kar rahe the.

Agar koi shakhs tumhe trance ka sensory experience bata sake, toh tum anchoring se us
state ko uske liye recreate kar sakte ho. Bas uske trance ke experience ko visual, auditory,
aur kinesthetic parts mein todna hota hai.

Sabse pehle visual se shuru karo. Pucho: "Agar tum gehri trance mein ho, toh tum doosron
ko kaise dikho gi? Yahan apne body se dikhao. Mein tumhara mirror karunga taake tum
apne aap ko feedback de sako, aur apne body ko adjust karo jab tak tumhein sahi lage." Jab
wo kahe ke sahi hai, toh use touch ya sound se anchor kar do.

Phir pata karo ke wo andar kya images banati hai, aur agar haan, to kis tarah ki. Agar uski
aankhen trance mein khuli hoti hain, toh pucho ke wo bahar kya dekh rahi hai. Jab wo iska
jawab dhoondhti hai, toh us state ko anchor kar do.

Phir tum feelings pe aate ho. Pucho, “Agar tum gehri trance mein ho, toh tum kaisa mehsoos
karogi? Tumhari saans kaisi hogi? Yahan apne aap ko dikhao kitna relaxed tum ho gi.” Jab
wo apni feelings dikhati hai, toh us state ko anchor kar do.

Ab baari hai auditory component ki jo “deep trance” ka hissa hai. Tum puch sakte ho ke kya
wo hypnotist ki awaaz mehsoos karegi, aur wo awaaz kaisi lagegi. Phir pata karo ke kya
uske andar koi dialogue ya awazein chal rahi hongi deep trance mein.

Jab tum systematically uske visual, kinesthetic, aur auditory trance ke experience ko cover
karte ho, dono andar aur bahar ke, toh tum har component ko anchor kar sakte ho—ya toh
ek hi anchor se ya alag alag anchors se. Agar alag anchors use karo har component ke liye,
toh baad mein un sab ko ek saath trigger kar ke usko “yaad” dilwa sakte ho ke trance kaisa
hota hai. Yeh anchoring ka ek aur tareeqa hai trance induce karne ka.

Is tareeqe se tum aisa experience bhi create kar sakte ho jo usne pehle kabhi mehsoos nahi
kiya. Bas us experience ke parts ko anchor kar do.

Jab tum trance induce kar loge, toh aise anchors set kar sakte ho ke tum jaldi se dubara
trance mein le ja sako jab chaaho. Jab mein hypnotic induction karta hoon, mein apni awaaz
ka tone, movement style, posture, aur facial expression badal deta hoon taake mera ek
behavior set trance ke saath associated ho, aur doosra normal conscious state ke saath.

Jab mein altered state induce kar leta hoon, toh phir mein apne trance behaviors shuru
karke jaldi se trance dobara induce kar leta hoon. Yeh behaviors unconscious signals ki
tarah kaam karte hain trance mein jane ke liye. Jo “reinduction signals” hypnotists use karte
hain, wo is tarah ki anchoring ka special case hain.

Achay communicators kai fields mein bina jaane yehi anchoring use kar rahe hote hain.
Sunday subah mein TV on kiya aur ek preacher ko dekha. Wo bohot zor se bol raha tha,
phir achanak bola, “Ab mein chahta hoon ke tum sab ruk jao, aur (dheemi awaaz mein) apni
aankhen band karo.”

Uski awaaz ka tone aur volume bilkul badal gaya, aur uske congregation ke log apni
aankhen band kar li. Wo behavior mein un logon jese thay jo meditate karte hain, gehri
trance mein hote hain, ya train, plane, bus mein baithay hote hain; ya car ke passengers,
jury members, group therapy ke patients, ya psychiatrists jo clients ke bolne ko note karte
hain.

Us preacher ne apni ek awaaz ka tone apni normal baat cheet ke saath pair kiya, aur doosra
tone us altered state (jise wo “prayer” kehta hai) ke saath. Wo apni us tone se apni puri
congregation ko jaldi se altered state mein le ja sakta tha.

Agar tum apni awaaz ka tone dheere dheere badalte ho jab tum dekhte ho koi altered state
mein ja raha hai, toh tumhari awaaz ka yeh badla hua tone us altered state ke saath pair ho
jata hai. Jab wo us state mein pohanchti hai jise tum maintain karna chahte ho, agar tum
apna woh badla hua tone continue rakhte ho, toh wo wahan rukne ki koshish karti hai.
Tumhari awaaz us altered state ka anchor ban jati hai.

Agar koi client tumhare office mein aata hai, aur tum usse turant trance induction karte ho
apni normal awaaz, posture, aur movement ke saath, toh agli dafa jab tum uske conscious
mind se baat karna chahoge, tumhein problem hogi. Kyun? Kyunki jo experience usne tum
aur tumhare office ka liya hai, wo uske liye ek “reminder” ban jayega trance mein jaane ka.
Toh agli baar jab wo tumhare office aayega, jab tum usse baithoge aur baat shuru karoge,
wo automatically trance mein chala jayega.

Meri hypnotist career ke shuruat mein mujhe yeh bohot problems dekhne ko mili ke clients
bina chahe trance mein chalay jate the jab mein sirf unse baat karna chahta tha. Mein apne
behavior mein abhi tak systematized distinction nahi karta tha. Agar tum distinctions nahi
banao, toh tumhara normal behavior bhi reinduction signal ban jayega, chahe tum chaaho
ya na chaaho.

Agar tum apne behavior mein farq karo jab tum unconscious level par baat karte ho aur jab
conscious level par baat karte ho, toh tumhe systematic choice milti hai ke tum chaho toh
uske conscious resources ko active rakh sakte ho ya nahi.

Agar tumhara private practice hai, toh do chairs use karo: ek trance state ke liye, aur doosri
jab tum uske conscious mind se communicate karna chahte ho. Jald hi sirf yeh indicate
karna ke kis chair par baithna hai, puri induction ka kaam karega.

Analogue Marking
Ek khaas tareeqa jo anchoring mein bohot kaam aata hai, jab tum hypnotic responses
chahte ho, usay kehte hain analogue marking. Is mein tum baat karte waqt kuch alfaz ko
nonverbal tareeqe se mark karte ho. Yeh mark tum apni awaaz ke tone, koi gesture, khas
expression, ya chhoo ke kar sakte ho.

Misal ke taur pe, mein tumse baat kar raha hoon un logon ke baare mein jo bohot araam se
relax ho jaate hain — jo apne aap ko situation ke saath comfort karne dete hain. Ya phir
mein tumhe apne ek dost ki kahani suna sakta hoon jo asaani se gehri trance mein chala
jaata hai.

Jab maine yeh kaha, “learn easily” aur “go into a deep trance,” toh maine apni awaaz ke
tone mein thoda farq kiya aur apne right haath se halka sa wave kiya. Yeh alag messages
hain jo tumhare unconscious mind ko signal dete hain aur wo us hisaab se react karta hai.

Ab maine relaxation aur trance ke lafzon ke saath ek khaas awaaz ka tone aur gesture
connect kar diya hai tum mein se bohot se logon ke liye. Bas ab mujhe woh tone zyada aur
zyada istemal karna hai, aur tumhara unconscious mind samajh jaayega ke kya karna hai.
Woh voice tone conscious mind ko bypass karta hai, is liye yeh "jao trance mein" kehne se
zyada effective hai.

Yeh sab anchoring hi hai. Jaise "relax" ek anchor hai—tumhari apni experience ki ek label.
Jab mein "relax" ka lafz kehta hoon, tumhein apni personal experiences ke fragments tak
jana padta hai us lafz ko samajhne ke liye. Aur jab tum comfort feel kar rahe hote ho, toh
mein us experience ko apni awaaz ke tone se connect karta hoon. Ab mera voice tone bhi
us response ka anchor ban jata hai.

Tum apne behavior ke kisi bhi pehlu ko is kaam mein laa sakte ho. Milton Erickson kabhi
kabhi apna sir daayein ya baayein move karta tha jab wo koi khaas baat mark karna chahta
tha. Ek hi awaaz alag jagah se aane pe thodi alag sunai deti hai. Yeh farq shayad conscious
mind ko mehsoos na ho, lekin unconscious mind zaroor mehsoos karta hai—chahe tumhari
aankhen band hon.

Analogue marking koi nayi cheez nahi hai. Tumhare clients already yeh karte hain, aur agar
tum unki baat suno ke wo kya mark kar rahe hain, toh tum bohot kuch seekh sakte ho. Jab
mein apni private practice chala raha tha, thodi der baad mujhe bore hone laga, toh maine
apne jaane-pehchaane psychiatrists ko ek letter bheja ke wo apne sabse ajeeb aur mushkil
clients mujhe refer karein. Unhone mujhe bohot dilchasp log bheje.

Ek psychiatrist ne mujhe ek aurat bheji jo raat ke beech pasine pasine ho kar hiltin rehti thi,
aur kisi ko samajh nahi aa pata tha ke masla kya hai. Wo bohot dar gayi thi kyunki yeh halat
bar bar hoti thi, aur wo saalon se therapy mein thi lekin symptoms mein koi behtari nahi aayi.
Uska psychiatrist usko dawaein deta tha taake symptoms control ho saken. Usne usko EEG
machine se bhi joda hua tha kai ghanton tak, taake jab yeh fits aayein toh wo measure kar
sake. Magar jab tak wo machine par thi, fits kabhi nahi aaye. Machine se utarne par fit aata,
phir dobara machine se jodne par fir kuch nahi hota tha.

Wo aurat bohot conservative thi aur shehar ke ameer ilaqe se thi. Jab wo meri office aayi toh
bohot daree hui thi, kyunki uske psychiatrist ne usko bataya tha ke mein ajeeb insan hoon jo
ajeeb kaam karta hai. Lekin wo bohot badalna chahti thi, isliye phir bhi mere paas aayi.
Wo meri office mein baithi thi, bohot sharmili si lag rahi thi jab mein andar aaya. Mein baitha,
seedha uski taraf dekha aur kaha, "Tum bohot der se therapy mein ho. Tumhara conscious
mind clearly iss masle ko solve nahi kar saka, aur tumhare therapists ke conscious minds
bhi fail ho gaye hain. Mein chahta hoon sirf tumhara unconscious mind mujhe wo sab bataye
jo mujhe tumhein badalne ke liye chahiye—na zyada, na kam—aur mein nahi chahta
tumhara conscious mind interfere kare. Ab baat karna shuru karo!"

Yeh ajeeb instructions hain na? Mujhe pata nahi tha ke wo is level par iska jawab de payegi
ya nahi, lekin usne bohot interesting jawab diya. Wo meri taraf dekhi aur boli, "Mujhe nahi
pata. Mein raat ko apne kamre mein baithi hoti hoon, light band karti hoon, apne bistar par
let jati hoon... aur tum jante ho, yeh bohot shocking hai kyunki mein saalon se treatment
mein hoon, phir bhi mein dar ke mare jag jaati hoon aur pasine mein doobi hoti hoon."

Agar tum is communication ko dhyan se suno, toh yeh bilkul seedha hai. Usne jo lafz mark
kiye wo “electric shock treatment” hain. Yeh mujhe woh maloomat de gaye jo mein chahta
tha. Uska present psychiatrist shayad nahi jaanta tha, lekin uske pehle psychiatrist ne usko
electric shock treatment diya tha.

Uske shohar ko kuch waqt pehle amiri mili aur usne usko us mohalle se nikal kar, jahan wo
apno ke beech rehti thi aur maza leti thi, ek bahut mehngi aur akeli hilltop house mein shift
kar diya — jahan aur koi insaan nahi tha. Phir wo apne kaam par chala gaya aur usko akela
chhod diya.

Wo bore ho gayi aur tanha thi, toh apne aap ko entertain karne ke liye din bhar khwabon
mein kho jaati thi. Uska psychiatrist tha, jo “janta” tha ke din bhar khwab dekhna matlab hai
“real se bhaagna,” aur bhaagna bura hai. Toh us psychiatrist ne use electric shock treatment
di taake wo apne khwabon se bhaag jaye.

Jab bhi wo daydream karna shuru karti, uska shohar usse car mein bitha kar hospital le
jaata, jahan doctors usko electric shock machine se jod kar zapt karte. Yeh process 25
martaba hua, aur 25 baar ke baad wo din ke khwabon mein khojna chhor gayi.

Lekin raat ko wo phir bhi sapne dekhti thi. Wo koshish karti ke sapne na dekhe, lekin jaise hi
sapne dekhna shuru karti, usko electric shock ka ehsas hone lagta. Yeh ek anchored
response ban chuka tha—uske jism ki har physiological indication us shock ko confirm karti
thi.

Jab mein school mein tha, isko classical conditioning kehte the. Lekin uske psychiatrist ko
classical conditioning par yaqeen nahi tha, isliye wo is baat ko samajhne se qasir raha.

Yeh ek misaal hai ache irade wali psychotherapy ki, jisme masla paida ho gaya. Jo log usko
electric shock dete the, wo sach mein sochte the ke wo uski madad kar rahe hain. Unka yeh
yaqeen tha ke din bhar khwab dekhna real se bhaagna hai aur bura hai. Toh wo uski
fantasies ko kisi constructive raah par guide karne ke bajaye, us par electric shock treatment
use karte rahe.
 Exercise 5
Main chahta hoon ke aap sab analogue marking ki practice karen taake aap kisi doosre se
response hasil kar saken. Aap sab jode banayein aur pehle apne partner se koi aisa
observable response chunein jo aap hasil karna chahte hain. Kuch simple chunein, jaise ke
uski naak khujlana, taangen seedhi karna, khara hona, ya aap ke liye coffee lana—jo bhi
aap chahen. Phir usse kisi bhi topic par baat shuru karen, aur apne conversation mein us
response ke liye instructions chhupa dein. Aap ye instructions ek lafz ya jumla ek waqt mein
de sakte hain, unhein apni awaaz ke tone ya kisi gesture se mark karte hue, taake aapka
partner in signals ko ek message samajh kar respond kar sake.

Dekhiye, hypnosis ke bare mein jo hum ab tak jaan chuke hain, woh sirf surface tak hai, aur
koi nahi jaanta ke agla kya seekhenge. Umeed hai yeh ek uplifting tajurba hoga. Lekin un
logon ko taali deni chahiye jo in possibilities ka samna kar rahe hain... Abhi is kamre mein
kai log apne haath apne chehre par utha rahe hain aur apni naak khujla rahe hain. Yeh itna
hi simple ho sakta hai.

Aksar jab aap hypnosis karte hain, toh doosre shaks se jo responses aap chahenge, woh
itne obvious nahi hote jitne main aapko is exercise ke liye suggest kar raha hoon. Filhaal,
main chahta hoon ke aap aisi cheez chunein jo itni obvious ho ke aap asaani se jaan saken
ke woh hui hai ya nahi.

Agar aapka partner jaanta hai ke aap kya response chahtay hain, toh ho sakta hai ke wo
apni conscious movement ke andar woh movement shamil kar de jo aap chahte hain. Yeh
bhi theek hai. Bas yeh dekhein ke aapko apni desired response mil rahi hai ya nahi. Agar
nahi milti, toh apni baat mein phir se instructions chhupa dein aur unhein mark karte hue
dubara samjhaein.

Discussion: Negative Commands

and Polarities
Michael: Kisi ko koi suggestion dene ke baad kaise aap gracefully verify kar sakte hain ke
wo us suggestion ko maan raha hai, khas taur pe jab aap chahte hain ke wo koi burra aadat
chhor de? Misaal ke taur pe, agar koi aap se baar baar takraata hai, aur aap use kehte hain
"Phir mat karo."

Agar aap seedha "Phir mat karo" kahenge, toh wo shaks shayad aur bhi karega, kyun ke
aap ne usko mana kiya hai, aur aise negative suggestion ka asar aksar ulta hota hai. Jaise
agar aap kahen "Neela sochna mat," toh wo insan neela soch hi lega.

Michael: Theek hai. Agar aap kahen, "Tum phir mujhe interrupt nahi karoge."
Phir bhi wo interrupt kar sakta hai, kyun ke aap usko indirectly ek hypnotic command de
rahe hain ke wo interrupt kare. Agar aap bolen "Jaao!", toh wo ja sakta hai, aur aapko turant
test mil jayega—ya toh wo chala jayega ya nahi.

Michael: Agar aap suggestion ko is tarah se phrasing kar saken ke koi problem na
ho—matlab suggestion sahi tarah se diya jaye—

Ji haan. Agar aap suggestion ko theek tarah phrased karte hain, toh ya toh wo us par amal
karega ya nahi. Agar aapko ye pata nahi chal sakta ke wo kar raha hai ya nahi, toh aapke
paas context mein pata karne ka tareeqa nahi hoga. Jaise agar aap kahen "Achha mehsoos
karo," toh aap sirf uske chhupay huay subtle reactions se hi jaan paenge.

Agar mein aapki jagah hota, toh mein apne aap ko explicitly yeh sikhaata ke cheezen
positive tareeqe se boloon, kyun ke aapne abhi abhi teen negative suggestions diye hain. Jo
bhi main janta hoon, koi bhi communication mein zyada takleef negation se hoti hai.
Negation sirf language mein hoti hai, experience mein nahi.

Misaal ke taur pe, aap kaise experience karte hain yeh jumla: "Kutta billi ka peecha nahi kar
raha."

Mard: Maine kutta billi ka peecha karta dekha, phir picture ke upar bada kala "X" laga hua
tha.

Aurat: Maine kutta billi ka peecha karta dekha, phir wo dono ruk gaye aur khade ho gaye.

Bilkul. Aapko pehle us cheez ko represent karna hota hai jise negate kiya ja raha hai. Agar
mein aapki jagah hota, Michael, toh mein ek hafta lagata sirf positive phrasing seekhne
mein, bina kisi negation ke. Seekhein ke aap kya chahte hain, na ke kya nahi chahte.

Aksar clients un cheezon ki list lekar aate hain jo wo nahi chahte, aur wo apne aas paas
sabko yehi batate hain ke unhe kya pasand nahi. Is se unke dost aur log unke aas paas
unpleasant aur dissatisfaction wali reactions dete hain. Jaise "Ab mein nahi chahta ke tum
naraz ho jao jo mein tumhe batane jaa raha hoon." "Billy ne jo kiya us par gussa mat hona."

Bilkul, aap yeh pattern useful outcomes ke liye bhi use kar sakte hain.

Jaise "Zyada comfortable mat ho jao." "Mein tumse relax hone ko nahi keh raha."

Negation khaas taur par effective hoti hai un logon ke liye jinke paas hum 'polarity response'
kehte hain. Polarity response ka matlab hota hai opposite reaction. Agar mein David se
kahoon "Tum zyada relaxed ho rahe ho," aur wo tight ho jaye, toh yeh polarity response hai.

Michael: Kisi ko koi suggestion dene ke baad uske amal ka verification kaise aap shistagi se
kar sakte hain? Maan lijiye koi aapko baar baar takraata hai, aur aap usse kehte hain, "Phir
mat karo."

Agar aap seedha "Phir mat karo" kahenge, toh wo shaks bar bar karega, kyun ke jab aap
kisi cheez ke saath 'na' lagate hain, toh dimag us cheez ko aur zyada focus karta hai. Jaise
agar aap kahen, "Neela sochna mat," toh wo insan neela soch hi lega.
Michael: Theek hai. "Tum mujhe phir interrupt nahi karoge."

Lekin wo phir bhi interrupt kar sakta hai. Aap usko ek hypnotic command de rahe hain jo
usko waisa karne pe majboor karta hai. Agar aap kahen "Chalo jao," toh wo shayad chale
jayega, aur aapko turant pata chal jayega ke wo gaya ya nahi.

Michael: Agar mein yeh maan loon ke aap suggestion ko theek tarah phrased kar lete hain—

Ji haan, agar suggestion sahi hai, toh ya toh wo us par amal karega ya nahi. Agar aap koi
cheez detect nahi kar sakte, jaise agar aap kahen "Achha mehsoos karo," toh sirf subtle
body language ya reactions dekh ke hi pata chalega.

Agar mein aapki jagah hota, toh apne aap ko explicitly yeh sikhata ke baatein hamesha
positive tarike se phrased karo. Aapne abhi abhi teen negative suggestions diye hain.
Negation sirf zubaan mein hoti hai, asal zindagi mein nahi.

Misaal ke taur pe, "Kutta billi ka peecha nahi kar raha."

Mard: Maine kutta billi ka peecha karta dekha, phir picture ke upar kala 'X' laga hua tha.

Aurat: Maine kutta billi ka peecha karta dekha, phir wo dono ruk gaye.

Bilkul sahi. Aapko pehle us cheez ko sochna padta hai jo negate ki ja rahi hai. Agar mein
aapki jagah hota, Michael, toh ek hafta positive baatein karne ki practice karta, bina kisi
nafrat ya mana karne ke lafz ke.

Aksar clients un cheezon ki list leke aate hain jo wo nahi chahte, aur wo apne aas paas
sabko yehi batate hain. Isse unke doston ya logon ka reaction negative ya unpleasant hota
hai.

Jaise, "Ab mein nahi chahta ke tum naraz ho jao jo mein tumhe bataunga." Ya, "Billy ne jo
kiya us par gussa mat hona."

Lekin isi tareeqe ko aap useful cheezon ke liye bhi istemal kar sakte hain.

"Zyada aaram se mat betho." "Main tumse relax hone ko nahi kahunga."

Negation (na karna) un logon ke saath bohat asar karta hai jin ke paas hum "polarity
response" kehte hain. Polarity response ka matlab hai ulta reaction dena. Agar main David
se kahun, "Tum zyada relaxed ho rahe ho," aur wo tight ho jaye, to yeh polarity response
hai.

Kabhi log isay "resistance" kehte hain aur samajhte hain ke aise clients ke saath kaam nahi
ho sakta. Lekin polarity response walay log bohat zyada responsive hote hain; bas unka
response aapke instructions ke opposite hota hai. Bas mujhe unse yeh kehna hota hai ke wo
wo sab na karein jo main chahta hoon ke wo karein. Wo polarity response mein phans jaate
hain aur wo sab karte hain. "Tum meri awaaz sun rahe ho, aur main nahi chahta ke tum apni
aankhen band karo." "Main nahi chahta ke tumhe comfort aur relaxation ka ehsaas ho." Is
tarah negative commands bohat kaam ki hoti hain.
Polarity handle karne ka dusra tareeqa tag questions use karna hai. "Tum relax hona shuru
kar rahe ho, hai na?" Tag question ek negation hoti hai jo sentence ke aakhir mein question
ki shakal mein jor di jaati hai. "Yeh baat samajh mein aati hai, hai na?" "Tum tag questions
ke baare mein seekhna chahte ho, hain na?"

Charles: Kaise pata lagay ke kisi ke paas polarity response hai ya nahi?

Is tarah socho, Charles. Agar koi information process kar raha ho aur polarity response ho,
to aap uske chehre par expressions ke radical changes dekh sakte ho. Agar koi apne aap ko
kuch karte hue imagine karta hai aur phir kehta hai ke yeh acha idea nahi hai, to aap radical
shifts dekhoge jab wo internally ek content se dusre mein switch kare. Yeh radical shifts
normal expressions ke transitions se mukhtalif hotay hain. Yeh mera main tareeqa hai pata
lagane ka.

Dusra tareeqa yeh hai ke behavior mein bohat saare ulte reactions milenge. Classic
example wo shakhs hai jo kehta hai "Haan, lekin..." Pehle wo agree karta hai, phir disagree.
Aur bhi tareeqay hain pata lagane ke liye. Ek tareeqa hai ke kisi ko direct suggestion do. Kisi
ko dekho aur kaho "blink" aur dekho ke wo turant blink karta hai, blink karna rok deta hai, ya
bas wahan baitha rehta hai. Yeh teenon alag alag responses hain direct command ke liye.

Aap ek statement bhi dekh sakte ho aur phir usi statement ko negation ke saath dobara
pesh karo aur dekho kya uska response ulta hota hai. "Tum samajh sakte ho." "Nahi, shayad
tum samajh nahi sakte." Agar dono sentences par na ho, to samajh jao ke uska response
sentence ke content se mutaliq nahi hai.

Main ne negation aur tag questions ke baare mein baat ki. Agar aap embedded commands
bhi use karo to asar aur badh jata hai. Misal ke taur par, "Aur main nahi chahta ke tum zyada
relaxed ho jao jab tum meri awaaz sunte ho." Agar main apni awaaz ka tempo, pitch, ya
timbre badaloon jab main kahoon "Become more relaxed," to wo instruction analogically
mark ho jata hai unconscious level par.

Aap embedded commands negation ke saath ya bina negation ke use kar sakte ho. "Jab
tum wahan baithay ho to tum relax hona shuru kar sakte ho... Apni aankhen band mat karo
jab tak tumhara unconscious mind tumhe tumhari purani koi khushi bhari yaad yaad dilane
na de jab tum zyada comfortable nahi the." Agar aap analogically instructions ko mark karo
jo kisi ko follow karne hain, to aap bohat asar daar tareeqa se effect kar sakte ho.
CHAPTER III: Advanced Inductions

Leverage Inductions and Pattern

Interruption

Ab main chahta hoon ke tumhare induction techniques ke collection mein kuch aur options
add karoon.​
Al, kya main tumhara haath thodi dair ke liye le sakta hoon?​
(Al ka haath uthata hai, kalai se pakad ke halka sa hilaata hai jab tak woh khud uthay rehne
lagta hai. Jab yeh kar raha hota hai, bol bhi raha hota hai.)

"Ab jo main chahta hoon — agar yeh tumhare liye theek ho —​

yeh hai ke tum sirf itna karo ke yeh haath dheerey dheerey neeche girta jaye,​
us raftar se tez nahi jis raftar se tum...​
ek araam-deh jagah... aur waqt dhoondh sako...​
tumhare guzray hue waqt mein...​
jab tum khud se door chale gaye thay...​
aur khud ko aik lamhay ke liye taaza mehsoos kiya tha...​
toh tumhara haath... dheerey dheerey neeche jaye...​
us raftar se tez nahi jis raftar se tumhari aankhein...​
band ho jaayein...​
sirf imaan-dar, bay-ikhtiyar harkat ke saath...​
aur jab tumhara haath...​
aahista aahista tumhari raan par ruk jaye...​
toh tum waapas aajao...​
ek aise sukoon ke saath...​
jo pehle nahi tha...​
tum bohat achha kar rahe ho...​
apna waqt lo..."

(Al ka haath uski raan ko chhoo leta hai, uski aankhein khulti hain, aur woh muskaraata hai.)

(John Grinder David ke paas jaata hai aur uske name tag ko dekhta hai.)

David?​
Mera naam hai— (woh haath milane ke liye haath aagay karta hai. Jaise hi David ka haath
uthta hai, John apna baaya haath uski kalai par rakhta hai, haath ko uthata hai apne chehre
ke paas, aur David ki daayein hathon ki lines ki taraf ishaara karta hai.)
 "Apne haath ko dekho...​
Zara gaur se socho ke is haath mein kaise rang badalte hain, aur shadows
banti hain...​
in lines aur folds ko dilchaspi se dekho...​
aur allow karo ke tumhara haath dheerey dheerey neeche girne lage...​
main wohi suggestion doon ga jo maine Al ko di thi...​
jaise hi tumhara haath neeche girta hai...​
sirf honest unconscious movements ke zariye...​
tumhari aankhein bhaari mehsoos karne lagen gi...​
aur khud ba khud band ho jaayengi...​
aur jaise hi tumhara haath apni neeche ki journey mukammal karta hai...​
us waqt tum kuch aisa dekhoge...​
jo tumne saalon se nahi dekha...​
Apna waqt lo...​
Enjoy karo...​
Jaise hi tumhara haath... mere haath par rukta hai...​
us lamhay tumhe mehsoos hoga ke tumne kuch mukammal kar liya...​
aur ek chhoti si muskurahat ke saath...​
tum bhool chuke hoge ke tumne kya yaad kiya tha...​
aur jaise ke tum pehle bhi yahan... reh chuke ho..."

(David ka haath John ke haath ko chhoo leta hai, handshake complete hota hai. John ki
voice tone jo induction ke dauran change hui thi, normal ho jaati hai aur woh kehta hai:)

"John Grinder. Mujhe tumse mil ke bohat khushi hui.​

Mujhe nahi pata tum tak seminar ki info kaise pohnchi,​
lekin main khush hoon ke tum aaye."

Yeh technique “leverage inductions” kehlaati hai.

Bahut se aise phenomena hain jo aam logon ko lagta hai ke yeh altered state of
consciousness ka signal hote hain.​
Catalepsy unhi mein se aik hai.​
Haath ya baazu ka cataleptic ho jaana (matlab hawa mein aik hi jagah thama rehna) aksar
yeh batata hai ke kuch ajeeb ho raha hai.​
Aam log waise bhi yun hawa mein haath latkaye nahi baithtay.​
Agar tum yeh halat create kar lo, to tumhara ek hypnotist ke tor par image ban jaata hai.​
Aur phir tum is experience ko leverage bana kar dusri altered states tak ja sakte ho.

Main ne Al se kaha:​
"Kya main tumhara haath thori dair ke liye le sakta hoon?"​
Ab socho, aisi baat ka kya matlab nikalo ge? Lekin usne is baat ko meaningfully accept
kiya, aur mujhe apna haath uthaanay diya.​
Main ne uska haath halka sa hilaaya, aur jab chhoda to uska haath cataleptic ho
gaya—hawa mein atka hua.
Yeh hi “leverage” ka point hota hai.​
Meri communication ne Al ko aik ajeeb situation mein daal diya:​
Uska haath hawa mein latak raha hai—cataleptic.

Ab hypnosis induction ke liye main us situation ko use karta hoon.​

Main usse woh response link karwata hoon jo mujhe chahiye—jaise ke woh trance mein
chala jaye—aur yeh suggest karta hoon ke agar woh apne haath ko neeche lana chahta hai,
to usay yeh kaam sirf unconscious honest movement se karna hoga...

Aur jitni raftar se uski aankhein band hoti hain, aur woh koi purani yaad yaad karta hai,
utni hi raftar se haath neeche aaye.​
Phir jab uska haath uski raan par rest kare, to woh normal conscious state mein waapas
aaye — aur iss poore process par khushi ya thoda has kar react kare.

Cathy: Tum kaise jaan'tay ho ke uska haath cataleptic hai?

Main feel kar sakta hoon.​

Jab main uska haath uthata hoon aur thoda sa hilaata hoon,​
to woh dheere dheere halka lagta hai,​
aur fir apne aap hawa mein tik jaata hai — bina uske effort ke.

Kitty, apni aankhein band karo thodi dair ke liye.​

Cathy, tum uska baaya haath uthao.​
Utha ke dekho kaisa feel hota hai.

Kitty, ab main chahta hoon ke tum apne zehan mein ek aisi jagah ka tasawwur banao jahan
tum ne kabhi vacation enjoy ki thi — jo bohat pleasant thi.​
Jab yaad aa jaye, to apna sar hila do.

Ab, main chahta hoon ke tum us vacation spot mein apne aas paas ki har cheez ko detail se
dekho.​
Aur mujhe form aur color ke mutaliq jitna describe kar sako — out loud — utna batao.

Kitty: Main ek Sequoia forest mein hoon.​

Tumhein wahan specifically kya nazar aa raha hai?​
Kitty: Bohat saare darakht hain, aur gehri shadows.

Theek hai. Cathy, uski kalai ke neeche apni ungli rakho.​

Us se mazeed aur mazeed tafseel poochhti raho.​
Jab bhi woh bolna shuru kare, to tum uski kalai ko halkay se upar neeche hilaana shuru
karo —​
yeh check karne ke liye ke woh apna haath khud se sambhaal rahi hai ya nahi.

Jab woh uss haath ko hold karna shuru kare aur tumhe mehsoos ho ke woh bilkul stable ho
gaya hai,​
to samajh jao ke unconscious response activate ho gaya hai uske haath mein.​
Jab woh apne vacation ke images mein poori tarah ghus jaaye, to woh apne haath se
bekhabar ho jaati hai.

Yeh technique tumhe sikhaayegi ke kis tarah se conscious holding aur unconscious
catalepsy ka physical farq mehsoos kiya jaata hai.

Aur agar banda jaan bujh ke apna haath pakad raha ho,​
to bhi tum isse hypnotic leverage ki tarah use kar sakte ho — jaise ke woh conscious nahi
hai.

Ab aati hai iski ek variation:

"Dreaming Arm"​
Yeh bhi leverage induction hai — lekin thoda fun aur light-hearted.​
Bachon ke saath bohat kamaal kaam karti hai.

Sabse pehle tumhe bache ka interest lena hota hai.​

Tum poochhte ho:

"Tumhein apne dreaming arm ke baare mein pata hai?"​

Aksar bacha thoda confuse hoga, shayad soche ke yeh kya ajeeb sawal hai.

To tum hans kar uska mazaaq udaate ho:

"Tujhe nahi pata dreaming arm ke baare mein? Mujhe pata hai. Main bata
sakta hoon… lekin tu to sabko bata dega na!"

Bacha excited ho jaata hai:

"Nahi, nahi! Main kisi ko nahi bataunga! Please mujhe batao!"

Tum aur thoda nakhre kartay ho:

"Mujhe lagta hai tu shayad sach mein nahi jana chahta."

Yeh technique Milton Erickson ne "building response potential" kaha tha — yani internal
curiosity aur eagerness ka bhandar bharna.

Ab kaam aur bhi asaan ho jaata hai.​

Tum poochhte ho:

"Tumhara favourite TV show ya movie kya hai?"

Aaj kal bache aksar kehte hain: "Star Wars" ya "The Bionic Man."
To tum kehte ho:

"Kya tumhe yaad hai woh pehla scene jab Steve Austin bhaag raha hota
hai aur music chal raha hota hai?"

Ab jab bacha woh scene yaad karta hai,​

to tum uski aankhon ka movement observe karte ho:

●​ Agar woh upar daayein dekhta hai → uska right arm uthao.​

●​ Agar woh upar baayein dekhta hai → uska left arm uthao.​

Kyun?​
Kyunkay jis brain hemisphere se woh images yaad kar raha hai,​
usi hemisphere se uska haath bhi control hota hai.

To jab tum usi side ka haath gently uthate ho,​

to woh mehsoos bhi nahi karta — kyun ke uska dhyaan poora andar ke images mein hota
hai.​
Result: Automatic catalepsy.

Bachay ko ya banda ko yeh bhi yaad nahi rehta ke tumne uska haath uthaya bhi tha —​
kyunki uska poora focus andar ke visual memory par tha.

Tum music ka zikr bhi kar sakte ho — khaaskar jab tumhein pata ho ke banda auditory
zyada hai.​
Tum poochh sakte ho:

"Aakhri dafa kab kisi bohat zabardast musical group ko suna tha?"

Phir jab banda sochta hai aur kisi taraf dekhta hai,​
to usi side ka haath uthao — jahan uski eye movement jaati hai jab woh memory access
karta hai.

Jab tumhe arm catalepsy mil jaaye (matlab haath hawa mein stable ho),​
to keh do:

"Theek hai. Ab aankhein band karo aur poora show dekhna shuru karo —
detail ke sath, sound ke sath — aur sabse zaroori cheez tumhara favourite
part hai, taake tum baad mein mujhe bata sako. Tumhara haath sirf utni
raftar se neeche jaayega jitni raftar se tum poora show dekh loge."

Yeh har bache pe kaam karta hai jise maine hypnosis mein daala — sirf ek ke ilawa.​
Woh aik bacha hypnotist ka beta tha, aur saalon se usay yeh program kiya gaya tha ke
woh hypnotize nahi ho sakta.
Us bache ne 25 expert hypnotists ko bhi beat kar diya tha.

Lekin main uske saath woh game khelne ki bajaye, seedha keh diya:

"Wah! Tum to poori tarah unhypnotizable ho. Tum trance mein jaa hi nahi
sakte."

Ab obviously, usne is statement ko hi defeat karna chaaha...​

Aur dheere dheere trance mein chala gaya.

Jab haath cataleptic ho jaaye, to usi tarah ka leverage induction use karo jaise pehle kiya:

"Main tumse yeh nahi keh raha ke tum apna haath neeche lao... jab tak
tumhara unconscious mind tumhe poora movie dobara nahi dikhata —
taake tum dobara usay enjoy kar sako... scene by scene... har ek detail ke
sath... aur woh hissa dekhna bohat lazeez ho sakta hai jo tum bhool chuke
thay ke tumhein yaad tha... ab."

Aurat: Agar banda seedha dekhta rahe aur aankhein defocus ho jaayein, to konsa haath
uthana chahiye?

Sabse simple jawab yeh hai: dono haath uthao. Sirf do hi hain. Jo neeche
gir gaya — woh nahi tha.

Aurat: Kya banda ek taraf dekhe aur doosra haath cataleptic ho jaaye?

Haan, sab kuch mumkin hai.​

Lekin jo main tumhein samjha raha hoon woh ek principle hai — aik rule of
thumb jo tumhein help kare ke kaunsa haath use karo effective induction ke
liye.

Ab chalo wapas chalte hain us handshake interruption ki taraf jo main ne David ke saath ki
thi.​
Yeh aik aisi induction ka example hai jise pattern interruption kehte hain.

Agar tum kisi bhi insan ka koi rigid pattern pehchan lo —​

chahe woh individual ka ho ya cultural —​
to tumhe sirf itna karna hai ke woh pattern shuru karo...​
aur phir beech mein tod do.

Is moment mein tumhare paas wahi leverage hota hai​

jo arm catalepsy mein hota hai.
Iska classic example hai:

Handshake interruption.

Ek handshake insani zehan mein aik automatic aur aik hi unit ka behavior hota hai. Agar
hum dono handshake karein aur kisi teesray shakhs se poochhein “Hum ne kya kiya?” to wo
kahega, “Tum dono ne handshake kiya.” Yeh lafzon ka tareeqa yeh batata hai ke yeh aik hi
unit ka amal hai – aur asal mein yeh waqai aik unit hi hota hai.

(Misali tor par, wo baar baar apna haath Sue ki taraf badhata hai aur phir rok leta hai.)
Chahe Sue ab jaanti bhi ho ke main sirf mazak kar raha hoon jab bhi main haath barhata
hoon, phir bhi usay yeh visual signal milta hai ke wo apna haath barhaye – kyun ke us ke
zehan mein yeh behavior aik automatic tareeqay se program ho chuka hai. Agar usay yeh
sochna paday ke mera haath barhana kya matlab rakhta hai, aur phir uska jawab bhi
consciously dena paday – to yeh kaafi slow aur awkward process ban jata.

Har shakhs ke paas aise hazaaron automatic programs hote hain. Tumhein sirf yeh dekhna
hota hai ke kaun se actions us shakhs ke liye waqai automatic hain – aur phir un mein se
kisi aik ko interrupt kar do. Jaise he main apna haath handshake ke liye barhata hoon, wo
bhi apna haath barhaye gi. Lekin main beech mein uska wrist pakar leta hoon aur halka sa
upar uthata hoon – us waqt wo aik choti si confusion mein chali jati hai kyun ke us ke paas
us point ke baad ka koi “program” nahi hota. Jab tum kisi single behavior unit ko beech mein
rokte ho, samne wala shakhs confused hota hai – usay samaj nahi aati ke ab kya karna hai.

Kisi shakhs ne kabhi beech mein handshake chhor ke kisi aur cheez ki taraf nahi gaya hota,
kyun ke handshake ka koi “middle” hota hi nahi. Ab tumhare paas leverage point hota hai.
Ab tum usay jo kehna chaho, keh sakte ho – aur wo aam tor par usay follow karega. Jaise:​
“Apne haath ko dheere se neeche girne do, lekin sirf utni hi der mein jitni der mein
tum gehri trance mein chale jao...”

Sue: “Tum leverage aur pattern interruption mein farq samjha sakte ho?”

Jawab: Yeh farq asal mein tumhari perception ko organize karne ka tareeqa hota hai, na ke
koi different experience.

Leverage ka matlab hota hai ke samne wala pehle se kisi trance behavior mein hota hai –
jaise ke catalepsy (jism ka aik hissa motionless ho jaye) – aur tum us behavior ko verbal
instructions se kisi naye behavior se jor detay ho.

Interruption ka matlab hai ke tum samne walay ko ek aise behavior mein pakar lete ho jo
aik single unit hai – jaise handshake – aur phir usay beech mein tod detay ho. Ab wo shakhs
stuck hota hai, confused hota hai, kyun ke usay yeh kabhi nahi seekhaya gaya hota ke
handshake ke beech mein kya karna hai.

Yeh tab possible tha jab hum 3-4 saal ke thay aur handshake seekh rahe thay. Us waqt har
step ka ek tukra hota tha – jaise chalna seekhne ke waqt hota hai. Lekin ab yeh sab
unconscious aur automate ho chuka hai. In actions ka ab koi “middle” nahi hota.
Agar tum kisi shakhs ko us behavior ke middle mein pakar lo jo asal mein “middleless” hai –
to wo ruk jata hai. Aur us waqt tum usay guide kar sakte ho ke ab aagay kya karna hai – aur
wo aam tor pe wohi karega.

Leverage aur pattern interruption ka farq asal mein hypnotist ke perception ka farq hota hai.
Leverage mein tum kisi unusual (ghair mamooli) behavior ko create karte ho apni chaal se,
aur phir jo tum response hasil karna chahte ho, usay us behavior ke saath jorr dete ho —
jaise unko us leverage position se nikalne ka tareeqa.

Pattern interruption ka matlab hai ke client ke kisi repetitive (bar bar honay wale) aur
automatic behavior ke darmiyan mein rukhawat daal dena. Kyunke yeh behavior unke zehan
mein aik single unit hota hai, isliye unke paas koi program nahi hota ke woh is behavior ke
beech se kisi aur cheez ki taraf ja saken. Us point par, main unko naya program deta hoon.

Jab main Al ke paas gaya aur kaha "Kya main tumhara arm le sakta hoon?" to main uske
jawab ka intezaar nahi kiya — main seedha uska arm uthaya. Uske paas choice thi ke woh
haath neeche kar ke "Nahi" keh deta. Yeh possibility hoti hai leverage mein. Lekin
interruption mein yeh option nahi hota, kyunke woh already ek single unit ke beech mein
phansa hota hai — us waqt koi mukammal control nahi hota.

Kevin: Mujhe lagta hai hum yahan is baat ko presuppose (pehle se maan chuke hain) kar
rahe hain ke aakhir mein banda trance mein chala hi jaata hai. Lekin real duniya mein aisa
nahi hota. Agar main kisi ajnabi se milta hoon aur handshake interrupt karta hoon, to kaafi
mushkil ho sakta hai.

Response: Main agree karta hoon ke yahan aur bahar ki duniya ke presuppositions alag
hain. Lekin mera andaza hai ke bahar yeh zyada asaan hoga. Yahan tumhara conscious
mind pehle se alert hota hai ke kuch ajeeb hone wala hai — aur yeh cheez meri hypnosis ki
koshish ko mushkil bana deti hai. Jab banda consciously janta hai ke kuch hypnotic hone
wala hai, to uske paas choice hoti hai ke woh participate kare ya nahi.

Lekin agar tum hotel lobby mein jao aur kisi se normal handshake shuru karo aur phir usay
beech mein hi tod do, to banda literally ruk jaayega — uska brain momentarily blank ho
jaayega.

Tum aur patterns pe bhi experiment kar sakte ho. Agli dafa jab koi tumse kahe: “Hi, how are
you?” to tum kehna: “Bohat bura hoon, halat kharab hain, lagta hai marr jaunga!” — phir
dekhna unka reaction kya hota hai.

Hamari culture mein iska expected jawab hota hai: “Fine.” Zyada tar log iske ilawa kisi aur
jawab ka response ready nahi rakhte, to woh confuse ho jaate hain. Aur business ya
professional settings mein to yeh interruption aur bhi strong hoti hai.

Aksar smokers ke liye cigarette nikalna aur jalaana aik unconscious aur single unit
behavior hota hai. Agar aap unki haath se cigarette nikaal dein to wo waisa hi response
denge jaise kisi aur pattern interruption pe dete hain.

Yeh un logon ke sath karna zyada asaan hota hai jo yeh nahi jaante ke aap un pe hypnosis
technique use kar rahe hain, bajaye is group ke jahan log alert hain. Agar kisi ko shak hai to
pehle yahan practise karo, phir clients ya ajnabi logon pe test karo ke kya zyada asaan hai
ya mushkil.

Aik aadmi: Agar aap kisi ka haath upar uthwa lein aur wo expect nahi kar raha, jaise street
pe kisi ka handshake interrupt kar diya, to aap uske baad kya karenge?

Jawab: Pehle yeh socho ke aapka goal kya hai? Jo outcome chahte ho uske liye verbal
instructions do — us shakhs ko us muskil situation se nikalne ka raasta do jo aapne uske
liye create ki hai.

Aadmi: Agar bas kisi pe experiment karna ho?

Jawab: Theek hai, agar hum temporarily ignore kar dein ke yeh ethical hai ya nahi kisi
ajnabi pe experiment karna bina unki raza ke — to main yeh karta:​
"Kehna: ‘Aur apna haath neeche girne dein jab tak wo mere haath se touch kare, us point
par aap haath milayein jaise kuch bhi ajeeb nahi hua.’”​
Phir jab unka haath neeche aaye, us waqt haath milao aur kaho:​
“Haan jee, mil ke acha laga.”​
Is tarah wo aksar us experience ko bhool jaate hain aur koi bura reaction nahi dete.

Aurat: Wo bhool kyu jaate hain?

Jawab: Kyunke yeh aik single unit behavior hai. Handshake ke darmiyan kya ho sakta
hai? Agar aap suggestion de dein aur phir handshake complete karein jaise kuch hua hi
nahi, to unka conscious mind sirf yeh sochega ke kisi se mulaqat hui thi.

Aadmi: Main ne Groucho Marx ko dekha tha — wo bhi aisa karta tha. Haath milane ke liye
haath aage badhata, aur jab samne wala haath aage karta, wo peeche kheench leta. Phir
jab doosra banda haath peeche kare to Groucho phir se haath aage karta.

Aurat: Mujhe lagta hai ke log foran us state se bahar aa jaate honge jab aap unka haath lete
hain, aur sochne lagte honge "yeh kya horaha tha?"

Jawab: Haan, agar aap sirf interruption karein aur kuch na karein to log sochte hain. Isiliye
zaroori hai ke aap turant verbal instructions dein ke ab kya hona chahiye. Log har muskil
situation se nikalne ka tareeqa dhoond lete hain — maine test kiya hai:​
Kabhi banda 10 second mein recover kar leta hai aur kehta hai “Yeh ajeeb tha”, aur kabhi
5–10 minutes tak bas wahan khada rehta hai jab tak kuch samajh nahi aata.

David: Kya aapke liye yeh zaroori tha ke mujhe yaad na rahe ke us state mein kya hua?

Jawab: Nahi. Mere liye yeh important nahi tha.

David: Kyun ke mujhe yaad to tha, lekin mujhe lagta tha ke is cheez ne us waqt jo ho raha
tha uss mein koi khalal nahi daala.

Ron: Kya yeh interruption kehlata hai jab aap kisi ki awaz sunne ki umeed karte ho lekin
sunayi na de — jaise Milton Erickson ka mumbling karna ya kisi ka awaz dheemi kar ke
lagbhag inaudible bana dena?
Jawab: Yeh feedback pe depend karta hai. Kuch logon ke liye yeh interruption hoti hai, kuch
ke liye nahi. Handshake interruption har bande ko effect karti hai, lekin un logon ke paas jo
unanticipated (ghair-mutawaqqa) awaz sunne ke tareeqe aur tareb rakhtay hain, un pe asar
kam hota hai. Agar banda us waqt aap ki awaz pe fully focus kar raha ho aur uske paas koi
khas auditory sophistication na ho, to us pe asar hoga.

Example: Jaise ke TV monitor ka scene notice kiya tumne?...​

Alag alag logon ka hasne ka waqt yeh batata hai ke har shakhs ko "impossible auditory
situations" se recover hone mein kitna waqt lagta hai. Woh aik sentence fragment tha, pura
sentence nahi tha. Agar tum ne mehsoos kiya ke tum kisi completion ka intezar kar rahe
ho... to woh interruption ka effect tha.

Man: Kya yeh wohi pattern hai jo Milton Erickson ne use kiya tha jab us ne ek aurat se haath
milaya tha aur use trance mein le gaya tha?

Jawab: Nahi. Woh kinesthetic ambiguity thi — yeh ek alag tarah ka interruption hai. Jab
main normal tareeqay se tumse haath milata hoon, to ek waqt ke baad humein haath chhod
dena chahiye. Agar main chhodta nahi hoon, ya jaise Erickson ne kiya, ambiguous tareeqay
se chhodta hoon jisse tumhein samajh nahi aata ke haath chhoda kab gaya, to tum
suspended ho jaate ho — bina kisi agle program ke.​
Erickson ne chhodne se pehle apni ungliyon se thode soft touches diye, taake aurat ko
samajh na aaye ke touch khatam kab hua. Aakhri kaam us ne yeh kiya ke halka sa wrist ko
upar push diya — jisse catalepsy ho gayi. Yeh waise hi hai jaise kisi ka haath utha ke hilaao
jab tak muscles khud control na le lein aur haath wahi ruk jaaye.

Norma: Kya incongruence bhi pattern interruption ho sakta hai?

Jawab: Bohat acha sawal. Mazedaar baat hai ke yeh Norma ne poocha. Mujhe Norma ke
aur encounters se pata hai ke uska congruency check strategy bohat refined hai — yeh kisi
bhi pro communicator ke liye zaroori hai.​
Magar iska nuksan yeh hai ke aise log manipulation ke liye vulnerable ho jaate hain. Agar
aap koi baat bada congruent tareeqay se present kar rahe ho aur phir achanak... (us ne
gesture kiya aur bina awaaz ke baat ki)... jaise hi aap presentation normal tareeqay se jari
rakhte ho magar ek channel cut kar dete ho — yahan auditory — to Norma jaise log literal
kursi se gir jaate hain.

Norma jaise log jab kisi ko dekhte aur sunte hain, to lips ki movement ko sound ke sath jorna
chahte hain — agar sound nahi hoti, to unka program hi crash ho jaata hai.

Agar aap "strategies" naam ke information class ke baare mein jaante ho (refer to book:
Neuro-Linguistic Programming Volume I), to aap pattern interruption ka bohat hi elegant
tareeqa hasil kar lete ho. Agar aap kisi shakhs ki core strategy hi tod do, to interruption
zyada gehra asar karta hai — aur zyada der tak rehta hai.

Man: Aap logon ko woh numbers bhi ulte tareeqay se de sakte ho jo woh hamesha certain
chunks mein sunte hain — jaise social security number. Normally woh teen, do, aur chaar
digits ke chunks mein hota hai — agar us format ko change kar do, to banda hil jaata hai.
Haan, ya aap telephone numbers ka bhi use kar saktay ho. Jaise: "Seven eight two four...
three six seven." Aap yeh dekh saktay ho ke banda kaunsa strategy use karta hai unka
reaction dekh kar. Agar banda tonal pattern use karta hai telephone number yaad rakhne
ke liye, to jab aap numbers ko different chunks mein do gay (alag tareeqe se), to uska pura
system hil jaye ga—interrupt ho jaye ga. Agar banda numbers ko sirf visual tareeqe se
dekhta hai (aankhon se), to us pe itna effect nahi hota.

Pattern Interruption kisi bhi competitive sport mein use ho sakti hai. Aap dekh saktay ho ke
jab bhi aap koi specific move karte ho, to saamne wala banda ek specific reaction deta hai.
Us pattern ko samajh kar aap usay tor saktay ho—aur advantage le saktay ho.

Meri wife Judy saber fencing mein expert hai. Wo ek move baar baar repeat karti hai—6
dafa tak—sirf yeh dekhne ke liye ke opponent ka regular reaction kya hota hai. Jab wo
reaction samajh jaye, to wo us reaction ka bhi reaction design kar leti hai jisse wo hit kar
sake. Kabhi kabhi wo sirf gesture ka start karti hai, aur phir beech mein usay interrupt kar
deti hai. Tab tak opponent already react kar chuka hota hai, aur wo uska faida uthati hai.
Boxers bhi yehi karte hain—ek pattern set karte hain aur phir tor dete hain.

Agar aap ne Bjorn Borg ko tennis khelte dekha ho, to aap notice karo ke wo bilkul energy
waste nahi karta. Uska dhyan bohat narrow focus mein hota hai. Chahe crowd cheer kar
raha ho ya boo, usay farq nahi padta. Wo shot miss kare ya hit kare, uski reaction same hoti
hai—sirf turn hota hai, racket handle ko ghoomata hai, aur next play ke liye tayyar ho jata
hai. Uska poora focus essentials par hota hai. Is tarah ki concentration usay psychological
tactics se bachati hai jo opponents use karte hain.

Agar aap kisi ka altered state (wo zone jisme wo acha perform karte hain) interrupt kar do,
to wo bekar perform karte hain—aur aap shayad jeet jao.

Pattern interruption ka use bohat jagahon par ho sakta hai. Koi bhi cheez jo unexpected
ho, wo banda ko ek second ke liye "hold" kar deti hai. Us waqt, jab wo confused ya blank
hota hai, aap usay clear suggestion de saktay ho ke ab usay kya response dena chahiye.

Lekin yeh sab tab kaam karta hai jab aap in techniques ko itna practice kar lo ke aap khud
personally powerful aur congruent ho jao. Aapka verbal aur nonverbal har act aise hona
chahiye jaise "yeh kaam karega"—aur phir wo hota hai. Jab aap fully congruent ho jaate ho,
to aapka next step hai: feedback lena.

Koi bhi general rule hamesha kaam nahi karta. Har dafa feedback ke mutabiq adjust karna
padta hai.

Overload
Takreeban pachis saal pehle, George Miller ne insano aur jaanwaron ke perception
(mehsoos karne) ke mutaliq bohot zyada research ko summarize kiya apne mashhoor paper
"The Magic Number 7 ± 2" mein. Insan ek waqt mein lagbhag 7 "chunks" (hisay) tak ki
maloomat ko consciously yaani hosh mein rakh kar process kar sakta hai. Agar uss se
zyada maloomat di jayein, to insan overload ho jata hai aur ghaltiyan karna shuru kar deta
hai.

Agar main tumhein 7 numbers ka silsila do, to chances hain ke tum wo sahi yaad rakh loge.
Lekin agar 9 numbers doon, to zyada mushkil ho jata hai, aur ghaltiyan hone lagti hain. Har
number ek chunk hai. Lekin agar hum un 9 numbers ko 3 groups mein divide kar
dein—jaise 3-3 ka group— to yaad rakhna asaan ho jata hai. Ab sirf 3 chunks reh gayein,
har ek mein 3 digits.

Yeh technique kaafi powerful hai. Tum 7 patton, 7 twigs, 7 branches, 7 darakhton ya 7
jangalon tak ko ek waqt mein process kar sakte ho—sab kuch depend karta hai ke chunk
ka size kya hai.

Jab bhi tumhara dimagh 7 ± 2 chunks tak full occupied hota hai, uss waqt aur koi cheez
consciously process nahi hoti. Wo sab kuch unconsciously process hota hai, yaani tumhein
pata bhi nahi chalta aur wo cheez dimagh mein chali jaati hai.

Ek workshop mein is ka zabardast demo hua. Maine ek aise shakhs ko bulaaya jisko naam
yaad rakhne ka zabardast tareeqa aata tha. Carla naam ki ek aurat thi. Jab usay kisi ka
naam bataya jaata, to uski aankhon ke pupile dilate ho jaate (badh jaate), aur wo us shakhs
ke forehead par naam ka ek visual image bana leti thi. Jab bhi us shakhs ko dobara dekhti,
to naam uske forehead par likha huwa dikhai deta, aur usi se pehchan jaati.

Ab, mujhe pata tha ke Carla jab apna ye internal image banane ka kaam karti hai, to uske 7
± 2 chunks full occupied ho jaate hain. To main ne Carla se kaha:​
"Woh aurat dekho wahan, uska naam Ann..."​
Main ne pause liya. Pupils dilate huye.​
Fir main ne aahista se kaha: "Teachworth."

Carla ne pehle hi “Ann” ko visualize kar liya tha. Jab main ne pucha:​
"Uska naam kya tha?"​
Usne kaha: "Ann."​
Main ne pucha: "Uska last name yaad hai?"​
Usne kaha: "Nahi, tumne bataya hi nahi."

Lekin jab main ne phir se kaha: "Uska naam Ann Teachworth hai"​
to Carla boli: "Oh! Ab yaad aaya."​
Yeh is baat ka proof tha ke naam uske unconscious mind ne process kar liya tha, lekin
conscious level par nahi aaya kyun ke uska attention us waqt internal task mein busy tha.

Yeh ek elegant technique hai: Jab kisi ka conscious dimagh overload ho, to tum direct
uske unconscious ko baat samjha sakte ho. Koi filter nahi rehta, koi defence mechanism
kaam nahi karta.

Dusri baar jab maine kabhi trance induce ki thi, to maine yehi overload technique use ki thi.
Chalo, main demonstrate karta hoon. Bill, zara idhar aake kharay ho jao.
"Thik hay, kia tum apni aankhein band kar saktay ho? Ab jo main chahta hoon woh yeh hay
ke tum aahista se, zara unchi awaaz mein, 200 se pichay ki taraf 3 ke steps mein ginna
shuru karo. Aur jab tum yeh kar rahe ho, main apne haath tumhare kandhon par rakh kar
tumhein ghoomaunga. Agar kisi bhi waqt tumhein yeh mehsoos ho ke gehri neend mein jana
ziada aaram da lagta hay, to aisa aram se kar lena — poori tasalli ke sath ke tum safe
haathon mein ho."

Is tareeqe se main uske tamam representational systems ko overload karta hoon. Wo

counting ke liye visualization ka use kar raha hota hay. Apni awaaz mein numbers gin raha
hota hay — matlab auditory system bhi active hay. Aur jab main usko ghoomata hoon, to
kinesthetic (movement feeling) system bhi active ho jata hay. Is tarah wo khud hi itna
overload ho jata hay ke mujhe kuch extra karne ki zarurat nahi parti.

Main yeh bhi keh sakta tha: "Ab tum aahista ghoomna shuru karo." Lekin agar main khud
uske kandhon par haath rakh kar usay ghoomata hoon, to mujhe tactile feedback milti hay
— pata chalta hay ke uski state kab change ho rahi hay aur kis type ki ho rahi hay. Saath hi
mein usay kinesthetic focus ka ek aur point deta hoon: mere haathon ka pressure.

Overload kaam kare, is ke liye ensure karna parta hay ke tamaam systems (visual, auditory,
kinesthetic) ek sath engage hon. Agar wo numbers dekh bhi raha hay, bol bhi raha hay, aur
ghoom bhi raha hay, to is halat mein agar main koi suggestion doon, to wo sidha uske
conscious mind ko bypass karke unconscious mind mein chali jati hay.

Agar main kuch aisa keh doon jo uske task se dhyan hata de, to mujhe turant pata chal jata
hay, kyunke wo numbers gin raha hota hay. Agar ginti ruk gayi, to ya to wo trance mein chala
gaya hay, ya uski disorientation khatam ho gayi hay aur wo meri baaton ko actively sun raha
hay. Us surat mein ya to main insist karunga ke ginti continue rakhe, ya agar dekhu ke
trance mein chala gaya hay, to main "drama" band kar ke asal kaam shuru kar dunga.

Yeh aik traditional trance induction technique hay. Maine yeh method ek purani kitaab mein
parha tha, bina kisi tajurbe ke bas instructions follow kar ke try kiya. Kuch saal baad ja ke
mujhe samajh aaya ke yeh kaam kis principle pe chal raha tha, aur uske baad main is
technique ko modify karke aur jagahon pe use karne laga. Hamari workshop mein bhi yahi
hota hay — ziada tar messages aapke unconscious level pe bhejne ka tareeqa sikhaya jata
hay.

Tum kisi bhi mushkil task ka use kar sakte ho kisi shakhs ko mentally occupy karne ke liye,
taake uska conscious dhyan divert ho jaye, aur phir tum ek direct aur simple instruction do
jaise:​
"Agar kisi bhi waqt tumhein lagay ke gehri neend mein chalay jana asaan hay, to
aram se aisa kar lo — yeh soch ke ke tum bilkul safe ho."

Ek aur variation yeh hay:​

Main Jack ka haath pakarta hoon, aur kehta hoon:​
"Tumhein sirf aram se yahan bethna hay. Main tumhare fingers ko touch karunga aur
naam lunga. Tumhara kaam hay decide karna ke main sahi naam le raha hoon ya
ghalat."
Phir main shuru karta hoon:​
"Forefinger, middle finger, ring finger, little finger, thumb. Middle finger, forefinger,
ring finger, thumb." (Lekin is dafa wo actually little finger ko touch karta hay.)

Jab bhi main ghalti karta hoon, Jack ka reaction yeh hota hay: uski pupils dilate karti hain
aur uski saans ruk jati hay. Usay decide karne mein ziada waqt lagta hay ke main ghalat
tha, banispat is ke ke main sahi hoon. Yeh cognitive overload ka asar hota hay.

Agar main continue karta to main dheere dheere aur zyada “incorrect” hota jata. Thodi dair
mein woh shakhs itni complexity se overwhelmed ho jata ke apne aap ko defend karne ke
liye gehri trance mein chala jata. Us waqt main kehta: “Jab main tumhara ring finger touch
karta hoon is dafa”—aur main galat finger touch karta—“toh tum zyada relaxed mehsoos kar
rahe ho.” Main overload karta rehta, aur phir mazeed suggestions deta ke mujhe kis type ke
responses chahiye—jo yeh batate hain ke woh trance mein ja raha hai.

Main us shakhs ko ek saath tino channels (visual, auditory, kinesthetic) se input de raha
hoon aur us se yeh demand kar raha hoon ke woh judge kare ke kya suna gaya, dekha gaya
aur mehsoos kiya gaya input match karta hai ya nahi. Thodi dair mein woh haar maan lega,
aur asal mein yeh kahega: “Thik hai, mujhe batao ke mujhe kya karna hai.”

Is baat ki bajaye ke sab systems overload karo, tum sirf ek ya do systems mein itna complex
task de sakte ho ke uski conscious attention ke 7 ± 2 chunks poori tarah busy ho jayein. Tum
us shakhs ko keh sakte ho ke woh 1000 se one-thirds mein count back kare, aur har fraction
ko visualize kare alag alag colors mein—fraction ke top, bar, aur bottom ke liye alag colors.
Har naye fraction ke liye naye colors hone chahiye. Phir tum yeh suggestion add kar sakte
ho: “Har number ke saath tum aur gehri trance mein ja rahe ho.” Yeh sab tareeqay us
shakhs ke input channels overload karne ke hain, taa ke woh samajh hi na paye ke tum kya
kar rahe ho.

Aurat: Kya woh double induction jiska zikr tumne Patterns II wali book mein kiya hai, ek
overload ka example hai?

Haan, double induction asal mein usi overload technique ka ek special case hai. Ismein do
log mil ke ek shakhs ko overload karte hain. Yeh bohat tezi se kaam karta hai—zyada
overload milta hai, jaldi milta hai, aur bohat powerful response milta hai. Pehli baar humne
accidentally workshops mein double induction kiya, aur dekha ke kitna powerful effect hota
hai. Phir humne ise private practice mein istemal karna shuru kiya, dekhne ke liye ke iska
aur kya use ho sakta hai.

Kuch maheene baad Carlos Castaneda ki kitab Journey to Ixtlan publish hui. Uske end mein
ek vivid double induction ka scene hai—Don Juan ek kaan mein baat kar raha hai, aur Don
Genaro dosray kaan mein ek saath. Jin logon pe humne double induction kiya tha, unka
feedback exactly Carlos ke description se match karta tha—jese ke body ke beech mein split
mehsoos hona, etc.

Tum description se samajh sakte ho ke Carlos ek “derived kino” shakhs hai. Woh images aur
words ko feelings ke zariye process karta hai. Aise shakhs ke liye double auditory input
kinesthetic splitting ka actual sensation deta hai. Har message dimaag ke opposite
hemisphere se process hota hai, aur jo feelings nikalti hain woh usi body side mein mehsoos
hoti hain jahan se sunai diya. Dono ears ka alag auditory input dono body sides mein
different representation create karta hai. Aur ye difference body ke beech mein sabse zyada
mehsoos hota hai—jaise ke shakhs do hisso mein bata hua mehsoos karta hai.

Leverage inductions, pattern interruption, aur overload teenon kaam ek jaise hain — yeh
techniques doosray insaan ke experience mein aik "wedge" daalne ka tareeqa hain, taake
tum process shuru kar sako. Inka maqsad yeh hota hai ke us shakhs ka jo conscious state
already chal raha hota hai, usay torh kar aik zyada flexible state mein daala jaye.

Jab tum overload kar lete ho, pattern interrupt kar lete ho, ya leverage situation create kar
lete ho, us ke baad tum zyada directive ban jaate ho — aur us halat ko us cheez se link kar
dete ho jo tum develop karna chahtay ho.​
Jaise:​
"Aur jese hi yeh sab chal raha hai, tum dekho gay ke tumhari aankhein dheere dheere
bojhal ho rahi hain, aur band honay lagti hain, aur tum aik gehri relaxed state mein chale
jaate ho."

Tum trance develop karte ho, aur phir us trance ko as a context use karte ho us change
work ke liye jo tum karna chahte ho.

Personal Power

Ek aur induction method hai sirf apni personal power ka istemal karna.​
Seedha aur congruent (andar aur bahar se aik jaise) hokar banda ko kehte ho:​
"Trance mein chalay jao."​
Agar banda trance mein chala gaya, to theek. Agar nahi gaya, to intezar karo jab tak jaaye.

Saare doosray patterns — jaise nonverbal mirroring waghera — simultaneously use ho

sakte hain.​
Agar tum kehte ho "Trance mein jao" aur tumhara har behavior 100% congruent hai, to
banda zaroor trance mein chala jaayega.

Tumhein bilkul bhi internal doubt nahi hona chahiye. Tumhari expectation congruent honi
chahiye — tabhi banda sahi response dega.

Agar banda reply kare:​

"Main waqai jaana chahta hoon, lekin ja nahi paa raha."​
To tum seedha kehte ho:​
"Haan, of course, tum abhi ja nahi sakte. Main us ka intezar kar raha hoon."​
Iska matlab hai ke tum conscious response ko ignore kar rahe ho, aur kisi deeper
unconscious cheez ka intezar kar rahe ho.

Agar banda object kare aur tum react na karo, sirf expectantly wait karo, to wo khud dobara
try karega trance mein jaane ka — jab tak sahi se chala na jaye.
Meta-Strategy for Congruency

Agar tumhare andar koi hesitation ya conflict ho ke tum yeh cheez kar sakte ho ya nahi, to
aik useful tareeqa hai "quotes" ka use karna.

Jaise:​
"Main tumhein batata hoon jab main Phoenix gaya Milton Erickson se milne. Main
unke office gaya, wo wheelchair mein rolling aae, aur mujhe dekha aur kaha: 'Trance
mein chalay jao!' "​
Tum quotes use karke aik frame create karte ho jisme tum keh rahe ho:​
"Yeh main nahi keh raha, yeh to ek experience hai jo mujhe hua."

Lekin asal mein tum jo bhi induction karna chahtay ho, full force se deliver karte ho.​
Agar trance response mil gaya — toh perfect.​
Agar nahi mila, aur tum willing nahi ho continue karne ke liye, to keh do:​
"Woh to Milton ka kehna tha, main to khud aisa kabhi nahi karta."

Yeh "quotes pattern" aik zabardast tareeqa hai naye behavior ko test karne ka — bina
apne upar zimmedari liye. Tum khud ko allow karte ho ke feel karo ke agar tum wo kaam kar
sakte to kaisa lagta — aur tum usay as if kisi aur ke taur par try bhi kar lete ho.

Slacking Realities
Aik aur induction technique ka naam hai "stacking realities." Chalo simple tarike se
samjhta hoon:

Ek dafa main Michigan mein aik group ko metaphor ke baare mein bata raha tha. Jaise hi
maine metaphor ka zikar kiya, mujhe aik kahani yaad aa gayi jo Milton Erickson ne mujhe
sunayi thi. Us kahani mein woh University of Chicago mein aik group ko address kar rahe
thay—bilkul waise hi jaise main us waqt group ke samne tha.

Phir unhon ne aik aur kahani sunayi—jo unke walid ne unhein sunayi thi—jisme unke dada
Sven, jo Sweden mein dairy chalate thay, gaayon se pyar se baat karte thay taake woh
shaant ho jaayein.

Ab dekho, kahani ke andar kahani ke andar kahani chali gayi. Aapka conscious mind
confuse ho jata hai: main kis level pe baat kar raha hoon? Gaayon wali kahani? Erickson
ka seminar? Main jo aap se baat kar raha hoon? Ya us aurat ki kahani jo pehle meri clinic
mein aayi thi?

Yehi confusion intentional hoti hai. Jab conscious mind ghoom jata hai, to unconscious
mind chupke se suggestion absorb kar leta hai.
Example in Therapy:

Agar koi aurat mujhe milne aaye aur bole "Mujhe yeh problem hai," to main usse keh sakta
hoon:

"Zara window se dekho, redwood trees kaise hil rahe hain... Mujhe yaad aaya aik aurat
yahan isi chair pe baithi thi... woh bhi un trees ko dekhti thi... us waqt usay aik dream yaad
aaya... jisme woh kisi aise insan se mili jo use bohat relaxed feel karwata tha..."

Yahan main real world aur kahani ko mix kar raha hoon. Aapka conscious dimagh yeh
trace karte hue confuse ho jata hai ke yeh kis ki baat ho rahi hai. Aur iss confusion mein aap
trance mein chalay jatay ho bina resistance ke.

Stacked reality ka maqsad hota hai:

●​ Conscious mind ka overload karna​

●​ Reality ke layers itne complex bana dena ke banda track hi kho de​

●​ Gentle confusion create kar ke unconscious mind ko direct access mil jaye​

Ye technique sensory overload se thodi soft aur elegant hoti hai—but result utna hi
powerful hota hai.

Kisi bhi reality ke andar, main aik process instruction embed kar sakta hoon taake changes
ho sakein.​
"Aur jab main uss young aurat se baat kar raha tha jo mujhe milne aayi thi... uss waqt
bhi jab woh apna khwab dekh rahi thi... jiska mujhe koi ilm nahi tha, aur mujhe uss ka
pata hona bhi zaroori nahi tha... sirf yeh zaroori tha ke usse pata ho... aur woh
tabdeeliyaan jo aise khwabon ke sath aati hain... woh uss ke future behavior main
gracefully zahir hongi."​
Jab main usay khwab dekhte hue dekh raha tha... mujhe ek purani baat yaad aayi jab main
Phoenix, Arizona main apne aik purane dost se milne gaya tha.

Ab main do kaam kar raha hoon:

1.​ Main realities ko stack kar raha hoon, jis se uske liye track rakhna namumkin ho
jaaye.​

2.​ Main usay instructions de raha hoon ke woh kya kare jab main apni baat jari rakhta
hoon — yaani ek aisa khwab dekhe jo uske behavior ko gracefully tabdeel kare.​

Agar office mein koi doosra shakhs bhi ho, to main seedha induction karne ke liye tayar
hoon. Main doosray shakhs ki taraf dekhta hoon aur kehta hoon:​
“Aur Milton ne meri taraf dekha, aur kaha ‘Soo jao... sirf utni dair tak jitni zarurat ho...
taake tum maze se... aik aisi tabdeeli laa sako jo tumhain khud hairan kare aur khushi
de... jiska content tumhein us waqt tak maloom nahi hoga jab tak woh tumhare asal
behavior main zahir na ho jaaye... agle 24 ghanton ke andar kabhi bhi... kyun ke
unconscious se surprise milna hamesha dilchasp hota hai...”​
Aur phir Milton ne us shakhs se kaha ke woh... jab bhi... jab uska unconscious mind
mutmain ho jaaye ke usne koi aisi tabdeeli identify kar li hai jo uske liye faida mand hai...​
To woh simply... ek tazgi ka ehsas le kar... ahista se wapas aa jaaye... uss reality level
par jo uske liye sabse zyada munasib ho taaleem ke liye.

Iss sab mein main kuch important cheezein presuppose kar raha hoon:

1.​ Personal Power: Main jo kuch bhi kar raha hoon usmein bilkul congruent hoon.​

2.​ Rapport: Main apne aap ko uss shakhs ke sath itna tune kar chuka hoon ke usay
mujh par agent of change ke tor par bharosa ho jaaye.​

Jab yeh achieve ho jaaye, to aap hamesha aik direct hypnotic command embed kar sakte ho
— including deep trance.​
Stacked reality aapko rapport banane ka moka deti hai aur response evaluate karne ka bhi.​
Yeh confusion aur overload techniques ke muqablay mein zyada narmi se kaam karti hai.​
Kahaniyon mein sab kuch ho sakta hai, isliye aap aik complete induction aur utilization
kahani ke zariye kar sakte ho — bas smoothly karne ke liye thoda zyada waqt chahiye hota
hai.

Stacked reality ke kai functions ho sakte hain:

●​ Yeh aapko ek kahani ke zariye aisi baat kehne ka excuse deta hai jo otherwise
conscious mind resist karega.​

●​ Yeh aapke behavior, voice tone shift, aur trance-inducing skills ko trigger bhi karta
hai.​
Jab main Erickson ki baat karta hoon aur uska voice tone use karta hoon, to meri
unconscious memory activate ho jaati hai.​

Main hypnotic inductions ke liye Milton Erickson se behtar koi model nahi samajhta.

Ek project jo main kuch logon ko suggest karoon ga:​

Aik general open metaphor banayein jo trance induction ke liye design ho.​
Usmein aik stacked reality ka set banayein jismein aap ek general hypnotic induction
embed kar sakein.​
Open metaphor ka matlab hai ke aapko pata hai aapne kahan se shuru karna hai, kaunse
characters hain, kya general outcome chahiye — lekin stories ko itna open rakhein ke agar
koi unexpected response aaye to aap usay incorporate kar sakein.

Aap hamesha doosri reality par switch karne ka option rakhte ho agar pehli wali response
nahi de rahi.​
Stacked realities aapko ambiguous frame deti hain jismein aap koi bhi technique ya
maneuver use kar sakte ho jo course mein sikhaye ja rahe hain.
 Exercise 6
Main ne abhi 5 naye induction types dikhaye hain:

1.​ Leverage Inductions,​

2.​ Pattern Interruption,​

3.​ Overload,​

4.​ Personal Power,​

5.​ Stacking Realities.​

Abhi thodi der mein main chahunga ke tum log chhoti chhoti groups mein ye cheezein ek
dusre pe try karo.

Mera mashwara yeh hai ke khud pe ehsaan karo aur koi nayi technique select karo jo abhi
tak try nahi ki. Jo tum already jante ho, wo to tum kar hi lete ho. Kuch log hamare seminars
mein aake wahi cheez seekhte hain jo pehle se unhe aati hai — baar baar. Behtar yeh hoga
ke ya to aisi induction choose karo jiska tumhein bilkul idea nahi, ya jo sirf suni hai lekin
kabhi ki nahi.

Jitni zyada techniques tumhare paas hongi kisi bhi result achieve karne ke liye, utne zyada
logon pe tum successful hoge. Kuch methods kuch logon ke liye bht effective hote hain,
lekin sab ke liye nahi. Agar tumhare paas trance induce karne ke kai tareeqe hon, to tum
dekho ge ke har banda hypnotizable hai.

Ab wapas groups of three mein jao:

●​ A koi nayi induction method choose karega aur B pe trance induce karega.​

●​ C observer banega, aur B ke physical changes notice karega, jaise pupil dilation,
skin ka color, breathing pattern, muscle relaxation, etc.​

A ke liye 4 extra steps:

Step 1:​
Ek clear signal decide karo jisse yeh pata chale ke subject trance state mein stable ho gaya
hai. Example:
"Apni trance ko us level tak deepen karo jo aapko sabse zyada relaxing lage… aur phir jab
aap wahan pohanch jayein… to is baat ka ishaara ek seedha, unconscious sir hilaane se
den… ya apna daaya ya baaya haath thoda sa uthakar thigh se thoda sa alag kar dein…"

Step 2:​
Jab wo signal mil jaye, to subject ko ek general instruction do learning ke liye, jese:

"Ab main khushi se notice karna chahunga ke aapka unconscious mind koi ek purani, bohat
hi positive experience dhoondhe… jo aapne saalon se yaad nahi kiya… aur phir aap usay
dobara dekh saken, sun saken, aur mehsoos kar saken… aur us experience ki positivity ko
dobara enjoy kar saken…"

Ya fir:

"Main chahunga ke aapka unconscious mind aapko ek image, ya ek feeling, ya ek sound

dikhaye… kisi aise cheez ki… jo aap aane wale kuch dino mein experience karna
chahenge… taki aap apni workshop ki learning ko carry forward kar saken…"

Important:​
Kya content hai, isse koi farq nahi padta. Content se door raho.​
Bas general suggestion do ke wo trance mein andar kuch kare, jisse usay khud realize ho
ke wo ek naye state of consciousness mein gaya tha.

Agar kisi ka koi specific idea hai ke wo trance mein kya karna chahta hai, to session shuru
hone se pehle apne group walon ko bata de.

Jab aap general learning instruction de rahe ho, to aap aisay jumlay add kar saktay ho:​
"Aur har saans ke sath, tum aur gehrai mein jaa rahay ho ya apne liye sabse
comfortable trance level par stabilize ho rahay ho . . . tumhare liye aur tumhare
maqsad ke liye."

Kisi bhi specific content ka zikr na karo — usay khud decide karne do. Sirf general
instructions do takay wo apne unconscious level pe khud se choices aur learnings generate
kare.

Step 3: Feedback ka system lagao

Jo bhi general suggestion do, us mein aik feedback clause zaroor shamil karo:​
"Aur jab tumhara unconscious mind tumhein wo experience de chuka ho, to simple
aur honest unconscious signal ke zariye mujhe batana — dono haathon mein se koi
aik ya dono thora uth jaayein, ya tumhari aankhein achanak flutter kar ke khul jaayein,
jaise tum refresh aur khushi ke ehsaas ke sath wapas aaye ho."​
Yeh usay ek signal dene ka tareeqa deta hai ke uska trance ka chhota sa kaam mukammal
ho gaya hai.
Step 4: Trance se bahar lane ka tareeqa

Jab tumhein wo signal mil jaaye, to use trance se nikalne ka plan do:

●​ "Ab mein dheere dheere 10 se 1 tak reverse count karunga."​

●​ "Ya mein abhi aik second mein tumhare shoulder ko touch karunga."​

Yeh sab usay mentally prepare karta hai ke ab wapas ana hai.

Phir:​
"Aur jab mein 'one' par pohchun, tumhari aankhein flutter kar ke khul jaayengi, tum
khush aur refreshed mehsoos karoge, aur nayi seekhne ki energy ke sath wapas aa
jaoge."

Ya phir:

●​ Uska haath uthao (jo trance mein cataleptic hoga) aur bolo:​
"Tumhara unconscious mind is haath ko sirf uss speed se neeche jaane dega,
jis speed se tum yeh experience le kar wapas is reality mein aa rahe ho . . . ek
sense of accomplishment aur refreshment ke sath."​

Ya:​
"Jab mein tumhara shoulder touch karunga, to tum suddenly ek peaceful energy ka
surge mehsoos karoge . . . aik halki si jhunn-jhunnahat wali khushi ki wave . . . aur
aankhein flutter kar ke khul jaayengi, tum poori tarah se yahan is waqt mein laut
aayoge."

Koi sawal?

Woman: Tumne to bohot kuch de diya!

Trainer: Haan, diya to hai. Lekin jab tum practically step-by-step trance induce karoge,
general instructions doge, aur phir wapas laoge . . . tab tumhara unconscious tumhein yaad
karwa dega.OK. Go ahead.
 Incorporation and Dealing with
Abreactions
Agar koi ahem cheez hoti hai — chahe wo andar se ho (jaise client ka deep response) ya
bahar se (jaise koi zor se darwaza band kare ya koi kursi ko touch kar jaye) — to sabse
bekaar tareeqa yeh hai ke pretend karo ke kuch hua hi nahi. Aisa karne se client ka trust aur
tumhari credibility donon ka satyanash ho jata hai, kyunke client ko yeh zaroori lagta hai ke
tum itne hoshiyar ho ke uski halat samajh sako.

Solution kya hai? Incorporation.​

Jo bhi ho, usi waqt usay apni baat mein shaamil karo.

Example diya gaya:​

Cathy ne kaha usay trance mein jaate waqt background mein baaton ka shor sunai diya.
Tum keh sakte ho:

"Yeh baaton ka halki si gungunahat tumhein ek garamiyon ke din ki yaad dila

sakti hai, jab tum ghaas par lete thay aur honeybees ki awaaz tumhein sooth
karti thi."

Aur agar usay bees ka phobia ho?​

Tab turant switch karo:

"Yeh bees kisi aur waqt aur jagah se aayi hain... tum is waqt bilkul mehfooz ho,
is kamray mein..."

Ya usay khud bee bana do — "buzz" karne do... wordplay bhi chala: To bee or not to be.

Yad rakho: Tum pehle se nahi jaan sakte koi metaphor ya suggestion kis trauma ko trigger
kar de. Is liye, feedback aur observation har waqt chahiye. Client ke body language se turant
pata chal jata hai kuch theek nahi.

Dusra incorporation ka tareeqa:

"Darwaza zor se band hua — aur is awaaz ne tumhein aur zyada relaxed feel
karwaya, jab tum meri awaaz sun rahe ho."

Aakhir mein ek banda aaya aur bola trance mein jaa raha tha magar body jerk hua aur wo
wapis aagaya. Agar us waqt facilitator kehta:

"Kabhi kabhi jab tum altered state mein jaane lagte ho to body aise jhatke deti
hai jaise neend mein hote waqt hoti hai. Yeh signal hai ke tum bohot gehri
trance mein jaane wale ho."
To uska experience alag hota.

Bottom line: Human experience ka matlab predefined nahi hota. Tum usay jo matlab dena
chaho, de sakte ho.

Ab agar kisi client ka andar se koi strong reaction aaye, jaise ke wo trance mein jaate jaate
achanak rone lage — toh us situation ko kaise handle karna chahiye?

Hypnotist hone ke nate, tumhein "abreaction" ka samna karne ke tareeqe seekhne honge.
Abreaction ka matlab hota hai koi purani painful ya intense yaad ya reaction ka
achanak surface pe aajana, jab banda altered state of consciousness mein jaata hai.

Ye baat samajhne wali hai ke kai log apne kuch consciousness states ko avoid karte hain,
kyunki unka dimaag un painful experiences ko us representational system (jaise images,
sounds, feelings) mein daal deta hai jo unke hosh mein nahi hota. Is tarah banda
consciously relax rehta hai, aur unconscious mind un dardnaak yaadon ko suppress karke
rakhta hai — taake banda overwhelmed na ho jaye.

Magar jab tum trance ya hypnosis ke zariye us unconscious system tak access dete ho, toh
pehli cheez jo samne aati hai — voh "junk" hoti hai — yaani wo unfinished business, jaise
Gestalt therapy kehte hain. TA (Transactional Analysis) ke mutabiq, yeh "redecision
material" hota hai — yaani wo moment jahan kisi purani painful memory ko dobara
experience karke banda uss yaad ko nayi soch de sakta hai.

Toh agar banda achanak ro deta hai — kya karoge?

Ek banda — Jack — poochhta hai:​

"Kya is moment ko handle karne ka tareeqa wohi hai jo tum external interruptions ke liye
use karte ho?"

Jawab:​
Bilkul. Pehle tum pace karte ho.​
Yaani tum uss banda ke experience ko verbal form mein accept karte ho. For example:

"Aap abhi discomfort mehsoos kar rahe hain... aur yeh kaafi takleef-deh hai...
aap ro rahe hain... yeh aansoo aap ke purane dard ka nateeja hain..."

Is tarah wo client tumse ladta nahi, kyunki tum uska experience accept kar rahe ho.

Uske baad tum reframe karte ho — yaani tum us painful experience ka matlab badalte ho:

"Har insaan ke life mein aise lamhe hotay hain jo hum painful keh dete hain...
lekin aksar yahi lamhe humari future skills aur strength ka base bante hain... Jo
log kabhi takleef se nahi guzray, woh kabhi woh abilities nahi seekh paate..."

"Kitna sukoon milta hai, jab banda kisi purane discomfort ko phir mehsoos karta
hai — aur yaad aata hai ke us waqt se survive kar chuka hai... aur woh yaadein
ab uske current behavior ko aur bhi zyada powerful bana sakti hain."
Nateeja kya hua?​
Ab client ke liye wo rona sirf takleef nahi, balki naya matlab ban gaya — uske andar ki
strength ka symbol. Tumne sirf acceptance nahi di, tumne us takleef ko resource bana diya.

Yeh hota hai content reframe — aur yahi hoti hai real hypnotic communication ki taqat.

Mard: Jab aap pehle pace kar lein, to kiya us shakhs ke andar jo part hay usay us ke samne
rakh kar usay dekhne ka keh sakte hain ke us ke saath past mein kya hua?

Jawab: Bohat acha! "Main chahta hoon ke tum khud ko us particular age mein dekho, aur
ek curiosity ka ehsaas rakho ke exactly kya hua tha... apni aankhon aur kaanon ke zariye ab
tum dekh sakte ho ke kya hua tha, aur tumhein yeh comfort hay ke tum ne usay survive
kiya." Yeh approach unpleasant feeling se dissociation create karti hay aur content reframe
bhi karti hay. Yeh hi NLP technique ka base hay jo phobias cure karne ke liye hoti hay – jo
Frogs into Princes mein detail se batayi gayi hay.

Mard: Jis shakhs ke sath mein yeh exercise kar raha tha, wo turant kisi cheez mein ghus
gaya. Us ki aankhon mein rapid movement hone laga, sar idhar udhar hilla, haath hilne laga,
aur us ke jabre mein tension dikhayi di. Main confuse ho gaya. Mujhe samajh nahi aaya ke
yeh koi unpleasant experience tha, hypnosis ka resistance tha, ya kuch aur. Kya
suggestions hain?

Jawab: Yeh baat bohat important hay ke aap interpretation aur sensory-grounded
observation ka farq samjhein.

"Jawline ke muscles mein tension", "sar idhar udhar hilla", yeh sab sensory-based cheezen
hain.

Lekin "yeh unpleasant experience tha" ya "hypnosis ka resistance tha" — yeh sirf aap ke
guess hain, ya keh lo hallucination.

Hallucinate karna NLP ka hissa hay — lekin har waqt yeh samajhna zaroori hay ke aap kab
sensory data dekh rahe ho aur kab khayali meaning attach kar rahe ho.

Instead of andar hi andar guess karne ke, seedha un cheezon ko describe karo jo aap dekh
rahe ho: jaise muscles tight hain, aansoo nikle, body posture kaisa hay, saans kis rhythm
mein chal rahi hay, waghera.

Yeh karne se aap us banday ke experience ke sath rapport maintain kar lete ho.

Aap keh sakte ho:

●​ "Kya zabardast experience tha yeh, aur tum thoda hairan hue, hai na?"​
 ●​ "Yeh jo signals tum ne mujhe bahar diye, yeh andar ke gehre experience se
connected hain jo tum is waqt mehsoos kar rahe ho."​

Aksar jab banda trance mein jata hay to muscles relax ho jaate hain, aankhon mein nami aa
jati hay ya halkay aansoo nikalte hain.

Lekin don't hallucinate. Aansoo ka matlab zaroori nahi ke gham ho — ho sakta hay banda
bas relax ho raha ho.

Agar aap yeh decide karte ho ke us ka matlab kya hay, to aap apna personal belief us par
thop rahe ho.

Content se door raho — aur bas jo dikhta hay usay calmly bolo:

"Aur jaise yeh aansoo tumhari gaal par behta hay, tumhein aik barhti hui comfort
aur security mehsoos hoti hay, ye jaankar ke tum puri tarah mehfooz ho."

Yahan “aansoo behta hay” ek real, visible fact hay. Us ke sath aap ne ek desired
emotional state attach kar di — yani jo naturally ho raha hay usay use karte hue banda us
direction mein le jao jahan aap chahte ho.

Joan: Main ne ghalti se apne partner ke liye aik bohot powerful lafz use kar liya. Main ne us
se kaha ke apne haathon ko "disembodied" sochay. Woh foran us soch main chala gaya ke
jaise aik bohot bhaari, jism se alag haath utha raha ho. Jab yeh lafz mere munh se nikla,
mujhe foran andaza ho gaya ke yeh ghalat tha, lekin mujhe samajh nahi aaya ke kaise theek
karun.

Response: Sab se pehle, apni khud ki soch (representation) dobara arrange karo. Yahan
koi correction ki zarurat nahi thi. Dekho Joan, communication mein koi "mistake" nahi hoti.
Sirf aise responses ya outcomes hotay hain jo tumhari baat cheet ke natayij hote hain. Jo
response mila woh woh nahi tha jo tum chah rahi thi. Magar iska matlab yeh nahi ke ghalti
thi, yeh sirf agla qadam tha us response tak pohanchne ka jo tum asal mein chahti thi.

Tum ne notice kiya ke jab tum ne "disembodied arm" ka lafz use kiya, to strong reaction aya.
Ab "incorporation" ka principle lagao — foran kaho: "Aur yeh cheez tumhe kaafi disturb
kar gayi." Yeh aik option hai. Yeh sensory-based statement nahi hai, main yeh guess kar
raha hoon ke jo experience tum ne trigger kiya usay hum aam tor par "upset" keh dete hain.

Agar tumhe apne guesses par bharosa nahi, to phr general raho: "Aur tumhara is baat par
aik response aya. Aur kai tarah ke responses hain jo tum seekh saktay ho is cheez ke
liye." Tumhein yeh tak nahi pata ke woh kis baat par react kar raha tha, to kehdo: "Us khas
soch par." Ya phir: "Socho ke tumhara close dost is soch par kaise react karta, jo tum
se mukhtalif hota." Yeh bhi incorporation hai.

Agar tum aur bhi zyada general rehna chaho to kaho: "Tumhara response bohot powerful
tha." Yeh hamesha theek lagega. Tum yeh nahi keh rahe ke woh experience positive tha ya
negative — sirf yeh keh rahe ho ke woh tha.
Agar tum guess karte ho ke banda koi unpleasant (nafrat angez) cheez mehsoos kar raha
hai, to tum keh sakte ho:​
"Aur kitna sukoon milta hai un nafrat bhari yaadon ko yaad kar ke, aur yeh mehsoos
karke ke tum ne un sab ko paar kar liya... aur ab woh kabhi repeat nahi hongi."

Ya:​
"Aur kitni takleef dein woh kuch experiences... lekin yeh bhi toh sach hai ke wohi
takleef dein hamari aaj ki taaqat ka bunyad hain... toh kaafi achha lagta hai (voice
change) un purani, nafrat bhari yaadon ko yaad karna."

Isay kehte hain content reframing (jaisay ke book Reframing mein bataya gaya hai). Tum
banda jo mehsoos kar raha hai usay aik bari context mein fit kar rahe ho, jahan woh
experience aik positive foundation ban jata hai jahan naye reactions aur behavior develop
ho sakte hain.

Tum behavior ko puri tarah accept karte ho — jaisa hai waisa. Aur phir usay ek constructive
frame mein daal detay ho.

Aur tum yeh bhi kar saktay ho ke trance shuru karne se pehle precautionary steps lo taake
jo bhi pehla material nikalay woh positive ho. Taake altered state (trance) hamesha acchi
experiences se juri ho. Baad mein tum gradually un unpleasant cheezon ko bhi handle karna
seekh saktay ho.

Ek asaan tareeqa jo aapko abreaction (yaani takleef-de ya overwhelm karne wale emotional
responses) se bachata hai, yeh hai ke aap client ko kaam shuru karne se pehle ghoor se
dekhein aur kehain:

“Tumhara unconscious mind ne tumhein hamesha protect kiya hai — aur yeh
uska haq aur zimmedari bhi hai — tumhari zindagi ke un hisso se jo painful ya
overwhelming ho sakte thay agar woh hosh mein aajate. Main tumhare
unconscious mind se darkhwast karta hoon ke woh yehi kaam jari rakhe jaise ke
pehle karta aaya hai. Aur jab tum apni consciousness ko alter karo (yaani trance
ya hypnosis mein jao), to sabse pehle jo experiences samne aayen woh
tumhare past ke kuch positive aur khushi dene wale lamhon ko yaad karne aur
enjoy karne ke liye hon. Jo unpleasant ya takleef-de material bhi usi system
mein mojood hai, usay temporarily aik safe jagah par side par rakh diya jaye."

“Aur jab tum altered state mein thodi maharat hasil kar lo, to woh unpleasant
material bhi asaani aur power ke saath handle kiya ja sakta hai, kyun ke humare
maazi ke woh so-called negative tajurbe aksar aaj ki powerful resources ka
buniyad ban jaate hain — agar unhein naye tareeqe se dekha, suna aur
mehsoos kiya jaye.”

Agar aap yeh baat karte hain, to aap doosre insan ke unconscious ke saath ek strong
rapport bana lete hain, kyun ke aap uske sabse important function — protection — ko
validate kar rahe hain, aur usi function ko carry on karne ki izzat bhari darkhwast kar rahe
hain.
Aap aik aur khaas request bhi karte hain: ke jo bhi material samne aaye woh aisa ho jo
conscious mind mein yeh desire paida kare ke woh aur explore karna chahe is naye
experience ko.

Waise, abreactions khud mein koi buray nahi hain. Lekin baat yeh hai ke trance work jab
shuru karte hain to pehle kuch powerful aur pleasant experiences lana zyada behtar hota
hai.

Log aksar yeh samajhte hain ke pain zaroori hai change ke saath. Lekin agar yeh dono
cheezen ek dusre se link ho jaayein, to log change se resistance dikhayenge — kyun ke
unhein pain pasand nahi. Baat change se nafrat ki nahi hoti, pain se hoti hai.

Agar aap change aur pain ke darmiyan clearly farq kar dein, to log asaani se change accept
kar lete hain. Aapka kaam as an agent of change bhi asaan ho jata hai, kyun ke pain aur
change ka natural link koi zaroori baat nahi.

Stan: "To aap yeh keh rahe hain ke yeh mental judo hai — bas farq yeh hai ke judo mein
aap har cheez ka istemal kisi ke khilaaf karte ho, aur yahan aap usi response ko unke
faayde ke liye istemal karte ho?"

Response: Haan. Stan, apne dono haath apne sar ke upar le jao aur dono ko aapas mein
jod lo. Ab sirf apne right hand se push karo.​
Shirley, aap bhi yehi kariye — dono haath jod ke sirf right hand se push karo.

Ab dono ne jab right hand se push kiya, to left hand bhi push kar raha tha.​
Yeh aik kinesthetic metaphor hai us cheez ke liye jo log aksar resistance kehte hain.

Agar aap kisi insan pe force karein, to woh resist karega. Aur phir aap dono ko us resistance
se direct deal karna padega — energy aur time dono waste.

Lekin agar aap samjhein ke har response aik insaan ka best possible choice hota hai us
waqt ke context mein, to aap usse push nahi karte — aap usay accept karte hain aur usay
turn kar lete hain.

Wohi farq tab bhi samajh aata hai jab aap American boxing ko Oriental martial arts se
compare karte ho. Oriental martial arts mein aap kabhi bhi doosray shakhs ki force ka
muqabla nahi karte, balki uss force ko le kar ussi direction mein istemal kar lete ho
jahan aap waise bhi jaana chahte thay. Jo exercise mein ne abhi aap se karwayi, woh
aik bohot hi accurate kinesthetic metaphor hai un hypnosis styles ka jo
direct-command pe based hoti hain vs. woh patterning jo hum aapko yahan sikhate
hain.

Aik banda: Jab aapko kisi client ka abreaction nazar aaye, to kiya aap uss se kabhi
poochte ho ke content kya tha?

Jawab: Nahi. Content poochhna aik traditional psychotherapy ka tareeqa hai. Mujhe
content ki zarurat nahi hoti, isliye mein nahi poochta. Yeh mujhe slow kar deta hai.
Lekin har shakhs ka aik apna need hota hai feedback ke liye, aur ek belief system hota
hai ke kya cheez zaroori hai ya appropriate hai. Aapke clients ko aap ya kisi aur
therapist ne yeh train kiya ho sakta hai ke unhein apne experiences ka content share
karna zaroori hai. Agar in dono mein se koi condition maujood hai, to phir aapko unki
need ko satisfy karne ke liye content involve kar lena chahiye.

Aik banda: Kya Milton Erickson kabhi content mangta tha?

Jawab: Mujhe lagta hai Erickson ne sab kuch kiya hai. Mujhe yaqeen hai ke kuch
clients ke sath usne kaafi content bhi liya hoga. Mein ne usay pure process,
content-free therapy karte hue bhi dekha hai, isliye mein janta hoon ke uske paas
poori range thi. Agar aap bina kisi content ke kaam kar sakte ho to iska matlab hai aap
content ke sath bhi kaam karna jaante ho. Iska matlab hai ke aap ke paas har possible
tareeqa hai aage badhne ka.

Aaj dopahar mein aap ne un 10 hypnosis induction methods mein se sirf 2 try kiye
hain. Aap ne achha perform kiya, aur kaafi acha trance induce kar liya. Lekin baaqi 8
techniques tab tak aapko nahi aayengi jab tak aap unhein try nahi karoge. Khud se ek
choti si commitment karo apne human evolution ke liye. Mein sirf aik hypnotist hoon,
to yeh sirf aik suggestion hai. Lekin aik communicator hone ke nate, yeh aapka haq
banta hai ke aap ke paas kai options hon desired results achieve karne ke liye.

Apne doston ya colleagues ke sath arrangements banao, ya apni private practice

mein privately practice karo, aur systematically baaqi methods bhi try karo taake aap
ke paas trance induce karne ke 10 tareeqay hon. Jab aap ke paas 10 tareeqay hon, to
aap hamesha trance laa sakte ho.

Aik meta-strategy hoti hai jise kehte hain "finesse". Aap aik tareeqa start karte ho, aur
agar desired reaction nahi milta ya slow hota hai, to aap smoothly next class of
inductions par switch kar jate ho. Agar response ab bhi slow ho, to agla method try
karo. Client ka experience yeh hoga ke aap sirf multiple smooth communications kar
rahe ho. Usay kabhi yeh mehsoos nahi hoga ke aap aik tareeqa try karke phir next pe
gaye, aur phir next pe.

Benediction
Aaj hum ne aapka dhyan kheenchne ki koshish ki, aur yeh batane ki bhi ke har shakhs apne
saath kai mumkinaton ki duniya laya hai — aur hum chahtay hain ke aap ko woh resources
milen jin se aap un tak access le saken.

Aaj hum ne kaafi aise patterns cover kiye jo hamaray liye hypnotic communication ya
general communication main kamyabi ke liye zaroori hain. Hum ne induction techniques ka
aik silsila discuss kiya, aur hum chahte hain ke aap in techniques ko apne unconscious skills
mein add karein — as alternate tareeqay un cheezon ko achieve karne ke liye jo aap already
kisi aur tareeqay se kar lete ho.
Agar aapko laga ke hum ne aaj bohat tez gati se material cover kiya, itna zyada ke aap
consciously absorb nahi kar paaye — toh aap bilkul theek samjhay. Yehi toh humari strategy
ka hissa tha. Hum yeh jaante hain ke aapka unconscious mind woh sab represent kar lega
jo aapki conscious awareness se reh gaya.

Hum aapke unconscious mind ka shukriya ada karte hain iski tawajjo ke liye, aur us se
guzarish karte hain ke wo aaj raat naturally jo states aapke sath hone wali hain — unka
istimaal kare.

Aaj raat aap soenge. Sleep aur dreaming ke dauraan, integration ka process naturally aur
intensely hota hai. Kabhi kabhi aap in sapno ka content yaad rakhte hain, kabhi nahi. Lekin
yeh zaroori nahi — dreaming ka integrative function apne aap kaam karta hai.

Main aapke unconscious mind se keh raha hoon ke aaj ke experiences ka analysis karein —
chahe aap un se waqif thein ya nahi — aur unhi cheezon ko store karein jo useful lagti hain.
Taake aanay walay dino, hafton, aur maheenon mein aap khud ko evolve hotay dekhein —
naye behavior ke sath, naye options ke sath, jo isi seminar se aap ne unconscious level par
seekh liya.

Aur jab aap yeh sab ajeeb o ghareeb sapne dekh rahe hon, hum aapke unconscious se yeh
bhi kehte hain ke aap gehri neend lein, pur-sukoon tareeqay se soyein, aur jab subha
aankhein khulein, toh taaza-damma aur ready ho kar kal ka session join karein.

Aaj ke liye aapki tawajjo ka shukriya.

 CHAPTER IV: Utilization

Process Instructions
Subha ka topic hai utilization – yani jab kisi ko aap ne ek altered state (trance ya hypnosis
jesa state) mein daal diya ho, to usko faida mand tareeqay se kaise istemal karein?

Is point par maan liya gaya hai ke aap ne already attention aur rapport hasil kar liya hai, aur
induction bhi ho chuki hai – yani saamne wala banda altered state mein baitha hai.

Ab core idea:

Jab banda altered state mein hota hai to uske belief system se larna nahi padta.
Conscious mind hamesha judge karta rehta hai ke kya possible hai aur kya nahi – woh sirf
try nahi karta, woh pehle hi decide kar leta hai ke yeh kaam mushkil hai. Lekin unconscious
mind ko farq nahi padta, woh cheezen try kar leta hai – agar aap sahi tareeqe se usko guide
karein.

Agar koi banda kehta hai:​

"Main yeh kaam nahi kar sakta, par mujhe karna hai."​
Toh samajh lo ke woh already conscious level par sari koshish kar chuka hai aur har gaya
hai. Isliye uska conscious mind sabse kam interesting hissa hai — usse ladne ka koi faida
nahi. Sidha "boss" se baat karo — yani unconscious mind se.

Ahem Sawal:

"Trance mil gaya... ab kya karna hai?"

Sabse seedha tareeqa hai:​

Unconscious mind ko ek content-free instruction do – jaise:

●​ "Learn something"​

●​ "Change now"​

Yeh instructions process-specific hoti hain:​

– Kaise karna hai woh bataya jaata hai​
– Kya karna hai woh open chhoda jaata hai
Kal ke session ke end par jo "benediction" diya gaya tha – woh bhi isi type ki process
instruction thi. Aapko kaha gaya tha ke:

●​ Apni experience ka review karo​

●​ Faida mand cheezen choose karo​

●​ Aur unka future mein istemal karo​

Lekin yeh specify nahi kiya gaya ke kaunsi cheezen, kab, aur kis kaam ke liye.​
Yeh sab decisions aapke unconscious par chhod diye gaye – jo zyada flexible aur powerful
hota hai.

Aam zindagi mein iska matlab:​

Agar aap kisi ko trance mein daal kar yeh keh dein:

"Ab tum aaj ka experience use karo, wo cheezen seekho jo tumhare liye zaroori
hain, aur jab bhi zarurat ho unka istemal karo."

Toh aap ne process chala diya bina kisi conscious resistance ke.

Is tarah instructions denay ka kai faiday hain.​

Sab se bara faida yeh hai ke tumhein yeh nahi pata hona chahiye ke tum kya keh rahay ho.
Tumhein kisi dusray insan ki zindagi ke details jaan’na zaroori nahi hota, phir bhi tum ek aisi
content-free process instruction de sakte ho jo uske liye faida mand ho.

Agar koi banda kisi problem ke sath aata hai, to tum yeh keh sakte ho:​
"Apne personal history ko unconscious level par search karo, aur aik aise resource
ko dhoondo jo is problem se deal karne mein madadgar ho sakay."​
Tum yeh specify nahi karte ke "resource" kya hoga. Na tum yeh specify karte ho ke
"problem" kya hai — tumhein is ke baare mein kuch bhi jaan’ne ki zaroorat nahi.

Dusra faida: Process instructions listener ko actively engage karti hain, kyun ke woh khud hi
tumhari incomplete baat ko complete karta hai.​
Teesra faida: Samne wale ki integrity (izzat aur personal choice) puri tarah se respect hoti
hai. Tum usko koi inappropriate content nahi de rahe, kyun ke tum koi bhi specific content de
hi nahi rahe.

Jin logon ne Meta-Model seekha hua hai, un ke liye yeh samajhna helpful hoga ke
hypnosis ki language, jismein yeh process instructions aati hain, Meta-Model ka ulta hoti
hai.​
Meta-Model ka kaam hota hai experience ko specifically define karna.​
Agar client kahe: "Mujhe dar lagta hai."​
Meta-Model ka response hoga: "Kis cheez ka dar?"

Lekin jab tum process instructions de rahe ho, to tum jaan bujh kar unspecific ho jaate ho —
aisi baat keh kar jismein kuch missing ho — taake client khud us blank ko apni marzi se fill
kare.
Jese pehle ki inductions ke baad hum kehtay thay:​
"Aur tum apne unconscious ko yeh ijazat de saktay ho ke woh koi aisi purani yaad
lay aaye jo tumhein khushi de..."​
Yahan hum specify nahi karte ke woh yaad kya hai — client khud apni yaad dhoondta hai.

Agar tumhein yeh seekhna hai ke process instructions banane ke liye kaunse specific
language patterns istemal hotay hain, to Appendix II dekh lo.

Ek language pattern jiska zikr zaroori hai woh hai: presuppositions.​

(yeh woh assumptions hoti hain jo tum kisi baat mein chhupa ke keh dete ho.)

Example Scene:

Trainer: "Jane, zara idhar aao. Kya tumhein pata hai ke tumhari zindagi mein aise waqt
guzray hain jab tum deep trance state mein thi?"

Jane: "Mujhe pata nahi... shayad abhi hoon."

Trainer: "Aaj tum chahti ho ke main tumhein verbal induction doon ya nonverbal?"

Jane: "Verbal."

Trainer: "Theek hai. Tum chahogi ke main abhi start karoon ya pehle sab ko bata doon ke
main kya karne wala hoon?"

Theek hai. Ab main aage barhta hoon aur tumhein ek simple misaal deta hoon process
instruction ki. Main presuppositions ka bhi istemal karunga, aur baaqi hypnotic language
patterns ka bhi.

Roman Urdu Translation:

Theek hai. Kya tum yeh abhi karna pasand karogi ya chahogi ke main sab ko pehle samjha
doon ke main kya karne wala hoon shuru karne se pehle?

Jane: Pehle samjha do.

Ab yeh batao ke main ne abhi Jane ke saath konsa technique use kiya?​
Aik aadmi: Usay choices di hain.

Haan, main usay choices de raha tha. Lekin in tamam choices mein common cheez kya
thi?​
Aik aur aadmi: Ke wo altered state mein jaayegi.

Bilkul. Har choice ke andar ek presupposition chhupi hui thi — ke wo trance mein jaayegi.​
"Verbal induction chahiye ya nonverbal induction jo tumhein deep trance mein le jaaye?"​
Farq nahi padta ke wo kya choose karti hai, kyun ke har case mein wo maan chuki hai ke
wo trance mein jaane wali hai.

Phir doosra sawal:​

"Main trance induce karun abhi ya pehle baaqi logon ko bata doon ke main kya karne wala
hoon?"​
Is mein bhi trance jaana fix hai, sirf waqt ka farq hai.

Yeh cheez Erickson kehte hain "illusion of choice" — yaani choice ka sirf dikhawa, asli
control tumhare paas hota hai.​
Wo verbal ya nonverbal choose kar sakti hai, abhi ya baad mein choose kar sakti hai —
lekin har option trance par hi khatam hota hai.

Agar tum dekh rahe thay, to tumhein pata hoga ke Jane already trance mein jaane lagi thi
us waqt tak jab tak main kuch bhi shuru karta.​
Ek tareeqe se to Jane theek keh rahi thi: wo altered state mein thi jab se wo yahan aayi
aur bethi.

Example Instruction (Roman Urdu):

Ab main tumhein ek simple misaal deta hoon process instruction ki, jahan main
presuppositions ka istemal karta hoon.

Jane, zara apne zehan mein aik bohat zyada real tasveer banao kisi aisi jagah ki jo
tumhein sukoon deti ho, shayad aik aisi jagah jahan tum ne kabhi ek bohat maze ki
vacation li ho.

Aur mujhe poora bharosa hai ke tumhara unconscious yeh farq samajh sakta hai...​
(jab wo Jane ki taraf dekh kar bolta hai)...​
jab main apni baatain sirf tumse kar raha hoon...

(Phir wo audience ki taraf munh karta hai)...​

aur jab meri baat kisi aur ke liye hoti hai...

Aur main tumhare unconscious mind se guzaarish karta hoon...​

ke wo meri baaton ka sirf wahi hissa le jo tumhare liye relevant ho,​
aur us par aese tareeqe se react kare jo sirf tumhari needs aur desires ke liye bilkul fit
ho.

Yeh process instructions tumhare listener ko actively engage karte hain, wo khud apna
content fill karta hai. Tum bas structure aur suggestion dete ho — control tumhare paas,
interpretation unke paas

Aur jab tum wahan ho… Jane… uss khaas jagah aur waqt ka lutf utha rahi ho… to main
chahta hoon ke tumhara unconscious mind… ek chhota sa hissa chun le… kisi maze daar
tajurbe ka… shayad koi aisa jo tum bhool chuki ho… taake kuch hi lamhon mein, tumhari
ijaazat se… jab main tumhare daaye kandhe ko chhoo’on… to tum achanak… kisi dilchasp
aur hansne wali yaad ko yaad kar lo… jo tumne saalon se yaad nahi ki.

(Usne kandha chhua)​

Lutf uthao… (Jane muskurati hai, audience hans deta hai)​
 Asli maza uthao!​
Hamare purane tajurbe… maze ka ek mustaqil source hain.​
Aur jab tum uss maze ko poori tarah mehsoos kar lo… to khud ko ek pur-sukoon halat mein
le jaane do…​
Aur jab tum woh tazgi mehsoos karo… to wapas humare paas laut aana…​
Taake tumhara conscious mind… aur tumhara unconscious mind dono… sikhne ke process
mein shaamil ho saken.​
(Normal tone mein)​
Shukriya, Jane.

Toh kiya tumhein samajh aaya ke maine process instructions kaise use kiye?​
Pehle maine use kaha ke ek restful jagah ka tasawwur kare… phir ek pur-lutf yaad ka.​
Agar main sirf simple instructions deta, to woh gehri reaction nahi milti jo tumne abhi Jane
ke chehre pe dekhi.​
Jaise humne pehle kaha tha, hypnosis asal mein experience ka amplifier hoti hai.

Example 2:​
Ab thoda complex karte hain. Socho main abhi Liz ke paas gaya hoon aur kaha ho:​
"Hello, mera naam Richard Bandler hai" — aur apna haath uski taraf barhaya.​
(Usne haath barhaya jaise keh raha ho)

Jab uska haath uthta hai, mujhe ek unconscious response mil chuka hota hai.​
Ab mujhe uss response ko amplify karna aur use karna hai.​
Main uska wrist pakar ke uski hathon ki taraf kar deta hoon aur kehta hoon:​
“Apne haath ko dekho.”​
Is se main ek naya program de deta hoon jo maine abhi abhi interrupt kiya tha.

"Dekho apni aankhon ka focus kaise badal raha hai… jab tum dekhti ho apni palkon ko
dheere dheere neeche aate hue… aankhon pe… utni hi dair mein jitni der mein tumhein
blink karne ki zarurat mehsoos ho… Apna waqt lo… aur apne haath ko neeche girne do utni
hi raftar se… jitni raftar se tum puri tarah relaxed mehsoos karo… apne hi khaas tareeke
se… Aur yeh zaroori nahi ke haath kitni jaldi neeche jaye… Zaroori yeh hai ke woh neeche
jaye usi speed se… jiss speed se doosra haath uthna shuru kare."

"Kyun ke tum kuch seekhna chahti ho… aur yeh zaroori nahi ke koi aur jaane ke woh
kya hai… kyun ke tumhara unconscious mind pehle se jaanta hai… aur agar tum uss
baare mein seekhne waali ho… to yeh zaroori hai… dheere ho jao!... ke tum woh
balance seekho… jo tumhare liye zaroori hai… aur tumhara unconscious mind jaanta
hai ke kis tarah ka balance chahiye… bas wahi…."

Yeh bohat hi faidemand aur zaroori hai... ke apne unconscious mind ko yeh ijazat do... ke
woh tumhein yeh moka de... aur usse yeh darkhwast karo ke woh tumhare liye apne matlab
nikalay... tabdeeliyan laayein... aur aik nayi learning experience dein... aise naye samajhnay
ke tareeqay dein... jo tum apne liye kisi na kisi tareeqay se istemal kar sako... aur yeh sab
kuch tumhare liye — aik fard ke tor par — mufeed ho.
Ab, mujhe yeh nahi pata... ke tum yeh khwab dekhna shuru kar sako gi ya nahi... jismein
woh hal chhupa ho... jo tumhara unconscious jaanta hai... tumhein milna chahiye. Lekin
mujhe yeh zaroor pata hai ke agar (aur jab) tum woh khwab dekhna shuru karo gi... to uska
koi matlab samajh nahi aaye ga. Aur yeh zaroori bhi nahi hai ke tum usay samjho... sirf yeh
zaroori hai ke tum seekho... aur tum sirf wohi cheez seekho... jo tumhein seekhni chahiye...

Har raat... Liz... tum naturally khwab dekhti ho... kuch khwab tumhein yaad rehtay hain... aur
kuch nahi... bilkul theek...

Aur ab main tumhara haath uthaoon ga... lekin main tumhein nahi kahoon ga ke isay kab
neeche rakhna hai... isay neeche rakhne ka waqt tum khud lo gi... jab tak tumhara zehni
idraak yeh samajhna shuru kare ke unconscious ko creatively kaise use kiya jata hai. Aur jab
tumhara haath tumhari thigh ko touch kare... to tum dheere dheere hosh mein aa jao gi... aur
yeh nayi samajh apne saath le jao gi. Tab tak... kisi aur baat ko sunne ki koi zarurat nahi...
lekin is tarah "chupke sunna" kitna pleasant hota hai... jab tum iss process mein kuch seekh
rahi hoti ho...

Ab tum yeh bata saktay ho ke uske kaunse movements conscious thay aur kaunse
unconscious? Agar tum altered states mein kaam karna chahte ho, to yeh farq samajhna
bohat zaroori hai.

Shuru mein uske body ke kai movements thay... kuch uski apni conscious response thay jo
ho raha tha uske hawalay se... aur kuch unconscious thay.

Aurat: Jab usne kursi par body ghoomai, lagta tha yeh conscious movement tha.

Theek. Lekin jab uska left hand thigh se uth gaya, kya woh conscious tha?

Mard: Main kahoon ga nahi.

Kyun lagta hai ke woh unconscious movement tha? Us movement mein aisa kya tha?

Mard: Woh flowing tha. Bohat smooth lag raha tha.

Aur zyada specific ho saktay ho ke kya observe kiya?

Jab usne apne pair hilaye, to woh bhi smooth tha — lekin woh conscious tha.​
Liz, tumhein pata tha tumhara haath uthne wala hai?​
Liz: Mujhe sure nahi... (Uska haath embedded command par hilta hai.)

Bas uth gaya! Abhi uska haath uthna ek unconscious movement tha. Unconscious
movements ka aik khas nishaan yeh hota hai ke start mein woh chhoti aur hesitant hoti hai.

Apna haath uthao — jaan bujh kar uthao. Jab conscious tareeqay se haath uthate ho, to tum
wrist se shuru karte ho?​
Nahi, tum wrist se shuru nahi karte. Tum elbow ya shoulder se shuru karte ho. Martial arts
ke masters apne belly — apne center — se shuru karte hain. Yeh bilkul different hota hai
wrist se movement shuru karne ke muqablay mein.
Agar wo apna haath elbow se uthana shuru karti bhi, to movement ka quality bilkul mukhtalif
hota jab wo unconscious ho. Main isay “jerky movement” kehna chahunga — ek tarah se
graceful hota hai, lekin zyada hesitant bhi hota hai, beech beech mein rukawat hoti hai. Jab
insaan conscious hota hai to movement aik poora programmed lagta hai, aur jaise hi start
hota hai, aap samajh lete ho ke ye end kahan hoga. Wo ek hi piece ka lagta hai.

Altered state mein jab banda hota hai, us waqt ka movement aur jab banda normal familiar
halat mein hota hai, in dono mein farq hota hai. Jaise jab maine usay trance mein
instructions diye the aur uska haath thigh se upar uth raha tha — wo kaafi alag tha us
movement se jab maine use directly kaha ke haath uthao. Agar usne consciously decide
kiya hota “mujhe Kleenex chahiye” aur haath barhaya hota, to wo bilkul different lagta trance
movement se.

Yeh differences samajhna zaroori hai agar aap yeh maloom karna chahte ho ke client kis
state mein hai. Jab maine uska haath uthaya aur kaha ke dheere dheere neeche le aao, to
wo leaf ke jese dheere dheere gir raha tha, ruk ruk ke — yeh tha real unconscious
movement. Lekin phir wo zyada smoothly aur tezi se girne laga — iska matlab uska
conscious mind beech mein aa gaya. Uske baad maine kaha "slow down!", to lagta tha jaise
uska haath kisi string se bandha ho — ruka hua, phir phir se wo same unconscious
movement wapas aayi. Jab aap yeh dono movement pehchaan lete ho — conscious aur
unconscious — to aap ek ko amplify kar sakte ho aur doosre ko kam kar sakte ho. Isi se
maine usay trance mein aur gehra le jaaya.

Ab handshake movement ki baat karte hain: jab main aake haath barhata hoon, to wo kis
tarah respond karti hai? Jab log automatic unconscious programs follow karte hain — jese
haath milana ya cigarette ka packet nikalna — to unka movement conscious movement jesa
hi lagta hai, lekin direction clear hoti hai. Start se hi pata hota hai ke end kahan hoga. Lekin
phir bhi is tarah ke movement aur conscious movement mein subtle farq hota hai. Jab log is
tarah ke automatic programs mein hote hain, to unka movement smooth aur effortless lagta
hai, lekin unka dhyaan movement par nahi hota — wo automatic lagta hai.

Theek hai. Abhi jo maine Liz ke sath kiya, wo bhi aik process instruction ka example tha,
lekin thoda alag tareeqe se. Pehle maine thoda waqt liya trance state develop karne ke liye,
aur unconscious responses ko amplify kiya. Phir maine usay kaha ke wo “naye
understandings” hasil karein aur unhein ek “beneficial way” mein use karein. Lekin maine
kabhi define nahi kiya ke wo understandings kya hain, ya unka beneficial use kya hoga —
kyunke mujhe bhi nahi pata tha. Ye sab uske unconscious pe chhod diya.

Uske baad maine usay kaha ke wo ek sapna dekhe jismein wo seekhe ke unconscious ko
creative tareeqe se kaise use karna hai. Phir se, main kuch bhi direct meaning nahi de raha
tha — maine usay allow kiya ke wo khud apne liye best matlab nikale. Aur jab wo task
complete ho jaye, to uska haath dheere se neeche aa jaye — is cheez ko maine us
completion ke saath connect kar diya.

Jab tum process instructions detay ho, to aksar aise lafz istemal kartay ho jaise
“understanding,” “resource,” aur “curiosity.” In lafzon ko hum nominalizations kehtay hain.
Yeh asal mein process words hotay hain jo noun ban jate hain.
Jaise agar "understanding" ko wapas verb mein convert karo — "You will understand…" —
to tumhein samajh ayega ke is mein bohat si information delete ho gayi hai. Tum
samjhoge… kya? Kuch clear nahi.

Agar koi client tumse kehta hai:​

“Main satisfaction dhoond raha hoon,”​
to tum “satisfy” ko verb mein laa ke pooch saktay ho:​
“Tum khud ko satisfy karna chahtay ho kaise?”​
ya​
“Kis cheez ke baare mein satisfy hona chahtay ho?”

Lekin agar tum aisa nahi karte, to phir tumhein khud hi andr se guess karna padta hai —
khud hi blanks fill karne partay hain. Yehi kaam zyada tar therapists karte hain — woh client
ka matlab khud hi hallucinate kar lete hain.

Jaise agar main sirf yeh kehdoon:​

“Main support chah raha hoon,”​
to tumhein apne ander jaana hoga aur samajhna hoga ke kisi ko support karne ka matlab
kya hota hai.

Jab bhi main aise verbal patterns use karta hoon jo direct sensory experience se related
nahi hote, to main tumse chahta hoon ke tum actively uska matlab samajhne ki koshish
karo. Jab bhi tum yeh karte ho, tum aik process chala rahe hote ho jise hum
“transderivational search” kehte hain (naam fancy hai, kaam simple).

Yeh kya karta hai?​

Log jo lafz tum use karte ho unhein apne personal experience se link kar dete hain.
Hypnotist ke tor pe, main is natural habit ka faida uthata hoon. Main aisi language create
karta hoon jo nominalizations se bhari hoti hai — mujhe khud nahi pata hota ke woh exactly
kya matlab rakhti hai — lekin client khud uska relevant matlab fill kar leti hai.

Woman: Tumne process instruction ke doran kai baar kaha “That’s right.” Tumhara
maksad kya tha?

Jawab: “That’s right” kehna aik bohat simple technique hai kisi bhi response ko amplify
(barhawa dena) ke liye.​
Misaal ke tor par: agar main usay process instruction de raha hoon taake woh kuch seekh
sake, aur uske eyes move kar rahe hain (ya aur koi internal process ho raha hai), to “That’s
right” kehna aik indirect instruction hai ke “Yeh jo tum kar rahe ho, isi ko aur karo.”

Yeh uske experience ko pace karta hai aur mujhe bina clearly describe kiye uska response
barhane ka moka deta hai.

Example 3 (Thoda Maze ka Play):

Ann, chalo kuch interesting karte hain. Apni aankhen band karo.​
Sabse pehle, ek clear, rich, focused visual image banao ek wall ka.​
Us wall par kuch doors hain.

Kya wo doors ek jaise dikhte hain ya alag?​

Ann: Haan, farq hai.

Theek hai.​
Ab jo door sabse right par hai, woh tumhein aik aise jagah le jaye ga jo tumhein pehle
se familiar hai.​
Just keep looking at those doors.​
Aur jo door sabse left par hai, woh tumhein aik aise jagah le jaaye ga jo pehli nazar
mein new lage gi, lekin jab tum end tak pohonch jao gi, tumhein samajh ayega ke tum
pehle bhi wahan ja chuki ho.

Ab ek aur door bhi hai wahan — hai na?​

Ab khud ko feel karo ke tum us teesray door tak ja rahi ho, aur apna haath uska handle
pakar rahi ho —​
lekin abhi us door ko kholo mat.

Ann: Mujhe bas... darwaze ka handle feel nahi ho raha. Yeh ek swinging door hai.​
Tum ne aas paas dekha hi nahi. Isey bohat dhyan se check karo. Ho sakta hai yeh kisi aise
tareeqe se khulay jo pehle kabhi kisi darwaze ko khulta nahi dekha. … Kya tumhe is door ke
baare mein koi ajeeb cheez nazar aayi?​
Ann: Haan.​
Acha, ab bekaar mein isey dhakkay de kar kholne ki koshish karo. … Is door ko aur search
karo... jab tak koi ajeeb si khas baat na mil jaye... jo tumhare liye personal tor par meaningful
ho... jo tumhe is door ko waqai kholne mein madad de... ek aise tareeqe se jo kabhi pehle
nahi hua.​
Ann: Haan, maine kar liya.​
Ab, bohat dheerey se... main chahta hoon ke tum is mein se guzro, lekin us se pehle ke tum
is door ko poora khol do, samajh lo ke tum ek aise tajurbe mein jaane wale ho... jisme kuch
cheezein... bilkul bhi sense nahi banayengi... aur tumhare paas un cheezon ke liye koi alfaaz
nahi honge.​
Lekin wahi cheezein sabse zyada important hongi... aur wahi tumhari zindagi mein sabse
meaningful tabdeeli laayengi... ek insaan ke tor par... aisay andaaz mein jo tum abhi samajh
nahi saktay.​
Aur jab tum un cheezon ko notice karo, to un par bohat gehri tawajju do. Kuch aur cheezein
bhi hongi... jo tumhein pleasantly surprise karengi... jaise ke jab tum peeche mur kar dekho,
to wahan door hi na ho...​
Ab main chahta hoon ke tum apne environment ko observe karo... clarity ke saath... aur
gehrai se... kyunke wahan kuch aisa hai... jo tumne ab tak nahi dekha.​
Kuch aisa jo tumhare liye personal ahmiyat rakhta hai. Aur jab tumhari nazar upar neeche...
idhar udhar ghoomti hai... tumhe nahi pata chalega ke woh kya tha jab tak tum us se guzar
na jao... Bilkul theek.​
Ab, jab tum wapas jaoge, to sab kuch waisa nahi hoga jaisa pehle tha. Lekin jab tum wapas
jao, to usey aik opportunity samjho... aur aik yaad dilaawa... us cheez ka jo tumhe kaafi arse
se jaanna chahiye tha.
Ab jab tum yeh sab kuch consciously kar rahe ho, to mujhe pata hai... ke tumhara
unconscious mind kuch aur kar raha hai... aur woh kuch aur zyada important hai... jitna
tumhara conscious mind is waqt kar raha hai... kyunke unconscious level par... tum aik
foundation create kar rahe ho... usi aik object par.​
Aisi foundation jo ek solid structure banegi... jis par tum naye aur zyada satisfying future
behaviors develop kar sako.

Aur jab tumhara conscious mind environment explore karta rahega... aur yeh sochega —
waqai mein hairani se sochega — ke unconscious mind kya kar raha hoga... woh structure
tab bhi banta rahega... jab tum yeh process continue karte rahoge.​
Woh solid foundation... wahi base banegi... jo tumne tab banayi thi... jab tum pehli dafa
apne dono paon par kharay hue thay... us se pehle tum sirf crawling ka tajurba rakhte thay...
jab tak kisi ne tumhe uthaya... aur ek lamhay ke liye... tum apne dono paon par khud
balance kar gaye... unki madad ke saath.​
Lekin usi waqt... tum ek unconscious foundation build kar rahe thay... jo baad mein...
tumhare khud chalne... daudne... kharay hone aur baithne ka base ban gayi.

Aur woh object... ek nayi foundation ka aaghaz hai... ek poore naye tajurbaat ke silsilay ka...
aur mujhe pata hai... ke tumhara unconscious mind woh foundation jaldi bhi bana sakta hai...
ya dheerey bhi... lekin dono soorat mein woh thoroughly honi chahiye... taake baad mein
collapse na ho...​
Kyunke tumhare future behavior ke choices... tabhi possible honge... jab sab zaroori
elements unconscious level par mojood hon...

Aur woh available sirf tab honge... jab unka structure strong ho... samajhdari se... aur un
mein woh tamam elements hon... jo us behavior ko tum tak pohchne ke laayak banayein...
ek insaan ke tor par.

Ab is waqt tum ek dilemma ka samna kar rahe ho... ek aisi confusion jo tumne consciously
realize nahi ki thi... lekin ab tum usay realize karne lag gaye ho...​
Ya to tum wapas jao aur woh darwaza dhoondh kar baahir chalay jao... lekin kuch adhoora
chorh kar...​
Ya tum apne unconscious processes ko allow karo ke woh kaam mukammal karein tumhare
liye.​
Ya tum wahi ruko jahan ho... aur duniya ko... jo tumse baahir hai... usi par chorh do... aur
jitna waqt lage... le lo... taake ek aisi structure tayar ki ja sake... jisme woh tamam
ingredients hon... jo tumhare future development ke liye zaroori hain... jis ke baare mein
tumhe inform kiya gaya tha... ke woh tumhare liye beneficial hoga... ek insaan ke tor par.

Aur yeh faisla... sirf tum se aana chahiye... tumhare apne unconscious processes se... kahin
aur se aane ki koi zarurat nahi. Jab tum yahan baithe ho... tumhara unconscious system...
tumhara dil dhadkaye jaa raha hai... tumhari saans chal rahi hai... tumhare ragon mein
khoon ghoom raha hai... aur hazaaron aise kaam ho rahe hain jo tumhara conscious dimagh
notice bhi nahi karta...

Is baat ki ahmiyat yeh hai ke tum yeh samajh sako ke tum apne unconscious processes par
bharosa kar sakte ho... ke woh tumhara khayal rakhte hain.
Jab tum kisi bheed bhare raste par chal rahe hote ho... aur tumhara dimagh kisi aur soch
mein gum hota hai... tab bhi tum red light par ruk jaate ho... aur jab light green hoti hai to tum
aage barhne lagte ho...

Aur tum hamesha apne unhi unconscious processes par bharosa kar sakte ho... ke woh
kuch aisa karein... jo tumhare liye faida mand ho... agar unhein sahi tareeqe se trigger kiya
jaye. Aur yeh zaruri nahi ke pehle kyun nahi hua... zaruri sirf yeh hai ke aage jaake yeh
mumkin hai.

Aik dafa, bohot saalon pehle, jab maine kabhi koi therapy nahi ki thi, main aik aadmi ko
restaurant mein dekh raha tha. Woh aadmi... puri tarah se nasha mein tha... lekin jab bhi aik
makhi uske haath par baithti, uska haath reflex se hil jaata... aur makhi urr jaati. Yeh kaam
woh baar baar karta raha... uska conscious dimagh kuch nahi samajh raha tha... lekin uska
unconscious system bilkul theek, structured aur protective tha.

Jab tum kisi highway par drive kar rahe hote ho, kabhi roads slippery hoti hain, kabhi nahi.
Kabhi tumhara dhyan driving par hota hai, kabhi tum kisi aur khayal mein gum ho jaate ho.
Aur jab tumhara dimagh kahin aur hota hai, tab sabse zaruri baat yeh hai ke agar achanak
kuch aisa ho jo tumhari conscious attention maange... to tum foran wahan present ho jaate
ho.

Ab, Ann, main chahta hoon ke tum jitna time lena chahti ho... lo... aur sab kuch deeply
samajhne aur absorb karne ki koshish karo... lekin apne tareeqe se... is tarah ke yeh
tumhare liye sab se zyada useful ho.

Aur yeh zaruri nahi ke tumhara conscious dimagh samjhe ke yeh ho kya raha hai... zaruri sirf
yeh hai ke tumhara unconscious dimagh foran kaam karna shuru kare... naye behaviors ke
zariye tumhe yeh dikhaye... ke woh kis had tak tumhari zindagi ko badal sakta hai — abhi
bhi aur aane wale waqt mein bhi.

Abhi thodi der mein main tumse dobara baat karunga... aur tumse kuch sawal poochunga...
kuch ka tum asani se jawab dogi... kuch ke tum jawab nahi bhi dena chahti ho to koi masla
nahi... jawab dena zaruri nahi. Us se pehle main doosre logon se baat karunga... aur jab
main unse baat kar raha hunga to tumhein pata chal jaayega... kyunke meri awaaz unki taraf
hogi.

Is liye tum apna waqt lo... aur woh karo jo tumhein karna chahiye... chahe tumhe
consciously samajh aaye ya na aaye... haan, bas wahi karo... aur jitna conscious hona zaruri
ho, utna hi ho jao.

Ab baat karte hain ke maine Ann ke saath kya kiya. Un instructions mein kisi bhi cheez ka
content nahi tha (yaani asal baat kya karni hai, wo nahi bataya gaya). Magar process level
par do clear baatein batayi gayi:

1.​ Apne unconscious mind ko involve karo​

2.​ Apne maslay khud hal karo​

Dekho, jaise hum tumhein utilization methods sikhate ja rahe hain, waise hi pehle jo tools
sikhaye they, unhi ka istemal ho raha hai. Maine sabse pehle Ann ki har ek choti choti cheez
observe ki — jaise uski body language, breathing, expressions — aur jaise jaise wo thoda
thoda change karne lagi, maine apna behavior bhi dheere dheere change kiya, taake wo
meri lead follow kare.

Misal ke tor par: maine apni voice ka tempo uski breathing ke rhythm ke mutabiq set kiya.
Jaise jaise maine slow bola, uski breathing bhi slow hone lagi.

Maine uski skin tone, rang, pulse rate, eyelid movement — sab kuch monitor kiya. Ye sab
nonverbal cues mujhe feedback de rahe they. Mujhe pata hai log kaise lagte hain jab wo
deep altered states mein jaate hain — jahan physical body relax hoti hai.

Therapist: Ann, kya tum consciously aware ho ke is type ka experience tum pe asar karta
hai?

Ann: Haan.

Toh maine multiple pacing mechanisms use kiye aur feedback loops set kiye. Main uske
liye ek biofeedback machine ban gaya. Jaise jaise uski skin ka color change hua, maine
dheere dheere apni voice ka tone aur rhythm change kiya. Pehle to uske saath-saath
badla, phir usse zyada change kiya — taake wo aur gehri altered state mein chali jaye.

Jab main yeh sab nonverbally kar raha tha, saath hi verbal instructions bhi de raha tha —
dono conscious aur unconscious level par. Kuch baatein main jaan bujh ke isliye bol raha
tha taake mujhe feedback mile ke wo mere saath hai ya nahi. Jaise maine nasha mein
aadmi aur makhi wali kahani sunai, aur dekha ke kya uski ungli bhi twitch karti hai — aur hui.

Ann: Magar kya tumne meri resistance ka faida uthaya?

Therapist: Resistance ka koi concept hi nahi hota.

Ann: Jab tumne mujhe teen doors visualize karne ko kaha, to maine do doors upar dekhe
aur ek neeche ek archway jaisa. Jab tum pehle do doors ke baare mein bolne lage, to pehle
kuch lafzon ke baad hi mujhe pata tha main teesra door hi loongi — tum jo bhi keh lo. Kya
tumhein ye pata tha?

Therapist: Bilkul. Ye sab plan ka hissa tha. Sawal ye hai ke tumhara dimag sirf wo door hi
kyun lena chahta tha?

Ann: Main yehi poochh rahi hoon — tumhein kaise pata chala ke main pehle door nahi
loongi?

Mere teen doors (darwazon) ke descriptions main farq sirf lafzon ka nahi tha… jab maine
pehle door ke baare mein kaha:​
(low tonality, halki si nafrat jese mehsoos ho)​
“Ek door hay jahan jao ge aur sab kuch wahan andar ja kar familiar lagega,”​
to tone of voice khud ba khud yeh message de rahi thi ke mujhe pata hay tum konsa door
choose karo ge.
Lekin agar us waqt jab maine kaha “Ek door hay aur tum us mein jao ge to sab kuch familiar
hoga,” aur tumhara chehra chamak utha, rang aa gaya, aur tum ne halki si saans li — to
mujhe kuch aur signal milta. Fir main apni communication usi hisaab se adjust karta.

Ann: “Agar main pehla door choose karti to aap apni communication kaise structure karte?”

Dekho, “choose” main accept nahi karta. Agar tumhara unconscious response us door ki
taraf hota, ya mujhe signals milte ke tumhen familiar cheezein chahiyein, to main tumhein
usi door se guzarta… is expectation ke sath ke sab kuch familiar hoga.

Aur jab main us tarah se shuru karta to phir main kuch bhi kar sakta tha.​
Phir main us familiar ko unfamiliar bana deta:​
"Jab tum us cheez ko pakarne lagti jo tumhe lagta tha wahan hogi, tum surprise hoti ho
ke..."​
"Kya tum ne kabhi anda toda aur usme se chhota sa bunny rabbit nikla ho?"

Mujhe instructions deni hoti hain jinka purpose hota hay ke Ann ke unconscious mind
main change aaye.​
Sabse important rule yeh hai: Uske unconscious responses ki respect.

Iska matlab yeh hay ke mujhe har waqt samajhna hota hay ke kaunsa response
conscious hai aur kaunsa unconscious.

Jab teesray door ki baat hui —​

to maine kaha tha ke “try in vain” karna — yaani mehnat karna lekin fail hona.​
Agar main kehta “I tried to open the door,” to tum phir se try kar sakti ho. Lekin agar main
kehta hoon “I tried in vain to open the door,” to iska matlab yeh hay ke ab koi umeed hi nahi
hay.​
Ek possibility deta hay, doosra nahi.

Main aisa kyun karta hoon?​

Kyunkay jab tum aise door mein jaane wali ho jahan sab kuch unfamiliar hoga, to
experience ki shuruaat bhi unfamiliar honi chahiye — yani door khud bhi ajeeb tareeke se
khule. Is tarah door aur andar ka experience — dono congruent ho jaate hain.

Language structure carefully banata hoon.​

Agar main tumse kehta hoon:​
“Ab tum try kar sakti ho apna haath uthana,”​
to implication yeh hoti hay ke shayad tum uthaa lo, ya shayad nahi. Lekin agar main kehta
hoon:​
“Tum try kar sakti ho bekaar mein — apna haath na uthaanay ki...”​
to yeh deeper suggestion ban jaata hay.​
Phir tum sochti ho: “Kaunsa haath pehle nahi uthay ga... kyunkay mujhe laga tha woh wala.”

Jab tum notice karti ho to yeh aurat bilkul immobilized ho gayi — yeh trance phenomenon
hai.

Main ne uski resistance ka faida uthaya — negative suggestions ke zariye.​

Main ne usko kuch karne ko kaha, uska unconscious response dekha, phir us response ko
amplify kiya.​
Uska unconscious response tha immobility (harqat na karna) — to main ne usse kaha ke
aur zyada hilein.​
Aur jitna zyada maine usko move karne ko kaha, utni zyada wo still ho gayi.

Point yeh hai:​

Resistance bhi predict ki ja sakti hai — agar tumhare paas wo sensory awareness ho jisse
tum pata kar sako ke response conscious tha ya unconscious.

Aik communicator banne ke liye sabse zaroori ingredient hai sensory experience. Agar tum
yeh farq samajh lo ke kya cheez conscious hai aur kya unconscious, aur tum unconscious
responses ko amplify kar do, to tum kisi bande ka state of consciousness badal sakte ho.

Ek tareeqa yeh hai (jaise Fritz Perls karta tha) ke us se pocho:​

"Tumhe kis cheez ka ehsaas hai?"​
Agar wo kehti hai:​
"Main mehsoos kar rahi hoon ke main apne aap se baat kar rahi hoon, aur meri jaw
tight hai,"​
to tum kehte ho:​
"Lekin tumhe yeh nahi pata tha ke tumhare haath ke garam temperature ka ehsaas ho
raha hai jahan wo tumhare chehre ko choo raha hai... ya tumhare paon zameen ko
mehsoos kar rahe hain... ya tumhare elbows tumhari thigh se lag rahe hain... ya
tumhari saans, tumhara seena upar neeche ho raha hai."

Bus itna kehna kaafi hai. Us insan ka dhyan un jagahon pe jaayega jahan wo aam tor pe
nahi jaata, aur uska state change hona shuru ho jata hai. Yeh aik tareeqa hai
unconscious responses ko barhane ka.

Yeh farq nahi padta ke conscious mind involve hai ya nahi. Asal baat yeh hai ke uska
conscious mind ko kisi faarigh kaam mein laga do—jaise ke "Teen darwazon mein se
kaunsa choose karein?"​
Sach pocho to, kisi ko kya farq padta hai kaunsa darwaza choose hua?​
Jo zaroori hai wo yeh hai ke uska state of consciousness change ho jaye.

Jab wo darwaza cross kar leti hai, to main uske unconscious ko ek process instruction
deta hoon—positive change ke liye aik program.

Yeh program main bari vague language mein deta hoon, jaise ke pehle bataya tha. Zaroori
hai samajhna ke kab language vague rakhni chahiye aur kab nahi.​
Agar tum kisi ko process sikha rahe ho, to language ko unspecific rakho.​
Lekin agar kisi ko exact koi kaam karwana hai, jaise cake banana ya phobia theek karna,
to usko bari specific instructions chahiye.

Misaal ke taur pe, agar tum keh do:​

"Fridge se saari zaroori cheezein le kar, unhe sabse satisfying tareeqe se mila lo..."​
To cake nahi banega. Tumhe khud bhi nahi pata kya banega.
Log aksar vague language us waqt use karte hain jab unhe actually kisi aur ko koi
specific baat samjhani hoti hai, aur unhe andaza hi nahi hota ke agla banda confuse ho
gaya hai.

Jaise therapy mein log kehte hain:​

"Self-esteem zaroori hai, positive self-image rakho."​
Lekin koi yeh nahi batata ke self-esteem banani ka tareeqa kya hai, ya tumhe kaise pata
chalega ke tumhare paas hai ya nahi.

Sally: Yeh hota hai jab log apne personal experience ka muqabla karte hain.​
Tum: Woh kis cheez ka kis cheez ke sath muqabla karte hain?​
Sally: Woh apne childhood emotions ka muqabla karte hain apne adult understanding ke
sath — jo woh samajhte hain ke abhi present main ho raha hai.​
Tum: Theek, aur jab woh in dono ka muqabla karte hain, to us muqable ka kiya karte hain?​
Sally: Us ke baad unka apne aap ka image improve ho jata hai — unka self-esteem barhta
hai.​
Tum: Kaise?​
Sally: Dekhne se. Dekho, kabhi kabhi kisi insan ko apne aap se bura mehsoos hota hai
kyunke koi memory uske andar yeh feeling embed kar chuki hoti hai. To jab tum us insan ke
present experience ya knowledge ko use karke us purani memory ko dobara dekhte ho, to
us waqt tum us bande ki help kar rahe hote ho session mein. Phir woh cheezen dubara
rework kar sakti hai taake unki feelings alag ho jaayein—

Tum: Ek sawal poochta hoon — kiya tum samajhti ho ke tum jo keh rahi ho us mein aisi koi
cheez nahi jis se mujhe actually yeh samajh aaye ke tum keh kya rahi ho? Yeh tumhari
understanding pe tanqeed nahi hai, kyunke mujhe lagta hai tumhe pata hai tum kya keh rahi
ho. Lekin tum aise tareeke se baat nahi kar rahi jo mujhe samajhaye.

Sally: Shayad yeh meri knowledge base ki wajah se hai. Humari communication thodi alag
hai.

Tum: Nahi, masla yeh nahi. Kyunke mujhe pata hai tum mujhe kya batana chahti ho. Mujhe
isliye samajh aa raha hai kyunke log mujhe yeh pehle bhi kai baar bata chuke hain. Lekin jis
tareeke se tum baat kar rahi ho aur jis tareeke se tumhein baat karni chahiye thi taake mujhe
clearly samajh aaye — us farq ko samajhna bohat zaroori hai is lesson mein.

Samjho, tum jis tareeke ke vague (ghair-wazeh) descriptions use kar rahi ho, woh hypnosis
mein kaam aate hain. Agar mujhe chahiye ke tum kuch imagine karo ya hallucinate karo, to
main aise hi non-specific language use karta hoon.

Lekin agar mujhe chahiye ke tum koi khaas kaam karo, to mujhe tumhe woh kaam specific
tareeke se batana padega. Agar main tumhe koi kaam sikhana chahta hoon, to mujhe har
step detail mein samjhana hoga ke woh kaise karna hai.

Misal ke toor par agar mujhe lagta hai ke ek particular mental program tumhara self-esteem
barha sakta hai, to main keh sakta hoon:

“Theek hai, main chahta hoon ke tum apne past ki ek unpleasant memory
choose karo — aisi memory jahan tumhe laga ho ke tumne apni zindagi ka
 sabse bura kaam kiya. Aur jab tum us memory ko dekh rahi ho aur wohi feelings
mehsoos kar rahi ho jo us waqt ki thi, to abhi tak tumne yeh realize nahi kiya ke
aisi unpleasant memories ke bina tum ne zindagi mein koi bhi important cheez
nahi seekhi hoti. Agar tumne kabhi burn ka dard feel nahi kiya hota, to tum fire
se bachne ke liye smart kabhi nahi hoti.”

Yeh instruction thodi bohat specific hai. Yeh batata hai ke kis type ki memory chunni hai, kya
feel karna hai, aur usko kis angle se dobara sochna hai. Content detailed nahi hai, lekin
kaam karne ka tareeka clear hai.

Agar mujhe yeh farq nahi parta ke tum change kaise laate ho, to main apni language ko aur
bhi zyada unspecific kar deta hoon aur bohot saari nominalizations (aise lafz jo process
ko noun bana dete hain, jaise “learning”, “understanding”, “growth”) ka use karta hoon.

Ab imagine karo:

Aankhein band karo aur apne andar jao. 2, 3 ya 4 pleasant yaani achi yaadein choose
karo jo shayad aik dosray se related na lagti hoon… lekin tumhara unconscious mind
kabhi kuch randomly nahi choose karta... har yaad ke peechay koi na koi learning ya sabak
chhupa hota hai tumhare liye...

Tumhare past mein bohot saari experiences hain… aur har experience tumhari adult
samajh ke liye aik base ban sakta hai… jo shayad bachpan mein relevant nahi thi… lekin ab
usi base par kuch naya seekhne ka moka mil sakta hai.

Thori dair ruko… taake wo "relearning" apne aap form le…

Shayad tumhe aik image nazar aaye… jo abhi clear nahi hai… jise tum samajh nahi pa
rahe… aur jitna tum usay dekho, utna hi zyada lagay ke tum usay nahi samajh pa rahe ho…
lekin tumhara unconscious mind us image ke zariye kuch meaningful build kar raha hai…

Jab wo learning complete ho jaaye… to tumhara conscious mind usay appreciate kar
payega… aur phir achanak tumhare zehan mein naye ideas aur samajh anay lagti hai… ke
kaise khud mein change laana hai…

Lekin... yeh naye ideas us learning se directly link nahi hotay… agar koi idea truly
unconscious level se aya hai… to uske saath aik choti si hansi ya giggle lazmi hoti hai…

Ab dekho:

Yeh jo tareeqa maine Sally ke saath use kiya, woh ussi jaisa hai jo Sally ne pehle mere
saath use kiya. Lekin aik bara fark hai:

●​ Jab tum conscious mind ko kuch samjhana chahtay ho to tumhe specific aur clear
baat karni parti hai.​
 ●​ Jab tum unconscious mind ko kuch karwana chahtay ho to tum vague aur dreamy
language ka istemal kartay ho.​

Example kaafi sahi hai:

Ek scientist dost ne bataya ke wo aik mushkil problem pe kaam kar raha tha — shak hai
banda teen haftay se sahi se soya bhi nahi hoga. Uski maa uske bachon ka khayal rakh rahi
thi, ek din uske lab mein gai aur coffee di.

Usne poocha: "Kaam kaisa chal raha hai?"​

Scientist ne bola: "Bas theek hai."​
Maa boli: "Kya kaam kar rahe ho?"​
Usne puri mushkil theory samjhai. Maa ne sirf suna aur boli: “Mujhe samajh nahi aayi, main
to yeh kar leti.”

Aur uska simple solution ab aik high-end digital computer ka base bana.

Moral of the story:​

Kabhi kabhi jo log field ke andar hote hain, unka dimaag itna technical ho jata hai ke woh
seedhi baat karna bhool jate hain. Aur jo log field ke bahar hote hain, woh cheezein simple
soch ke solve kar lete hain.

Jab aap kisi field ke andar hotay ho, to aapka dimaag kuch specific cheezen dekhne ke liye
program ho jata hai—aur is programming ka nateeja hota hai ke aap kuch aur cheezen
ignore kar dete ho. Yeh system aapko kuch capabilities to deta hai, lekin saath hi limitations
bhi.

Jab main therapy field mein aya, log kehte the:​

"Acha therapist banne ke liye sirf itna hi kafi hai ke tum logon ki zarurat ko mehsoos
karo. Unki self-esteem barhao, unko unke behtareen version ka ehsaas dilao, takay
unki zindagi behtar ho jaye."​
Main puchta tha:​
"Self-esteem barhate kaise ho?"​
Jawab aata:​
"Unhein cheezen waisi dikhani hoti hain jaisi asal mein hain."

Lekin main iss baat se agree nahi karta. Meri soch hai ke asal kaam yeh hai ke unki pehle
se jo self-deceptions (apne bare mein jhoot ya illusions) hain, unse zyada faida mand aur
behtar illusions create karna chahiye. Kya cheez asal mein "real" hai, mujhe nahi pata.

Asal baat yeh hai ke kai lafz aise hotay hain jo meaningful lagtay hain, lekin asal mein hote
nahi. Nominalizations (jaise ‘respect’, ‘growth’, ‘intelligence’) aise lafz hote hain jo kisi
process ko noun mein convert kar dete hain, aur sunne mein weighty lagte hain—lekin
clarity nahi dete.
Agar aap kisi bande ke unconscious mind ko kuch karwana chahte ho, to nominalizations
ka use kaafi effective ho sakta hai—kyunki yeh vague aur suggestive hote hain.

Ab agar aap khud hypnotic process instructions banana chahte ho, to ek

general method yeh hai:

1.​ Apne past ka koi important experience choose karo.​

2.​ Us experience ko itni detail mein yaad karo ke tum us mein se koi nayi ya extra
learning nikal sako.​

3.​ Apne unconscious ko yeh signal do ke woh nayi learning ko future ke relevant
situations mein use kare.​

Agar kuch seekhna hai, to:

●​ Seekhne ka tariqa hona chahiye​

●​ Aur yeh maloom hona chahiye ke uss learning ko kab aur kahan use karna hai​

Jab tumhare paas yeh steps hon, to unhein hypnotic style mein deliver karo—matlab soft,
indirect language mein, jisme listener ko process karne ka waqt mile.

Yehi pattern hai deep unconscious transformation ka—na koi drama, na koi direct
command. Bas socho, mehsoos karo, aur andar se rewire ho jao.

Generative Change; Hypnotic

Dreaming
Ab main tumhein aik strategy dena chahta hoon jo generative change ke liye hai — chahe
tum khud ke liye personal changes karna chahtay ho ya therapist ho.​
Generative change ka matlab yeh nahi ke tum bas smoking chhorna chahte ho, weight lose
karna chahte ho, ya apne problems se nijaat chahte ho.​
Main in cheezon ko remedial changes kehta hoon.​
Generative change ka matlab hota hai ke tum koi kaam aur zyada behtareen tareeqay se
karna chahtay ho, ya koi nayi cheez seekhna chahtay ho.​
Yeh aisa nahi ke tum koi galat kaam theek karna chahtay ho — yeh yeh hai ke tum kisi
cheez ko aur bhi behtar banana chahte ho jo tum already achi tarah karte ho.
Jab main therapy start ki thi, to 6th ya 7th client ke sath aik ajeeb experience hua.​
Woh normal tareeqay se aya aur bola:​
“Main kuch changes lana chahta hoon.”​
Main ne poocha: “Kis type ke changes?”​
Usne kaha: “Main logon se milna aur unhein apna banana aur behtar banana chahta hoon.”​
Main ne poocha: “Kya tumhein abhi is mein koi problem hoti hai?”​
Usne kaha: “Nahi, main already is mein kaafi acha hoon.”

Main ruk gaya.​

Meri saari assumptions hil gayi.​
Main ne poocha: “Phir masla kya hai?”​
Woh bola: “Koi masla nahi. Main yeh kaam itna ache tareeqay se karta hoon, aur mujhe itna
maza aata hai — main chahta hoon ke main isse double mazay se karun!”

Main ne apne therapy ke tricks wale bag mein dekha... kuch bhi nahi tha!​
Kyunkay zyada therapies is type ke case ke liye design nahi hoti.

Tumhein sirf wohi cheezein theek karne tak limited nahi rehna chahiye jo tooti hui hain.​
Agar tum koi kaam acha karte ho — to badhiya!​
Lekin agar tum wohi kaam do guna behtar karna chaho, to us mein bhi koi restriction nahi.​
Aur jab tum generative changes karte ho, to aksar tum remedial problems khud-ba-khud
khatam kar detay ho.

Jab tum kisi aise area mein better bante ho jahan tum already ache ho, to kai baar jo dusri
“problems” hain woh bhi khud hi resolve ho jaati hain.

Ab main chahta hoon ke tum aik interesting strategy try karo jo generative change ke liye
hai, jismein hypnotic dreaming ka use hota hai.​
Meri observation ke mutabiq, hypnotic dreaming aur normal sapnay mein zyada farq nahi
— bas yeh ke hypnotic dream mein tum kharrate nahi maar rahay hotay.

Dreams ko use kar ke tum apni reality badal sakte ho.​

Sabse pehle, hamesha yeh tay karo ke tumhara desired outcome kya hai.​
Ho sakta hai tum X kaam aur behtar karna chahte ho, ya tumhara client X kaam aur behtar
karna chahta ho.​
Let’s say ke client already X kar leta hai, lekin tum chahte ho ke woh aur behtar ho jaye.

Phir tum apne aap se poochte ho:​

“Aisi kya cheezein hain jo kisi bhi insan ko kisi kaam mein aur behtar bana sakti
hain?”​
Is sawal ka jawab dete waqt general socho — kyunke tum hypnosis ke zone mein ho, Land
of Nominalizations mein.

Woman: Improved perceptions​

Man: Energy

Lekin “energy” jaise lafz istamaal karte waqt hoshiyar raho.​

Aise idioms jo already common usage mein heavily loaded hain, unka hypnosis mein use
risky hota hai.​
 Jaise — “energy crisis” ke media messages ne logon ke zehan mein sub-conscious
suggestions bhar diye hain ke energy ko conserve karo.​
To agar tum “energy” ko kisi bande ke andar ke oomph ya power ke liye metaphor ke tor pe
use karte ho, to ho sakta hai tumhein un subconscious national level ke ads se ladna pade
— jin ka subconscious impact yeh hota hai ke lethargic aur slow bano.

Ek mashhoor therapist aik metaphor use karti hai personal growth ke liye jiska naam hai
"yeasting." Unki aik seminar mein yeh dekha gaya ke kuch aurtein literally yeast infection
ka shikaar ho gayi! Yeh baat purane hypnotists ne pehle hi jaan li thi ke trance state mein
zyada tar language ko literal (harfi) tor pe process kiya jata hai. Idioms ya mutradif
phrases do tareeqon se samjhe jaate hain — ek unka asal (literal) matlab, aur doosra
unka muhavare ka matlab.

Jaise "kick the bucket" ka matlab hota hai marna — lekin trance mein dimagh ye bhi
samajhta hai ke kisi ne waqai aik bucket ko laat mari hai.

Agar aap baar baar kehte ho, "mere bachay mere liye headache hain," to sach mein sir dard
shuru ho sakta hai. Jo log back pain ke shikaar hote hain, wo aksar har cheez ko bolte hain:
"yeh meri kamar ka dard ban gaya hai," ya "main duniya ka bojh apne kandhon pe uthaye
ghoom raha hoon."

Is tarah ki language ko kehte hain "organ language" — aur yeh bohat powerful hoti hai
trance mein.

Phir therapist poochhta hai:

"Aisa aur kya ho sakta hai jo kisi bande ko koi kaam behtar karne mein madad de?"​
Aurat: "Knowledge, Practice."

Bilkul, koi nayi soch ya idea ya phir practice bhi kisi cheez ko behtar bana sakti hai. Lekin
agar banda already achha kar raha hai, to ho sakta hai usne kaafi practice kar li ho — phir
bhi agar usne nahi ki, to practice improvement ke liye zaroori cheez ho sakti hai.

Ab therapist bolta hai ke hum aik equation banane ja rahe hain.​

Wo kehta hai:​
"Mujhe pata hai ke tum mein se zyadatar log 'equation' shabd se nafrat karte ho — lekin
jitna tum usko nafrat karoge, utni hi wo mysterious aur interesting lagegi."

Yeh aik hypnotic language trick hai — jisko kehte hain:

"The more X, the more Y."​

Jaise: "Jitni zyada takleef hogi, utni hi gehri seekh milegi."

Yehi formula abreactions (yaani kisi ka purani painful memory mein doob jana) se nikalne
ke liye bhi kaam aata hai:
 "Jitna bura lagega, utna acha nateeja nikalayga."

Ab wo kehta hai ke hum dreaming ka use karke aik nayi equation banayenge:

●​ Kuch bhi cheez jo nayi soch, practice, ya behtar perception laaye — wo kisi kaam ko
behtar bana deti hai.​

●​ Hum yeh maanna shuru karte hain ke dreaming (khaas tor pe hypnotic dreaming)
yeh saari cheezen la sakti hai.​

Toh next step yeh hoga ke hum dreaming ko use karte hue generative change create
karain — yaani koi bhi cheez jo already achhi hai, usko aur bhi behtar banayein.

Exercise 7
Thodi dair mein main chahta hoon ke tum log aapas mein generative changes karo.​
Yeh kaam pairs mein karo taake sab log asaani se aur jaldi kar sakein.

Person B, tum koi aisi specific aadat ya behavior choose karo jo tum already achi tarah
kartay ho — aur ab usay aur behtar banana chahtay ho.

Person A, tum koi bhi induction technique use karo B ke saath — jab tak woh aik achi
khaasi gehri trance mein chala jaye.

Phir uska haath uthao aur bolo:

"Main ab tumhara haath utha raha hoon… aur main yeh nahi bataoonga ke isay
kab neeche lana hai… sirf us waqt jab tum khwab dekhna shuru karo…

Is khwab ke doran… ajeeb aur halki-halki cheezein hone lagengi…

Lekin tumhara unconscious jaanta hai ke kuch cheez… andar hi andar… taiyaar
ho rahi hai…

Jo aik idea mein tabdeel hogi…

Jo tumhari perception ko change karegi…

Jo tumhe yeh kaam — X — pehle se bhi zyada behtar karne ki salahiyat degi…

Kyunke is X mein kuch aisi baat hai… jo tumne nazarandaaz ki thi…

 Aur tumhara unconscious jaanta hai ke kaise wapas jaana hai… aur phir se
dekhna hai…

Overlook ka matlab kya hota hai? Overlook ka matlab hota hai ke tumne kuch
upar dekh liya…

Toh ab tum wapas ja sakte ho… apni nazar ko shift karo… guzri hui yaadon
par… unconscious level pe… jab tum woh kaam kar rahe thay…

Lekin is baar… tumhara unconscious usay naye nazariye se dekhega…

Aur samjhega ke jab tumne usay bohat hi behtareen tareeqe se kiya tha… toh
us waqt kya cheez mukhtalif thi…

Aur jab tumne usay bas theek-thaak kiya… toh kya kami thi…

Yeh farq samajhna… tumhare liye us farq ko aik ajeeb aur rangin khwab ke
zariye samne laye ga…

Tum woh khwab dekhte rahoge… usay enjoy karoge… aur hairaan rahoge…

Waqai mein hairaan… ke ab tum kya seekhne wale ho…

Aur yeh idea tumhare zehan mein tab tak nahi aayega… jab tak tumhara haath
aahista se neeche nahi aata… aur tumhare ghutne ko chhoo nahi leta…

Aur jaise hi yeh hota hai… woh idea tumhare zehan mein crystal clear ho
jaayega…

Aur tum yeh sochoge… ke tum itne bewakoof kaise ho sakte thay ke itni simple
cheez tumne pehle hi kyun nahi dekhi?"

Yeh aik aur example hai process instruction ka. Maine kaha ke "ek khwab dekho aur usse
kuch seekho", lekin uske saath saath maine yeh bhi bata diya ke unconscious uss seekhne
ka process kaise karega.

Mainne kaha:

●​ "Apne puranay tajurbaat ko wapas dekho,​

●​ Dekho ke jab tum acha kaam karte thay aur jab bas theek-thaak, unmein kya farq
tha,​

●​ Aur us farq ko aik naye nazariye ke zariye ek khwab mein samne lao."​

Agar main yeh sab baatain sidhe sidhe keh deta, bina metaphor ya trance language ke, to
yeh itna effective nahi hota.​
Na usme woh color hota, na woh punch,​
Aur na hi woh artful vagueness hoti jo unconscious ko naturally react karne ka moka deti.

Dreaming unconscious mind ka apna tareeqa hai ideas present karne ka — bina is baat ki
fikr kiye ke conscious mind turant samajh paye ya nahi.​
Woh dheere dheere evolve hota hai — jab tak ek meaningful idea ban kar samne aa jaye.

Thori der mein main chahta hoon ke tum log ek dosray ke sath generative changes karo.

Yeh kaam pairs (jodon) mein karo taake sab log jaldi se kar saken.​
Person B, tum koi aisa behavior chuno jo tum already achi tarah kartay ho, lekin usey aur
behtar banana chahtay ho.​
Person A, tum apni marzi ka koi bhi induction use karo B ke liye, jab tak woh aik gehri
trance state mein chala na jaye.

Phir uska haath uthao aur kaho:​

"Main ab tumhara haath utha raha hoon, aur main tumhein nahi kahunga ke ise
neeche rakho jab tak tum khud aik khwab dekhna shuru na karo...​
Is khwab ke dauraan... ajeeb aur ghair-wazeh cheezen hone lagengi...​
Lekin tumhara unconscious jaanta hai ke kuch andar hi andar ban raha hai...​
Jo ek idea mein crystallize ho jayega...​
Jo tumhari perception mein tabdeeli laye ga...​
Jo tumhein yeh kaam — X — aur bhi behtari se karne ke qabil bana dega jitna tumne socha
bhi nahi hoga...​
Kyun ke X ke baare mein ek cheez tumne overlook kar di thi...​
Aur tumhara unconscious jaanta hai ke kaise wapas jaa kar use phir se dekha jaye...

'Overlook' karna matlab tumne zyada upar dekha...​

Ab tum wapas jaa sakte ho...​
Apni nazar ka rukh badal sakte ho...​
Purane tajurbaat ke darmiyan... unconscious level pe... jab tum woh kaam kar rahe thay...​
Magar is dafa... tumhara unconscious usay naye tareeqe se dekhega...​
Aur samjhega ke un dafaon mein jab tumne kaam badi khoobsurti se kiya...​
Aur un dafaon mein jab tumne sirf theek-thaak kiya...​
Unmein kya farq tha...

Woh farq tumhein aik mysterious dream mein dikhaya ja sakta hai...​
Tum wo khwab dekhte raho ge...​
Aik bohat hi colorful khwab...​
Aur usay puri tarah enjoy karo ge... aur socho ge...​
Waqai socho ge... ke tum kya seekhne walay ho...​
Aur yeh idea tab tak tumhare zehan mein nahi aayega...​
Jab tak tumhara haath slowly neeche na aaye​
Aur tumhare ghutne ko na choo le...​
Aur jab aisa ho jaye, to woh idea tumhare zehan mein crystallize ho chuka hoga...​
Aur tum yeh soch kar hairan ho jao ge ke tum pehle yeh kaise miss kar gaye."
Yeh aik aur misaal hai process instruction ki.​
Main ne kaha ke aik khwab dekho aur us se kuch seekho.​
Lekin saath hi saath main ne unconscious ko yeh bhi bataya ke kaise seekhna hai.​
Main ne kaha:​
"Wapas jao, apne purane tajurbaat ka jaiza lo, un lamhon ka farq samjho jab tumne achha
kaam kiya aur jab sirf theek kiya,​
Aur yeh nayi perception aik khwab ke zariye samne lao."

Lekin agar main yeh sab kuch seedha seedha keh deta, to yeh utna asar nahi karta.​
Usme na rang hota, na power.​
Aur usme woh artful vagueness nahi hoti jo unconscious ko naturally react karne ka moka
deti hai.

Dreaming aik bohat natural tareeqa hai jiske zariye unconscious apna material pesh karta
hai —​
Asay tareeqe se jo conscious mind samajh nahi sakta...​
Aur phir dheere dheere woh cheez conscious mind ke liye meaningful ban jati hai.

Aadmi: Agar mujhe kisi aise maslay ka hal dhoondhna ho jisme itne zyada factors hoon ke
main un sab ko consciously calculate nahi kar sakta, to phir main kya karun? Aise case mein
approach kya honi chahiye?

Chalo is tarah karte hain. Wapas dream technique ki taraf chalte hain. Yeh meri favorite
instructions mein se ek hai. Us bande ko chhe (6) dreams dekhne do — har dream same
hoga, lekin uska content aur characters alag honge. Pehla dream bilkul bhi samajh nahi
aayega, kyunki usmein bohot zyada cheezein hongi. Dusra dream bhi properly samajh nahi
aayega, lekin uska unconscious mind har dream ke sath meanings aur samajh ikattha karta
jaayega. Aise, chhata dream tak uska conscious mind bhi samajhne lagega ke ho kya raha
hai.

●​ Pehla dream: total confusion.​

●​ Dusra dream: thoda kam confusion.​

●​ Teesra dream: aur thoda kam confusion.​

●​ Chautha dream: clarity shuru, lekin samajh nahi aayegi poori.​

●​ Paanchwa dream: samajh bilkul zubaan ke kinare pe mehsoos hogi.​

●​ Chhata dream: achanak se poora matlab conscious level pe samajh mein aa

jaayega.​

Yeh kaafi direct method hai — lekin indirectly kiya gaya. Zabardast instruction hai.

Ab aapas mein pair banayo aur in utilization methods ko try karo. Tum log already kaafi
inductions practice kar chuke ho, to induction mein zyada waqt waste mat karo. Apne
partner ko bas yeh keh do ke aankhein band karo, relax karo, aur assume karo ke woh
hypnosis mein hai. Yeh ek quick induction hai.

Phir usko ya to koi process instruction do, ya usay yeh kehkar hypnosis dream use karne
ko bolo ke woh kuch seekh sake. Agar process instruction do to woh pehle se zyada
detailed aur multi-step hona chahiye. Aisi steps do jo learning tak le jaayein.

Jo kuch bhi ab tak seekha hai, sab kuch use karo. Agar kuch unexpected ho jaaye, to usay
bhi apni process mein include kar lo — usay aise turn karo ke woh bhi tumhari desired
outcome ko support kare.

OK, ab shuru karo.

Clean-up Routines
Dorothy: Agar koi shakhs trance mein ho aur ek ghanta khatam ho jaye lekin kaam abhi
adhoora ho to kya karna chahiye? Agar woh kisi process ke beech mein ho to?

Is tarah ki situation ke liye tumhein aik tareeqa develop karna chahiye. Main aise tareeqon
ko "clean-up routines" kehta hoon. Socho tum family therapist ho — maa yahan, baap
yahan, aur baby Joan wahan. Sab ne abhi-abhi jhagra shuru kiya hai aur tumhara agla client
2 minute mein aane wala hai. Aise situations mein, tumhare paas 2-minute ke "tape-loops"
hone chahiyein — content-wise ye bilkul meaningless hon, lekin process-wise ye
extremely meaningful hon — taake sab kuch wrap up ho jaye.

Misal ke tor par:​

"Hum ne bohat mehnat ki hai aur bohat si cheezein tumhare unconscious level par
stir hui hain jo bohat hi faida mand sabit hongi. Agle kuch dinon aur hafton mein, tum
dekhoge ke tumhare andar se kuch samajh ubhar kar saamne aayegi. Jo kaam hum
ne yahan shuru kiya hai, uska asar tumhari soch aur behaviour par hoga, aur tum
khud hairan ho jaoge ke tum mein kya kya changes aa rahe hain. Ab tum apne woh
tamam hisay, jo tum ne aaj express kiye, wapas apne andar samet lo — un sab ki
energy ab tumhare unconscious ke paas hai taake yeh process meaningful tareeqay
se continue kar sake."

Yeh aik aur process instruction ka example hai. Tum sirf process level par baat karte ho
aur kehte ho "Khud ko wapas jod lo." Ismein tum post-hypnotic suggestions bhi daal dete
ho ke unka behavior agle kuch dino mein khud-ba-khud badalta rahega. Aisi instructions
asal mein yeh keh rahi hoti hain:​
"Yeh process chalta rahega bhale hi main yahan na hoon."

Tum yeh bhi suggest kar sakte ho ke uska unconscious solution search karta rahega aur
kal subha jaagne se pehle kisi optimal solution tak pohanch jayega.
Misal:​
"Aaj dupahar ke waqt tumhara unconscious dimaagh kaam karta rahega — mukhtalif
possible solutions ko test karega taake woh solution mil jaye jo tumhare liye sab se
zyada munasib ho. Tumhara conscious dimaagh iss dauraan apna routine ka kaam,
safety aur daily tasks theek tareeqay se karta rahega."

Is tarah ka ending routine dena important hota hai — yeh aik integration hoti hai, shakhs
ko dubara se assemble karne ka process hota hai.

Mujhe yaad hai jab main naya naya gestalt therapy kar raha tha, maine group mein aik
shakhs ke sath demonstration ki. Mujhe kuch samajh nahi aaya ke main kya kar raha hoon,
aur mujhe laga kuch bhi nahi hua. Lekin end mein maine bas yeh keh diya:

"Irv, aaj humne kaafi kaam kiya hai aur tumhare andar bohat kuch hil chuka hai. Tum
agle do hafton mein in sab changes par ghour karo jo is kaam ka nateeja honge. Aur
agar yeh changes bohat hi radical hon to hairan mat hona — yeh sab tumhari zarurat
ke mutabiq honge."

Ye sab kuch kehne ka matlab kuch nahi tha — lekin yeh post-hypnotic suggestion kaam
karti hai.

Agar tum trance work kar rahe ho kisi workshop exercise ka hissa ban'ke, aur tumhe jaldi
khatam karna hai kyunke humein tum logon ko wapas bulana pada, to sabse pehle thoda
waqt apne partner ke saans lene ka rhythm match karne mein lagao. Phir yeh keh sakte ho:

"Ab main dobara tumhare sath judne ka moka chahta hoon... Apne aap ko pura karne
do... woh sab important aur meaningful cheezein... jo is process ke dauran tumhare
liye available hui hain... Apne tajurbe se koi bhi... refreshment ya naya energy ka
ehsas... le lo... aur apne hisaab se... wapas yahaan aa jao... mere sath is room mein
dobara shamil hone ke liye... taake hum is seminar ke agle phase ka aaghaz kar
saken."

Yeh ek cleanup technique hai jo khas tor pe is workshop ke liye suit karti hai. Jo principles
maine use kiye isko banane ke liye, wahi principles pehle diye gaye examples mein bhi the.

Building Generalizations: Hypnotic Utilization

Agla sawal yeh hai: "Tum kaise kisi shakhs ko kuch experiences deke unse ek seekh ya
learning develop karwate ho?"

Socho agar mere paas aik magic wand ho, jisse main kisi ke sir pe 5 dafa tap karun aur har
dafa usay ek naya tajurba ho. Tum kaisi 5 experiences doge kisi shakhs ko jo usko change
kar dein?

●​ Apna koi client imagine karo.​

 ●​ Decide karo ke tum chahte ho woh kaise different ho jaye.​

●​ "Zyada self-esteem" jesa vague goal mat socho — sensory level pe socho. Woh
shakhs physically ya behaviorally kaise different nazar aayega?​

●​ Ab socho: usay aisi kaunsi experience chahiye jisse woh waisa act kar sake?​

Dekho, experiences ka ek sequence hi hota hai jo hum sab ke andar old beliefs aur
generalizations create karta hai. Chahe belief ka content kuch bhi ho, lekin process same
rehta hai. Phobia wale log elevators, paani, andheray rooms ko danger se link kar lete hain
— woh bhi ek hi tajurbe se.

Tum sab ke paas learning ke baare mein bhi apne-apne generalizations hain jo tumhari
hypnosis seekhne ki ability ko effect kar rahe hain. Kuch logon ke paas yeh generalization
hoti hai ke: "Main jo bhi chahoon, woh seekh sakta hoon." Aur yeh aksar past mein
kamiyabi ke kuch examples par based hoti hai.

Kuch log aik hi tajurbe se generalization bana lete hain (jaise phobias), jabke kuch ko repeat
karte hue multiple examples chahiye hote hain.

Jab tum kisi ko change karna chahte ho, to:

●​ Usay naye experiences do jisse woh nayi aur useful generalization banaye.​

●​ Pehla step hota hai: Decide karna ke tum kis tarah ki generalization usmein develop
karwana chahte ho.​

Question: “Kaise pata chale ke kis generalization ki zarurat hai?”

Ek aadmi bolta hai: “Usse poocho ke woh kisi aur mein kya admire karta hai.”

Ye ek tareeqa ho sakta hai. Lekin speaker kehta hai:

"Main yeh method follow nahi karta. Mera maanna hai ke agar usay waqai
kisi cheez ki zarurat hoti, to woh pehle hi seekh chuka hota."

Main yeh “logon par kuch impose nahi karna chahiye” wali philosophy nahi manta, kyunke
asal mein tum waise bhi impose kar rahe hote ho — sirf tumhe khud nahi pata hota.

Main aise logon se milta hoon jo aise hi therapy se kharab hue hote hain. Jab main private
practice mein tha, to aadhe se zyada clients aise hote the jo pehle hi kisi therapist se bigaḍ
chuke hote the, aksar "non-directive" therapist se. Therapist sochta hai ke woh madad kar
raha hai, lekin asal mein woh banda aur confuse ho jata hai.
Aam zindagi ka formula:​
"Tum chahe ya na chahe, tum influence kar rahe ho. Behtar yeh hai ke tum jaan bujh
ke behtar influence karo."

Misal ke tor par, kuch therapists apne clients ko self-esteem ke bare mein sikhate hain, aur
phir wo is baat par bura mehsoos karte hain ke unke paas self-esteem nahi hai. Yeh baar
baar hota hai. Aksar log jab pehli dafa therapist ke paas jaate hain, to wo sirf udaas hote
hain—lekin jab unhein self-esteem ka concept sikhaya jata hai, to wo is baat par bhi bura
mehsoos karne lagte hain ke wo udaas kyun hain. Aur is tarah unka haal aur bura ho jata
hai. Jab aap logon ko koi concept dete ho, to yeh zaroori hai ke aap usay is tarah samjhao jo
unko kisi faidemand jagah le jaye.

Kuch therapists apne clients ko yeh sikhate hain ke apni limitations ko accept karo taake
khush reh sako. Kabhi kabhi yeh approach acha kaam karta hai. Magar agar koi insaan
hysterical paralysis ke sath aaye, to yeh tareeqa kaam nahi karega.

Aik aadmi poochta hai: “Aap 'khushi' se kya matlab le rahe ho?”

Main yahan philosophy ki baat nahi kar raha. Main un logon ke personal, internal experience
ki baat kar raha hoon jahan unhein dard ka na hona mehsoos hota hai, aur unka nervous
system is tarah stimulate hota hai ke wo kehte hain “haan, mujhe yeh acha lag raha hai.”
Jab log therapy mein rote-dhoote aur complain karte hue aate hain, to meri nazar mein wo
khush nahi hote.

Agar aap khud apni zindagi ka theek se sambhal nahi kar pa rahe, to doosron ki madad
karna mushkil ho jata hai. Jab main aik training program chalata tha, to uska sabse strict
hissa yeh hota tha ke students ko turant apni personal life theek karni hoti thi. Agar mujhe
pata chalta ke kisi ki biwi se sari raat "meaningful" baatein ho rahi hain lekin cheezein theek
nahi chal rahi aur wo affair karne ka soch raha hai, to main foran use program se nikaal deta
tha. Sab ko pata hota tha ke main aisa karun ga, is liye wo apni zindagi theek rakhte the.

Mere liye sab se zaroori cheez yeh hai ke log apna khayal rakh saken. Sirf zinda rehna nahi,
balke aisay maqamaat tak pahunchna jo unko enjoy ayein. Main to mazaak karta hoon ke
meri agli kitab ka naam hoga: “OK is not good enough.”

Therapy ka traditional model hota hai: banda toot gaya hai, udaas hai, aur aap use theek
karte ho. Magar mere nazdeek, yeh sirf aadha kaam hai. Mujhe lagta hai ke hum aise
models banayein jo "generativity" (naye behtareen tareeqe paida karna) par mabni hon.

Ab physical health ke field mein log is taraf aa rahe hain. Pehle medicine ka model sirf repair
par tha. Magar asli kamaal medicine ne sirf aik kaam mein dikhaya: vaccines. Jaise polio ka
tika—jo kisi ko bimaar hone se pehle hi bacha leta hai. Yeh repair nahi, prevention hai.

Agar aap generative ho, to aap cheezon ko is tarah badalte ho ke wo shuru se behtar ho
jaayein. Aap system ke naturally existing strengths ka faida utha kar usay aur effective
banate ho. Main har cheez ko isi nazariye se dekhta hoon. Main chahta hoon ke jo kuch bhi
ho, wo sirf theek na ho—balke expected se behtar ho.
Mera personal success ka standard yeh hai: kya banda zyada khush hai? Ye meri personal
ethics hain. Aap chaho to logon ko udaas bhi bana sakte ho. Har kaam ka aik target hota
hai. Agar aap lawyer ho, to aap kisi ko khush nahi, balke kisi baat ka yaqeen dilana chahtay
ho. Agar aap clinician ho, to umeed hai ke aap khushi aur competency ko apne target
banaoge.

Bohat se therapist "understanding" ko aik target state bana lete hain. Clinicians ne aise
models banaye hain jo logon ko ye samajhne mein madad karte hain ke unke sath kya
masla hay. Logon ko akhir mein ye sab pata chal jata hay ke problem kya hay, kahan se aya,
lekin phir bhi wo duniya ka samna nahi kar pate, khush nahi reh pate.

Mujhe kai aise clients refer kiye gaye jo aik lambi tafseelat bhari kahani sunate ke unke
issues kaha se shuru huay, unka kya asar hai. Main unse kehta: “Theek hay, lekin tum
chahte kya ho?” Wo kehte: “Mujhe ye sab change karna hay!” To main kehta: “To phir ye sab
mujhe batane ka kya faida tha?” Wo kehte: “Aapko to ye sab pata hona chahiye!” Main
kehta: “Nahi, mujhe ye sab nahi chahiye.” Wo heran reh jate, kyun ke unhon ne 5 saal aur
$50,000 laga diye hote sirf ye samajhne ke liye ke wo screwed up kyun hain.

Husband-wife ka masla bhi ye hota hay ke wo “main sahi hoon” ko target bana lete hain.
Aakhir mein dono sahi to hote hain, lekin dono hi dukhi bhi hote hain.

Hum chahtay hain ke aap hypnosis ke zariye learning create karna seekhein. Aap in
techniques se kisi ko bhi koi bhi outcome de sakte hain. Agar chahein to kisi ko unhappy bhi
bana sakte hain, bimaar bhi, ya phir unko hysterical paralysis ya phobias bhi de sakte hain.
Ye sab mere liye fruitful nahi lagte. Lekin agar aapka yahi irada hay to ye aapka ethical
decision hoga.

Mera sawaal ye hai: “Aap kisi ko kaisi experiences de sakte hain jo aik useful generalization
create karein?” Ye aik practical sawaal hay.

Ek banda kehta hai: “Agar kisi ke paas pehle se koi galat generalization hai to usko aik
counterexample de dein.”

Haan, ye kaam karega. Mujhe lagta hai ke learning kai tareeqon se hoti hai. Conscious mind
ko kuch naya sikhane ka behtareen tareeqa hai ke usay uske belief ka aik zinda
counterexample de do. Iski aik zabardast misaal hamari kitab Magic I mein hai.

Aik group session mein aik aurat zameen pe let gayi aur zor zor se rone lagi. Wo chillayi:
“Main bilkul helpless hoon, log mujhe masal kar chalay jate hain!” Main ne usse pucha: “Kya
matlab log tumhare upar se chal jate hain?” Phir main uski taraf chala ke jaise main uspar
paon rakh kar guzr jaunga. Wo meri workshops mein pehle se aa rahi thi, to aqalmand thi –
turant uth kar hatt gayi.

Usne kaha ke wo do aur auraton ke sath rehti hai, aur wo usse sab kaam karwati hain, uski
zindagi control karti hain. Main ne kaha: “To kuch primitive karo, jaise ghoom kar keh do:
‘Aesa mat karo.’”

Ye kehne par uska reaction itna intense tha ke uska chehra aur bhi zyada safed ho gaya.
Wo boli: “Main aesa nahi keh sakti.” Main ne kaha: “Kya matlab nahi keh sakti?” Usne kaha:
“Main unko ‘nahin’ nahi keh sakti.” Main ne pucha: “Agar tum unse keh do ke tum bartan
nahi dhologi to kya hoga?” Wo boli: “Ye to impossible hay.”

Wo humein aik typical psychological kahani sunane lagi jo kisi psychiatrist ko pasand aaye.
Usne bachpan mein yeh seekha tha ke “nahin” kehna mana hai. Aik din wo apni maa ke
saath store jaane wali thi, uske walid ne kaha: “Kyoon na tum mere saath ghar pe raho?”
Usne jawab diya: “Nahin, mein mummy ke saath jaungi.” Jab wo mummy ke saath wapas
aayi to dekha ke uske walid zameen par khoon mein lathpat paday hain. Unka haath phone
se sirf 2 inch door tha. Wo pehle se alcoholic thay, aur usi din unki maut ho gayi.

Is waqiya ke baad us ladki ne kabhi “nahin” nahi kaha. Is ka matlab yeh bhi tha ke usne apni
virginity zyada der nahi sambhali. Wo homosexual thi, jo mujhe interesting laga. Us aik
experience ne uske zehan mein yeh generalization bana di thi ke agar wo "nahin" keh degi
to koi mar jaayega.

Main ne usay aik double-bind mein daala. Main ne kaha ke jaa kar us kamray ke dusre
kone mein kisi ko “nahin” kaho. Usne jawab diya: “Nahin, mein yeh nahi karungi.” To maine
turant kaha: “Kya main mar gaya?” Wo hairan ho gayi: “Kya?” Maine kaha: “Tum ne abhi
mujhe 'nahin' kaha hai. Kya main mar gaya?” Uske chehre par tabdeeli aayi aur boli: “Aap to
special ho.”

Main ne usay aik counterexample diya—ek misaal jisme uska purana belief galat sabit hua.
Ab wo mujhe “nahin” keh kar bhi dekh sakti thi ke koi nahi mara. Magar abhi bhi wo kisi aur
ko “nahin” nahi keh sakti thi. Is liye maine dusre logon ko kaha ke usay bolen ke “nahin”
kaho. Taake uske zehan mein aur bhi misaalein ban sakein.

Yeh kaafi waqt le gaya. Samajhne wali baat yeh hai ke agar insaan ko pata ho ke wo ghalat
hai, lekin yeh na pata ho ke sahi kya hai—yeh kaafi takleef deh hota hai. Us waqt mujhe
hypnosis karni nahi aati thi. Agar aati hoti, to mein uska belief asaani se, bina struggle aur
pain ke badal sakta tha.

Ek aur tareeqa yeh hai ke jab bhi tum kisi cheez ko “naya” define karte ho, to tum ek naya
generalization bana sakte ho bina purana todhe.

Example:​
Agar tum kisi bache ko multiplication sikhate ho aur usay kuch bhi nahi aata, to tum ek nayi
soch ya rule sikha sakte ho bina kisi purani soch ko todhe.

Judy ka point:​
Uska kehna tha ke multiplication seekhate waqt tumhe generalizations todhni parti hain
kyunke multiplication basically addition se milti julti hoti hai. To jab mein bacho ko sikhati
hoon ke yeh addition ki tarah hai, to mein purani soch ko todhti hoon.

Magar agar tum multiplication ko ek bilkul alag cheez ke tor par sikhate, to koi purana belief
todhna na padta.

Bottom line:​
Generalizations tabhi toot'ti hain jab tum cheezon ko jodte ho ya relate karte ho. Agar tum
new cheez ko totally new frame mein samjhate ho, to purani belief kharaab nahi hoti.
Mard: Ye hypnosis ka workshop aik misaal hai. Mujhe nahi pata tha ke mujhe hypnosis ke
baare mein kuch bhi maloom hai jab tak main yahan nahi aaya. Mere liye ye bilkul naya
learning experience hai, is liye main kisi purani soch ko nahi tod raha—main sirf nayi soch
bana raha hoon.

Main yeh keh raha hoon ke nayi generalizations banane ke kam az kam do tareeqay hain:

1.​ Purani soch ko todna​

2.​ Ya seedha ek nayi soch banana​

Logon ke andar aik zabardast baat yeh hoti hai ke woh apne andar mukhtalif ya takraati
soch (incompatible generalizations) rakh saktay hain. Koi rule nahi jo roke.

Kuch therapies ka maqsad hota hai ke insan ke andar sab mukhtalif soch khatam karke use
ek hi direction mein daal diya jaye—ke woh consistent ho jaye.​
Unke mutabiq “authentic” insaan woh hai jo har waqt ek hi type ka soche.

Lekin asal mein zarurat nahi ke har purani soch ko toda jaye. Aksar simple hota hai ke kisi
cheez ko “nayi cheez” keh diya jaye—jiska matlab hai ke ab insaan ke paas koi purani soch
ya limitation hi nahi hai.​
Woh yeh nahi jaane ga ke kya karna hai, lekin kam az kam koi rukaawat nahi hogi jab woh
seekh jaye.

Achhi baat ye hai ke aap kisi bhi cheez ko “nayi” declare kar saktay ho.​
Misal ke taur par, agar kisi ke zehan mein yeh generalization hai ke woh apne life partner ke
saath nahi banata, to woh “getting along” ka concept chhor kar ek naya relationship model
bana sakta hai—jo pehle kabhi nahi tha.

Kyunke pehle sirf survival mode mein tha: har waqt ya to jeetna tha ya sabit karna tha ke
woh sahi hai. Kabhi yeh socha hi nahi ke agar dono log sirf ek doosray ko khush karne ki
koshish karein to kya ho sakta hai.

Agar main tumhare liye ek naya goal define kar doon, aur phir tumhein consciously ya
unconsciously woh seekhne ka tareeqa sikha doon, to tumhari purani limitations tumhari
madad karengi.​
Woh tumhein naye goal mein rukawat nahi daalengi—woh sirf un bekaar purani aadaton ko
rokengi jo pehle kaam nahi karti thi.​
Is tarah purani limitations asset (faida) ban jaati hain.

Aur aik tareeqa yeh hai ke tum unconsciously aise learnings banao jo sab kuch cover kar
lein.​
Greek society mein aik group hota tha jo mathematics ko le kar occult ka kaam karta tha.
Aaj kal maths science hai, lekin pehle log samajhtay thay ke mathematicians jadugar hain.

Unho ne pehle positive numbers discover kiye. Phir subtraction aur negative numbers. Is
wajah se mathematicians mein conflict ho gaya:​
Kuch kehte sab kuch addition hai.​
Kuch kehte subtraction hi sahi tareeqa hai.

Phir aik banda aaya aur bola, “Dono concepts ko ek hi framework mein rakh lo aur isay
algebra keh do.”​
Algebra ka idea kisi purani soch ko todne ka nahi tha—yeh sirf zyada inclusive approach thi.
Bas larger picture dekhni thi.

Main pehle kai psychotherapy groups mein gaya ke dekhu leaders kya karte hain.​
Ek seminar mein unho ne humein ek kamre mein band kar diya aur kaha: “Tum sab
bewakoof ho.”​
Wajah? Kyunke tumhein apne aap se buray feelings hotay hain.

Woh kehtay thay: Tum bewakoof ho kyunke tum kabhi apne aap ko bekaar, stupid ya
helpless mehsoos karte ho.​
Aur yeh bewakoofi is liye hai kyunke tumhare paas doosra option bhi to hota hai: khud ko
acha mehsoos karna.

Unka kehna yeh hay ke kai therapists ka maqsad sirf patient ko “understanding” dena hota
hai — matlab ke banda samajh jaye ke us ke issues kis wajah se hain. Lekin samajhne ke
bawajood bhi log change nahi kar pate. Log therapist ke paas jaa kar 5 saal aur $50,000
laga ke bas apni problems ka background samajhte hain, par life mein aage kuch behtar
nahi hota.

Phir wo couples ki baat karta hai — jo sirf “right hone” ke chakkar mein ek dusre ko
unhappy karte hain. Matlab dono sahi sabit ho jaate hain, par dono dukhi rehte hain.

Uske baad hypnosis ke context mein wo poochta hai ke:

"Aap kisi ko kaisi experience de sakte ho jo unke liye ek useful generalization

banaye?"

Aik banda kehta hai: “Counterexample dena.”​

Us par wo agree karta hai, ke haan — agar kisi ko koi ghalat belief ya generalization hai, to
us ke samne us belief ke khilaf ek real example rakh do, to banda seekh jaata hai.

Phir wo aik example deta hai aik aurat ka jo "no" nahi keh pati thi. Wo ro rahi thi, ke log us
ke upar se guzar jaate hain. To us ne us se mazaak mein kaha ke “achha, log tum par
guzar jaate hain?” aur chalanay laga us par, to wo smartly hatt gayi.​
Phir wo keh rahi thi ke wo roommates ko no nahi keh sakti. Jab us se kaha gaya ke “unse
keh do ke dishes nahi karogi,” to wo ghabra gayi aur kaha: “Yeh possible hi nahi.”​
Yani us ka dimaag yeh generalization bana chuka tha: “Main no nahi keh sakti.”​
Aur usko todhne ke liye uske belief ke opposite cheez dikhayi gayi — ek counterexample.

Next part mein wo batata hai ke:

Therapists ne logon ko bas guilt aur self-hatred sikha diya, jise wo self-awareness keh kar
bech dete hain. Lekin feedback ka asli matlab yeh hai:
 ●​ Agar aap apne upar bura mehsoos kar rahe ho, to us ka faida tabhi hai agar aap us
feeling ko use karke apne behavior mein sudhaar lao.​

●​ Agar aap acha mehsoos kar rahe ho lekin logon ko nuksaan pahuncha rahe ho, to
wo bhi bekaar hay.​

Phir relationships ka example deta hai — log pyar mein hote hue bhi jhagdte hain, chhoti
baaton par. Kyun? Kyunki wo bhool jaate hain ke wo relationship mein kis liye aaye the:
intimacy, connection.​
Par wo goal hi bhool jaate hain aur jhagda karne lagte hain garbage ya vacation par.

Phir wo ek hypnosis demonstration ki baat karta hai — aik aurat Linda se poochta hai ke:

“Aapke husband ki koi aisi adat socho jo aapko bura feel karwati ho. Agar aap
usi cheez par khushi feel kar sako to zindagi kitni aasan ho jaaye gi.”

Aur phir use ek visual exercise mein daal deta hai — jaise ki:

"Un moments ko yaad karo, dekho unka haath kaunsa zyada hila, wo kya pehne
hue thay, waqt kya tha..."

Yeh sab cheezein deep trance visualization aur state anchoring techniques ka part hoti
hain — jinka use mindset aur emotional responses ko reprogram karne ke liye hota hai.

Yeh baat zaroori nahi ke yeh facts khud mein hi important hain... kyun ke asal mein jo
important hai... woh shayad facts ho hi na. Tumhari zindagi ke mazi mein aisi experiences
hue hain... jahan jo tum ne socha ke yeh toh bilkul confirmed fact hai... woh baad mein bilkul
ulta nikla. Yeh hi waqt ka nature hai. Waqt sab kuch badal deta hai. Agar waqt na hota... toh
kuch bhi change nahi hota. Light bhi nahi hoti agar motion na hota... aur motion bhi waqt ke
baghair possible nahi.

Abhi, main chahta hoon ke tum apne bachpan mein kaafi peeche jao... aur kuch purani,
pleasant yaani khushgawar yaadein dhoondo... jo tum ne kaafi arsay se yaad nahi ki. Kyun
ke tumhare bachpan mein kaafi kuch hua tha... kuch fun moments... kuch important
cheezein. Abhi sabse important baat yeh hai ke tumhara unconscious mind seekhna shuru
kare... cheezein alag karna shuru kare... memories ko filter karna shuru kare... aur ek aisi
yaad dhoonde jo bas... pleasant ho.

Aur main chahta hoon ke tum... haan, bilkul... is process ko enjoy karo. Jab tumhein woh
pleasant memory mil jaye... toh uss feeling ko mehsoos karo. Us yaad ke andar chale jao.
Smells, sounds, tastes pe dhyan do... jo bhi us moment mein ho raha tha. Kyun ke us
memory ke andar... tumhare conscious mind ke liye enjoyment chhupi hui hai. Aur usi
memory ke andar... tumhare unconscious mind ke liye ek foundation hai... jiske zariye woh
ek nayi learning create kar sakta hai.

Ab, us memory ke andar... us pleasant memory mein... kuch ho raha hai. Tumhein pata hai
us cheez ka naam kya hai? Haan, bilkul. Us naam ko yaad rakhna. Yeh ek set of words hai...
jo tum baad mein yaad kar sakte ho. Jab tum zindagi mein chal rahe the... ek experience se
doosre tak... toh us waqt woh sirf experiences the, memories nahi. Aur jab tum ek pleasant
experience se guzre... toh waqt ke saath woh enjoyment bhi badal gayi... kyun ke kuch
experiences bade unpleasant bhi the... kuch ne daraya... kuch se tumhein ladna para... aur
inhi se tumhein zindagi ke baare mein bohot kuch seekhne ko mila. Haan, bilkul.

Aur jab tum un experiences se guzre... toh tumne khud se kaha "Kabhi dobara nahi." Aur
waqt ke saath... woh unpleasant experiences pichay reh gaye... aur woh powerful learnings
ban gaye... ke duniya se kis tarah deal karna hai. Woh useful the. Lekin... utne useful nahi
jitna woh pleasant memory ka naam. Apne aap se woh naam bolo... aur jab bolo... toh us
memory mein wapas jao. Haan, wapas us pleasant memory mein jao... aur us enjoyment ko
dhoondo. Haan, kyun ke tum ek kaam karna bhool gaye the... kaafi log bhool jaate hain.

Jab aap aik achi yaad se kisi buri ya unpleasant yaad ki taraf jaate ho, to aap us pleasant
yaad ko apne dukh ka ilaaj nahi bana paate... lekin jab aap kisi unpleasant yaad se nikal ke
kisi achi yaad ki taraf jaate ho, to ajeeb si baat hai ke woh bura ehsaas aapke sath chippak
jata hai... Jaise ke woh chorna mushkil hota hai. Yeh baat bewakoofi lagti hai, lekin asaan
hoti hai.

Lekin agar aap thora waqt lein... gehri saans lein... aur us unpleasant yaad ko dheere
dheere fade hone dein... phir agay barhein... wapas us pleasant memory mein jayein... us
yaad mein jo enjoyable thi... to is dafa us memory ke andar jaa kar apne aap se kahen,
"Main yeh kabhi nahi bhoolunga." Kyunke kuch yaadein resources hoti hain... jo aapko
saath le kar chalni chahiyein... hamesha ke liye... aapki madad ke liye... aur kuch yaadein
sirf bojh hoti hain... jin ka ab koi kaam nahi.

Bohat pehle meri aunty ne mujhe kaha tha ke agar kuch bura ho jaye, to kabhi mat
bhoolna... warna woh phir se ho sakta hai... Agar maine unki baat maani hoti to shayad
zindagi bhar sirf buri yaadein yaad rakhne mein laga rehta... Lekin agar aapke sath kuch
bura ho, aur aap sirf apne aap se kahen "Ab kabhi nahi"... to aapka unconscious mind itna
samajhdar hai ke woh aapko agay kisi burai se bachayega.

Agar aapne kuch dair pehle us pleasant memory ko saath nahi liya tha aur bura feel kiya
tha, to keh sakte ho, "Main yeh dobara nahi karunga." Phir wapas us pleasant yaad mein
chale jao... aur shayad koi aur achi memory bhi yaad aa jaye... Shayad aisi jisme halka sa
hansi ka jhatka ho... ya koi pyaar bhara ehsaas... ya sirf masti aur maze...

Aapne bachpan guzara... phir teenager banay... aur ab adult ho gaye ho. Aap ne "make it"
kar liya. Lekin iska matlab yeh nahi ke achi cheezein peeche chorr do. Unhein apne saath le
kar chalo. Dekho... kya sabse pleasant yaad tumhara unconscious mind dhund sakta hai?
Tumhara conscious dimagh yaadein dhoond sakta hai... lekin unconscious bohat tez aur
behtar dhundta hai... Woh aisi yaad laa sakta hai jo shayad tumhara conscious kabhi soch
bhi na sake... lekin jo ek unique tareeqe se pleasant ho.

Ho sakta hai woh aik nahi, bohat si yaadein laaye. Ho sakta hai sirf tukra dikhaye, ya aik
pura scene. Jab aisa ho raha ho... shayad tumhein mehsoos na ho... lekin tum wohi kar rahe
ho jo tumne apni zindagi ke pehle chaar saal roz kiya: yaadon aur tajurbon ko samajhne ki
koshish.

Aur agar tumhein woh thread mil jaye... woh rassi jo tumhein accha feel karaye... to dheere
dheere apne haathon ke taluon ko mehsoos karo... jaise woh ek dosre ko choo rahe ho...
halka sa garamahat aur texture mehsoos karo...

Aur jab woh haath mil jayein... to woh achi feelings apne paas rakhna... aur apne shohar ko
woh aadat ya harkat karte hue imagine karo jo pehle tumhein annoying lagti thi... magar is
dafa usko dekhna aur woh pleasant feeling sath rakhna... aur mehsoos karna ke duniya
mein kisi khaas shakhs ka hona kitna special hota hai...

Yeh sabse unique experience hota hai: kisi ke liye kisi ka khaas hona.

Dekho, aik cheez jo tum ne shayad mehsoos ki ho… wo yeh hay ke agar tum kabhi kisi
kamray mein aik aurat ke sath ho jismein uska chhota bacha bhi ho… aur jab wo bacha ko
dekhti hai aur uske chehre pe jo izhar hota hai… wo kuch bohot khaas hota hai… aur bohot
maani rakhta hai…

Ab… meri zindagi ke tajurbe mein jab mein logon ke sath kaam karta raha hoon… mein ne
aise log dekhe jo bhool gaye thay… mein ne maaon ko dekha jo apne bachon par chillati
hain mere samne—unka daantna, maarna, unhein bura mehsoos karwana… wo us khaas
feeling ko bhool gayi hoti hain, aur samajhti hain ke unka kehna zyada aham hai… ye ek
afsosnaak zaya hai…

Jab tum apne shohar ko uski wo ajeeb si adat karte hue dekho gi, tumhare haathon mein
chaare (palms) honge… aur agar tum wo achi feeling mehsoos karo, wo pleasant si lehr
khushi ki, to tumhare haathon mein sirf chaare nahi honge, balkay koi khaas shakhs bhi
hoga…

Ab mujhe nahi pata… ke tum samajhti ho ke tum afford kar sakti ho… kuch aur karna… lekin
mujhe pata hai ke meri zindagi mein yeh zaroori hai… ke mein har us pehlu ko appreciate
aur enjoy karun… jo ek shakhs ko khas banata hai… uski individuality, uski uniqueness…
sirf kuch pehlu nahi, sab ke sab…

Jo kuch tum yahan seekh rahi ho wo sirf yeh nahi ke tumhara unconscious aik behavior ko
bardasht karne ke laayak bana de… balkay yeh aik tareeqa hai ke tumhara unconscious har
us ajeeb-o-ghareeb adat ko appreciate karna shuru kare…

Mujhe yaad hai jab mein chhota tha… mujhe bread ki crust pasand nahi thi… jab sandwich
milta to sabse pehle mein crust utar ke kutte ko khila deta… mujhe yeh chhup kar karna
padta tha kyunki meri maa ko lagta tha ke Wonder Bread ki crust healthy hoti hai… meri
maa kuch zyada hi seedhi thi. Lekin waqt ke sath mujhe yeh samajh aaya ke har bread ka
taste rubber jaisa nahi hota; kuch breads ki crust waqai achi hoti thi… jaise San Francisco ki
French bread, kuch rye breads, aur kuch cinnamon toast ke naye andaz…

Aur mein ne dekha ke waqt ke sath mere taste badal gaye… aik cheez se doosri cheez ki
taraf… aur jab tumhare taste badalte hain aur tum kisi aisi cheez ko appreciate karna seekh
lete ho… jo pehle nahi karte thay… to tum zyada hoshiyar ho jaate ho… zyada waaqif ho
jaate ho… ke asal mein kisi cheez ko khaas banata kya hai…

Aur is sab ke ilawa… kuch aur bhi ho raha hai… aur wo yeh ke tum ne aik process shuru kar
diya hai… jo kai saalon tak jaari reh sakta hai… apne unconscious resources ko istemal
karne ka… taake tum chaho to trance mein gehra ja sakay… ya sirf apne unconscious se
rabta qaim kar sako… learning aur tabdeeli ke liye…

Ab aik aur cheez jo tumhari madad karegi… wo yeh hai ke tum samjho… ke aik paon ki
ehmiyat doosre ke muqablay mein kya hai. Agar tum apna daayan (right) paon dheere
dheere hilana shuru karo to tum apne aap ko jagaa sakti ho… lekin agar tum daayan paon
ko bilkul hilaaye baghair choor do… aur baayan (left) paon hilana shuru karo… to kuch aur
hoga… karke dekho… hai na ajeeb?

Ab kyu na tum daayan paon ka istemal karo… aur apne ikhtiyar aur control mein apne aap
ko wapas Grand Ballroom mein le aao. Theek hai, shukriya. Ab tum jaake baith sakti ho.

Jo main ne abhi Linda ke saath kiya, usay kai tarikon se samjha ja sakta hai, kyunke isme
kaafi kuch shaamil tha. Kuch cheezen bilkul saaf aur seedhi theen, aur kuch hidden (chhupi
hui). Sabse simple level par yeh ek process instruction tha. Isme hypnotic language patterns
shaamil the aur Linda ko ek sequence ke through guide kiya gaya jo learning tak le jaata hai.

Tum isay reanchoring bhi keh sakte ho. Maine uske positive experiences ko access kiya aur
unhe un situations ke saath jod diya jahan woh apne husband se irritate hoti thi. Yeh cheez
main ne verbally kahi, lekin mere verbal lafzon ka asar sabse kam tha uske response par.
Main ne tonal anchoring bhi ki: ek particular tone use ki uske positive memories anchor
karne ke liye, aur doosri tone uske husband ke behavior anchor karne ke liye. Phir jab main
uske husband ke behavior ke baare mein baat kar raha tha, to tone shift karke wohi positive
tone use ki, taake ek naya response create ho uske husband ke liye.

Iske saath-saath, maine ek content reframe bhi kiya: maine uske husband ke behavior ka
matlab hi badal diya. Ab jab woh us behavior ko dekhe ya sune gi, to woh sirf is baat ki
nishani hoga ke uska husband ek unique insan hai jo uske liye special hai.

Maine ek aur pattern use kiya jo ab tak discuss nahi hua, aur kuch aur patterns bhi use kiye
jo hum tumhein consciously nahi sikhayenge. Jo pattern main refer kar raha hoon woh kaafi
complex hai, aur ek aise metaphor ka use karta hai jo hum normally nahi sikhate. Dekho,
metaphors do tarah ke hotay hain.

Pehla metaphor hota hai isomorphic—iska matlab hai ke agar koi aurat aaye jiske do
betiyan hain jo larti rehti hain, to main usay ek story suna sakta hoon ek gardener ki jiske
garden mein do rose bushes tangled ho gayi thi. Isomorphic metaphor tab change laata hai
jab story ka har hissa real-life situation ke kisi hissa se directly match karta hai. Phir ya to
tum ek specific solution build karte ho, ya koi open-ended ambiguous ending dete ho. Yeh
approach tum David Gordon ki book Therapeutic Metaphors mein padh sakte ho.

Doosra type metaphor ka woh hota hai jo ek emotional ya behavioral command deta hai,
bina iske ke woh directly kisi situation se milta julta ho. Jaise main ek story suna sakta hoon
ek bande ki jo poori tarah convinced tha ke uska tareeqa sahi hai kisi kaam ko karne ka.
Hum sab ek computer design kar rahe the, aur sabka apna apna idea tha. Usne kaha ke
transformer ke sath ek kaam karega jo kisi aur ko feasible nahi lagta tha. Jab hum usse
disagree hue to usne chillaya, kaha ke woh humare jaise bewakoofon se baat nahi karega,
aur woh humse zyada samajhdaar hai. Phir usne transformer uthaya, connect kiya, switch
on kiya… aur current lag gaya, aur woh mar gaya.

Samjhe? Kahani sirf story nahi hoti. Har lafz ka matlab hota hai. Aur har metaphor ya to
direction deta hai… ya warning.

Yeh jo metaphor ka tareeqa bataya gaya hai, woh isomorphic metaphor se mukhtalif hai.
Iska maqsad kisi cheez se doori ya parhez hasil karna hota hai — yani yeh aik emotional ya
behavioral reaction nikaalta hai, na ke seedha koi mushkil hal dhoondhta hai.

Jaise ke jab writer ne Linda ko woh misaal di ke kuch maaen bhool gayi thi ke unhon ne
bachay kyun paida kiye thay — yeh bhi aik metaphor tha jo kisi cheez ko avoid karne ka
jazba jagata hai.

Is tarah ke metaphors mein aam kahaniyaan ya examples diye jaate hain jo kisi khas bande
ke experience ke mutabiq nahi hote, lekin phir bhi har kisi mein aik universal reaction paida
karte hain. Jaise writer ne apni misaal di ke uski taste naturally badal gayi jab woh bara ho
raha tha — yeh kahani kisi specific shakhs ke saath match nahi karti, lekin har kisi ne
zindagi mein kabhi na kabhi kisi cheez ka taste pasand ya napasand kiya hota hai.

Yeh misaalein aise emotional ya psychological responses trigger karti hain jo hypnosis mein
kaam aati hain — jaise spontaneous change yaani khud-ba-khud tabdeeli ka ehsaas.

Milton Erickson ka tareeqa bhi yahi hota tha. Woh trance mein le jaakar logon ko yeh yaad
dilaate ke jab woh school mein naye naye gaye thay aur alphabet seekhna mushkil lagta
tha... lekin ab wohi letters reading aur writing ka base hain. Yeh aik universal metaphor hai
jo yeh batata hai ke koi mushkil cheez aasaan ban sakti hai.

Phir woh logon ko yeh bhi yaad dilate ke jab woh chhote thay aur crawl karte thay to sirf
carpet ya table ke neeche ka hissa dekhte thay. Jab kharay hue to poori duniya ka nazaria
badal gaya. Yeh misaal indirectly yeh sikhaati hai ke agar tum apni perception (soch ya
nazar ka tareeqa) badal do to tum naye skills hasil kar sakte ho.

Aur yeh zaroori nahi ke yeh sab kuch waqai is tarah hua ho — lekin jab koi adult apne
bachpan ke experience ko sochta hai to unko lagta hai ke yeh sab kuch is tarah hua hoga. Is
wajah se har adult ka response is story par ek jaisa hota hai.

Yani yeh ek hypnotic storytelling ka tareeqa hai jo kisi bhi shakhs ko naye jazbaat,
nazariye aur tabdeelion ke liye tayyar karta hai — bina directly kehne ke ke “badlo.”

Agar tum kisi ko uss tajurbe ko yaad karwane mein kamyab ho jao, aur uske baad jo baatein
tum karta ho wo aise tajurbe hon jo kisi specific maslay ke perception change karne ka base
ban sakti hain, to ye sirf aik kahani nahi hoti — ye aik hidden command hoti hai. Ye
command hoti hai ke "apni soch badlo iss naye data ke zariye."

Is seminar mein hum is type ki metaphor detail mein nahi seekhenge, lekin tum apni
hypnosis aur bhi zyada powerful bana sakte ho agar tum inhein simple tareeqe se use karo.
Socho ke tum kin reactions ko elicit (nikal) kar sakte ho jo change karne mein madadgar
hon. Phir socho ke kaunse universal experiences hain jo naturally wo reaction laate hain,
aur un kahaniyon ko client ko sunao jab wo trance mein ho.

Hypnosis ke dauraan aik bohot kaam ki cheez hoti hai yeh elicit karna ke "tumhara
unconscious system smart hai aur uss par bharosa kiya ja sakta hai."

Socho — kaunse universal experiences hain jahan log bina consciously soche sahi
response dete hain?

For example: Jab tum daurtay ho, tumhara body automatically decide karta hai ke kab heart
fast beat kare, kab breathing tez ho, aur kab slow down ho. Consciously tum nahi jantay ke
exactly kitni speed se heart beat karni chahiye takay oxygen cells tak theek se pohnche —
magar unconscious system sab kuch perfectly manage karta hai.

Yani point yeh hai: client ke dimagh ko aise natural experiences yaad karwao jahan uska
unconscious already kaam kar raha hota hai — taake wo trance mein yeh maan le ke uska
andar ka system reliable hai, aur wo us par change ke liye trust kar sake.
CHAPTER V : Reframing in Trance